JP7425551B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, so-called "managed gaming machines" have been known that circulate a plurality of game balls inside the gaming machine, making it unnecessary to directly pay out game balls to players or game balls used in games (for example, Patent Document 1 below. Such managed game machines allow players to enjoy games without touching the game balls.

JP2013-106760A

Since the above-mentioned managed game machine plays games using game balls sealed inside the game machine, the number of game balls (number of balls held) used by the player in the game is recorded and managed using an electromagnetic method. Such a managed gaming machine is mainly composed of a main control section that controls gaming operations in an integrated manner, and a sub-control section that manages lending requests to the game ball lending device and the number of balls held. It controls the symbol fluctuation display game and monitors the winnings in each winning slot, but since the frame control section manages the number of balls held, the main control section controls the number of prize balls, the occurrence of jackpots, and the symbol fluctuations. It is necessary to transmit important information that occurs as the game progresses, such as information regarding the start/stop of the game and changes in the game state, to the slot control unit in real time. Therefore, it is desirable to devise a way to smoothly exchange information between the main control side and the frame control section side without increasing the control burden.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a managed gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

The above objects of the present invention are achieved by the following means.
(1) A managed gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the execution of various gaming processes related to gaming operations, and that plays games by cyclically using gaming balls sealed inside,
A main control means that controls game progress processing related to game progress;
A ball-pulling means that can control a ball-pulling state in which game balls can be ejected to the outside of a gaming machine and a non-ball-pulling state in which they cannot be ejected, and whether the ball is in the ball-pulling state or the non-ball-pulling state. and a ball-pulling state monitoring means for monitoring the ball-pulling state, and when it is determined by the ball-pulling state monitoring means that the ball-pulling state is in the ball-pulling state, the ball-pulling state information indicating that the ball-pulling state is in the ball-pulling state is transmitted to the main control means. a sub-control means comprising a transmitting means for transmitting;
It is composed of
The main control means is configured to limit the execution of the game progress process when receiving the ball drawing state information from the sub control means;
A managed gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a managed gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

1 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment (first embodiment) of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a game board and performance buttons according to the same embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a control device according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the winning type and game state transition according to the same embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the embodiment. This is a game flow for explaining the game contents (normal, time saving, ST mode) according to the same embodiment. This is a game flow for explaining the game contents (omens, ceiling, heaven mode) according to the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main processing based on the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main control side timer interruption processing concerning the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10. 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling function management processing in FIG. 12. 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 12. 13 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 12. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in FIG. 17. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing based on the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing concerning the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game state transition table selection table according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing a gaming state transition table according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing a ceiling game state transition table according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing a winning fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, omen, ceiling, heaven time saving) according to the same embodiment. It is a figure showing the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table for ST (for the beginning of ST, the middle of ST, and the end of ST) according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, omen, ceiling, heaven time saving) according to the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table for ST (for the beginning of ST, the middle of ST, and the final stage of ST) according to the same embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship among the game mode type, internal game state type, variable pattern distribution designation number, and game state determination number according to the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in ST mode based on the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in ST mode based on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in ST mode based on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-read notice according to the embodiment. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a modification of a privilege provision form concerning the same embodiment. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a modification of a privilege provision form concerning the same embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a control device according to another embodiment (second embodiment) of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart showing the first half of main control side main processing according to the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing the latter half of main control-side main processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main processing (second half) concerning the ball removal state monitoring configuration of the second embodiment. 38 is a diagram showing a source code of a part of the main control side main processing (processing of S059, S065, and S037) in FIG. 37. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows 4ms timer interruption processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. 40 is a flowchart showing the input management process in FIG. 39. 41 is a flowchart showing the winning event storage process in FIG. 40. It is a flowchart which shows an example of winning event storage processing of other processing. 41A is a flowchart showing the ring buffer storage process in FIG. 41A. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows 108ms timer interrupt processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. 44 is a flowchart showing the first half of the message transmission process in FIG. 43. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the latter half of the message transmission process in FIG. 43. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the serial output processing in FIGS. 44A and 44B. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the first half of the ring buffer transmission process in FIG. 44B. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the latter half of the ring buffer transmission process in FIG. 44B. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of main control side main processing concerning another embodiment (3rd embodiment) of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows 54ms timer interrupt processing based on 3rd Embodiment. 49 is a flowchart showing the first half of the message transmission process in FIG. 48. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the latter half of the message transmission process in FIG. 48. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the message reception process in FIG. 48. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming machine installation information notification message and a gaming machine installation information response message. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming machine information notification message. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining type information (upper byte side) related to gaming information (2-byte structure) of a gaming machine information notification message. It is a figure which shows the explanation of the count information (lower byte side) regarding the game information (2 byte structure) of the game machine information notification message, and an example of the game information (type information+count information). It is a diagram showing an example of game information (type information + count information). It is a diagram showing an example of game information (type information + count information). It is a diagram showing an example of game information (type information + count information). It is a diagram showing an example of game information (type information + count information). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming machine information response message. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ring buffer and a shift buffer according to the present invention. 41B is a diagram showing a switch count table used for the winning event storage process in FIGS. 41A and 41B. FIG. 46B is a diagram showing a game information (type information + count information) table used in the ring buffer transmission process in FIG. 46B. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a control example related to a free game.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

[First embodiment]
<1. Configuration overview: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the external appearance of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of this gaming area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and by inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be changed. , by operating the front frame 2 to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 relative to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

A front operation panel 7 is disposed below the glass door 6 and is pivotally supported to the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing ejected game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also includes a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the gaming machine 1, and a ball removal button 14 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of valuable media inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.

In addition, the upper tray unit 8 includes a push-button type production button 13 (first operation means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be operated in a direction is provided. The production button 13 and direction keys 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and are used during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period ), and if a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, continuous press, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the performance may change before and after that operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means allow players to set their favorite game settings on the "game setting screen" related to waiting for a customer (during "demonstration start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)" described later). It is also used when performing This game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen that allows the player to make game settings such as the volume and light intensity as desired by the player. Note that the production button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside, and depending on the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b, the operation reception valid period (for example, lit or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation reception period are determined. It is possible to notify the reception invalid period (for example, when the lights are off).

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 is provided for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3). This firing device 32 has a firing performance of about 100 shots per minute.

Further, on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided to produce a sound production effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, decorative lamps 45 (for display purposes) are placed in appropriate places of the gaming machine, such as decorative members around the front frame of the glass door 6 and inside the center decoration body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be explained. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 is attached to the game board 3 in an annular manner as a board partitioning member to guide the launched game balls, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is The four corners of the gaming area 3a are non-gaming areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided approximately in the center of the gaming area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36 independently displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern Various effects are displayed using images, including a fluctuating display operation (fluctuating display and stop display) of three decorative symbols: , middle symbol, and right symbol (see FIG. 5).

Further, within the game area 3a, a center decoration body 48 is provided in the form of a winding circle around the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36. The center decoration body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration body 48 and the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally equipped with an armor frame part 48b, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and also distributes the flow path of the game balls to the left and right depending on the strength of the launch of the game balls or the stroke length. It acts as a flow path distribution means that makes it possible to do this. In this embodiment, a play area through which game balls can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration body 48 and the ball guiding rail 5, and the game balls shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left downstream path 3b on the left side of the center decorative body 48 or the right downstream path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as a display area for various functions, with a 7-segment display (with dots) located at the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b ( A second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a ``special symbol variable display game'' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" expressed by 7 segments. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative pattern based on an image in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays various preview effects (effect images). At the same time, a ``decorative symbol variation display game'' is executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be explained later.

Further, in the various function display section, a composite display device (LED display for pending composite display) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. What is called complex is the display of the number of pending balls for special symbol 1, the display of the number of pending balls for special symbol 2, the display of the number of pending balls for normal symbol, the variable time reduction function in operation (during time reduction), and This is because it is a hold/time-saving/high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a "composite display device") that has five display functions: notification of a high-probability state (high-accuracy medium).

Further, in the various function display section, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) formed by arranging a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, a normal symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of normal symbols expressed by two LEDs. For example, as a fluctuating display operation, the normal symbols by LEDs alternately turn on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with one side lit, it becomes clear whether the normal symbol fluctuating display game is correct or not. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b shows whether it is advantageous to hit the game ball to the right, which aims so that the game ball passes (flows down) the right-hand downstream path 3c, depending on the combination of lighting and non-lighting states of the LEDs. It is reported whether it is advantageous to "hit the ball to the left" by aiming so as to pass (flow down) the downstream path 3b. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is reported that the player is advantageous for right-handed players, and when the LED is turned off, it is reported that the player is advantageous for left-handed players.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-hand hitting display device 39b, and is formed by arranging two LEDs (round display LEDs). This round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot based on a combination of the lighting/extinguishing states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, there are an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means). Detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting hole sensor 34a, lower starting hole sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of them to detect the passage of a game ball. has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of ``Special Figure 1'' (also sometimes abbreviated as ``Special Figure 1''), and does not have a ``starting opening/closing means'' that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged. It is configured as a prize-winning device. In this embodiment, due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the ball flows down the left flow path to the upper starting port 34. The game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3b has a configuration that allows the ball to enter (win) easily, whereas the game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a ``winning rate variable winning device'' that can vary the winning rate of game balls in the starting hole by means of opening and closing the starting hole. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wings (movable members) 47 are provided as the starting port opening/closing means, and when the movable wings 47 perform the opening/closing operation, the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, is provided. can be opened or expanded.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is connected to the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , sometimes abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of the lower starting opening 35, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. The state is converted into an open state (easy-to-win state) that makes it easy to win a prize, and a closed state (difficult-to-win state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it maintains a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which winning to the lower starting port 35 is impossible.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are 4 general winning holes 43 on the left side (43a to 43d) and 1 on the right side (43e), a total of 5 general winning holes 43. A general winning hole sensor 43h (corresponding to each general winning hole 43a to 43e) is formed to detect the passage of a ball.

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally above the right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right downstream path 3c. It is being This normal symbol starting opening 37 is a winning opening related to the normal symbol fluctuating display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof is a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) that detects a passing game ball. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downstream path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downstream path 3b side, but is not limited to this, and may be formed in both downstream paths. .

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downstream route 3c, there is a special variable winning hole configured to allow the large winning hole 50 to be opened or enlarged by a retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that enters the big winning hole 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The area around the big prize opening 50 is a bulge (decorative member) 55 that bulges out from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulge 55 forms the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c. There is. When the big winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (big winning opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of this bulging part 55, the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c ( It forms part of the upper side 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right downstream path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, or more precisely, in the gaming area above the big prize opening 50, there is a flow path correction plate approximately parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is provided in a protruding manner, and serves to draw the game balls flowing down toward the big prize opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulge 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along the Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected in the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the grand prize opening 50 is covered by the push-in type open door 52b (grand prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls on this, and further the gauge structure (not shown) (The arrangement of the game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting opening 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting port 35, but the opening door 52b has retreated into the game board surface and the big winning port 50 When the game ball is in an open state (big winning hole open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning hole 50.

In the case of this embodiment, when the player aims the firing position toward the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball aims so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c), the upper starting port 34 side The game ball is configured to be difficult to be guided or not guided. Therefore, if it is in the "big winning hole closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting hole 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

If we classify the above-mentioned prize winning means to which of the left and right downstream paths they belong, that is, which of the left downstream path 3b or the right downstream path 3c can win prizes, the winning means belongs to the left downstream path 3b. , there are an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and the general winning holes 43a to 43d on the left side, and winning means belonging to the right downstream route 3c include an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole. 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. Note that when the movable wing piece 47 is in an open state (starting port open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left downstream path 3b and the right downstream path 3c, and prizes cannot be won from either the left or right downstream path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition for the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage of a game ball (winning) into the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the gaming area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 actually flows rightward. It can be said that this is a winning method that belongs only to route 3c. Moreover, the big prize opening 50 belongs only to the right downstream path 3c, and only game balls from the right downstream path 3c can win.

(Composition favoring right-handed hitting under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is aimed to "hit right" so as to pass through the right downstream path 3c, the game ball tends to land in the normal symbol start opening 37, but the upper start opening The game ball is configured to be difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, if it is in the "big winning hole closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting hole 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, this movable wing piece 47 is designed to operate in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal game state) when the "electrical support state (electrical support state)" described later occurs. Therefore, in the case of the electric support state, instead of "left-handed hitting" in which the game ball aims to pass through the left downstream path 3b, "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right downstream path 3c. ” is considered to be advantageous, and if there is no electric support (state without electric support described later), the game ball will be directed to the left downstream path 3b instead of the “right-handed” aiming so that the game ball passes through the right downstream path 3c. It is considered advantageous to hit left-handed, aiming to pass through the target. That is, depending on the game state, the progress of the game is made to work advantageously or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left downstream path 3b and right downstream path 3c the game ball is caused to flow down. Although details will be described later, gaming states that involve electric support include a time saving state and variable probability state, and gaming states that involve non-electric support include a normal state and a potential state.

Each winning opening, such as the above-mentioned upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, normal symbol starting opening 37, big winning opening 50, or general winning opening 43a to 43e, functions as a winning means arranged within the gaming area 3a. In addition, detection of the upper starting hole sensor 34a, the lower starting hole sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a, the big winning hole sensor 52a, or the general winning hole sensor 43h (corresponding to each general winning hole 43a to 43e individually), etc. The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. It should be noted that the number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the winning means described above can be changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In addition, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flowing downward path 3b and/or the right flowing downward path 3c is difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win is changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. be able to.

When a game ball enters each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, the upper starting opening 34 has 3 pieces, the lower starting opening 35 has 1 piece, the normal symbol starting opening 37 has 0 pieces (no prize balls)), the big winning opening 50 has 15 pieces, and the general winning openings 43a to 43e have 3 pieces. is paid out. The game balls that do not enter into each of the above-mentioned winning holes are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out hole 49. Here, "winning" refers to a winning opening that does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in a game ball into its interior, or a winning opening that takes in a gaming ball into its inside, but is a passing type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37 ), it means that a game ball passes through that gate, and in reality, if a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, a "winning" is detected in that winning hole. is treated as having occurred. The game balls related to this winning are also referred to as "winning balls."

<Movable role object>
Furthermore, within the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game balls. In this embodiment, a first movable accessory 80 is disposed on the upper right side of the center ornament 48, and a second movable accessory 90 is disposed diagonally below the right side. The first movable accessory 80 includes a clock face part 81 consisting of a number display part divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from Roman letters "I" to "XII" attached, and a clock face part 81 on the clock face part 81. It has a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand that are rotatably formed, forming a "wall clock section" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also referred to as a "watch-type accessory." The clock face section 81 has full-color LEDs on the back side or inside each sector section indicated by the hour hand, or the number sectors themselves are composed of full-color LEDs, and each number sector has a different color independently. It has a configuration that allows it to emit light.

In addition, the second movable accessory 90 arranges a corolla consisting of a plurality of petals around the flower center, and further arranges a calyx around the outside of the corolla to make the perianth double, thereby changing the shape of the flower. A flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging motion, and the whole is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90. In addition, in the flower-shaped portion 91, a plurality of petals can rotate around the flower center. This flower-shaped accessory 90 normally remains stationary at its original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) on the edge inside the LCD screen or on the side outside the LCD screen, and when predetermined operating conditions are met, the arm 90 is tilted, and the flower-shaped portion 91 moves together with the arm 92 to a position (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 2) covering the liquid crystal screen. When the flower-shaped part 91 is moved to the production position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 2, it rotates at the tip of the arm, and the semi-transparent flower center and petal parts are illuminated from behind by a lamp or full-color LED, making them beautifully illuminated. . When the flower-shaped accessory 90 completes its operation, it returns from the performance position indicated by the broken line to the origin position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 is capable of a plurality of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as a rotation motion of the petals, and the arm 92 is capable of performing a predetermined tilting motion in addition to a full-open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of operation patterns are possible, such as a semi-tilting operation in which the arm is tilted to a tilting angle, a vibration operation in which the arm vibrates rattling, and an inching operation. The above-mentioned clock-shaped accessories 80 (clock hands 82) and flower-shaped accessories 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for preview effects, as well as setting suggestions as described below, depending on their operation mode. It is also used when performing (appearing) a performance.

<2. Control device: Figure 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall gaming operations (gaming operation control). Then, upon receiving a production control command from the main control unit 20, a production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") that centrally controls the execution (appearance) of production by the production means. ), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a payout control board (payout control means) that generates the necessary power (including a backup power supply) from an external power source to each board of the gaming machine. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG. 3.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU), and a ROM 202 (main control It is equipped with a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with periodic interrupts, constant cycle pulse output generation functions (bit rate generator), and time measurement functions. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that detects when the power is turned on, shut off, or a power abnormality, and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, and a control program. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors malfunctions of the computer; an IAT circuit that monitors whether programs are being executed correctly within a preset address range; It also includes a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown), and start backup processing prior to power cutoff. The game operation that was in place before the power was cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). This gaming machine 1 is capable of retaining each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination (random number size: 65536)) by sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state. , and use that random number for the jackpot lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as trying to win.

The main control unit 20 also includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winnings in the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winnings in the lower starting hole 35, and a game ball that detects winnings in the normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the passage of the symbol, a big winning hole sensor 52a that detects winning into the big winning hole 50, and a general winning hole sensor 43h that detects winning into the general winning hole 43 are connected, The main control unit 20 receives detection signals from these sensors and determines which winning hole the game ball has won (entered into).

In addition, an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects game balls (so-called out balls) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port is connected to the main control unit 20, and can receive the detection signal. It has become. The main control unit 20 includes an out pitch counting means for counting the number of out pitches based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out pitches is one of the "gaming performance information" defined by a specific value. For example, if "today's total number of out balls is 30,000 shots", the operation information that game machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today ("total number of out balls (pieces) / firing performance (100 shots per minute) = operation time") can be obtained. Further, the number of out pitches is used to calculate a base value (one of the game performance information), which will be described later.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraud on the gaming machine 1. Based on the detection signal, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activities against gaming machines.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected to each other, and the main control section 20 can transmit control signals for driving and controlling these.

Further, special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbols.

Further, a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can display and control various information displayed on these devices. ing.

Further, an external terminal board 21 for the frame is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine via the external terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to send the data to external devices such as "data counter DT" and "hall computer HC". The predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, winning information, special symbol fluctuation start/fluctuation stop information, prize ball number information, and various security information (cheating detection information, RAM clearing, door opening, Occurrence information such as setting changes), etc. The above-mentioned "data counter DT" is based on the gaming information included in the outer end signal, and collects specific information about the gaming machine, such as the number of jackpots, the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations), and the number of games executed between jackpots. It is a gaming information notification device that can notify users, and is usually installed on the top of a gaming machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is a pachinko hall computer that monitors and collects the gaming progress of gaming machines based on the gaming information included in the external signal, and centrally manages the operating status of the gaming machines installed in the pachinko hall. This is a management computer exclusively for (gaming parlors).

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type test of gaming machines based on the regulations regarding the certification of gaming machines, type testing, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (HOTSUKYOU). Thus, a type test signal for specifying gaming operations in real time can be output from the frame external terminal board 21. Furthermore, when a gaming machine that has passed the type test is installed in a pachinko hall, no changes to the compliant control program are permitted. Therefore, even after installation in a pachinko hall, the type test signal is repeatedly output and processed.

The main control unit 20 also includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory within the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key that can be inserted and turned on/off to change setting values. A setting key switch 94 that can be switched between a setting change permissible state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF), a setting change switch 95 for changing a set value in a setting change permissible state, and a setting change switch. A setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the switch 95 is connected, and the main control section 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, setting change switch 95, and setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities regarding the set values, and cannot be turned on or off from outside the gaming machine unless the front frame 2 is opened. It becomes.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information regarding setting values is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal to display and control the display. . The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display, and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but also includes a payout control board 28, a firing control board 29, and a relay board (a relay board that relays connections between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: (not shown), or the performance control unit (performance control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate location inside the gaming machine.

(About setting values)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that allows the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), to be changed in stages. The above-mentioned "setting value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be checked on the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk solely based on the business strategy of the pachinko hall (gaming parlor).

For example, the "setting value" specifies the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a winning type that will cause the condition device described below to operate) in stages, and the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability (jackpot The probability of winning) is set high to give players an advantage. Such setting values can be provided in at least two stages (at least a first setting value and a second setting value). In this embodiment, there are six setting values, settings 1 to 6. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, setting 3 is 1/222, and setting 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, etc. That is, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win a jackpot (the machine discount becomes higher), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines events that affect the machine allocation by stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a jackpot. In other words, the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low and/or the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low can be configured to differ depending on the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability changing function described later is activated), the probability can increase to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189 and the increase rate is 3 times, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

Furthermore, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the probability of winning one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability for all jackpots 1 to 4 may be. It may be configured such that only the winning probability of certain jackpots 1 to 3 is increased (in this case, jackpot 4 will have a common winning probability for all setting values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, only jackpot 1) ) may be configured so that only the winning probability is increased (in this case, jackpots 2 to 4 will have a common winning probability for all set values). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the total winning probability of jackpots 1 to 4 is. Further, the probability of winning a small win type that does not trigger the activation of the condition device may be changed in accordance with a set value, as in the case of the jackpot described above.

(About changing settings)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is allowed, and when the power is turned on by other switch operations, It is controlled in a state where setting changes are prohibited. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permissible state, the current display value of the setting display 97 changes to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→..." The display is switched in a cyclical manner within the usage range of settings 1 to 6, as shown below. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, if you turn on the setting change completion switch 96 (setting confirmation operation), the current displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( Setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permission state is terminated, and the game will thereafter be started under the determined setting values. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes a setting value selection means that can select one of the setting values from among a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and a setting value selected by the setting value selection means. and set value setting means for setting. Note that it may be a "setting-less gaming machine" that does not have the above-mentioned setting function.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information regarding the special symbol variation display game and error information to the performance control unit 24 according to the processing state using a performance control command. . However, in order to prevent acts of fraud from outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits signals to the production control unit 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which it is not possible to receive signals from the production control unit 24. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Furthermore, a performance display device 99 (information display means) that notifies information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") regarding game results for a predetermined period (specific gaming period) is connected to the main control section 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display thereof. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which a display part and a circuit part are unitized are arranged horizontally. are arranged and mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to constitute a display capable of displaying a four-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above-mentioned "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko halls and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. This is information for investigating whether the game machine's original ball output performance (designed ball output performance) is being properly demonstrated, in other words, "information regarding gaming performance (gaming performance information)". . Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player is playing the game, unlike the preview presentation, setting suggestion presentation, etc. that will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location that is visible to the player, but is mounted at an easily visible location inside the gaming machine, such as on the control board or on the board case that protects it.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (the state where the jackpot lottery probability is low probability (normal probability) and there is no electric support, which will be described later) (the number of paid out balls at normal time), and the cumulative number of out balls during the normal state (normal The number of pieces out at normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of pieces paid out at normal times by the number of pieces out at normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated as number of pieces paid out at normal times ÷ number of pieces out at normal times x 100: Normal time base value) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information" and displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance display 99. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display 99 as a value rounded to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), if the number of out pitches being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000), the measurement will be stopped once. , the base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of the measurement is not the number of pieces out in normal times, but the cumulative number of pieces out that is measured during all gaming states (including during winning games). The number of pitches (number of outs in all states) is used, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. In addition, the processing program related to display control and base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are set in an area (outside area memory) that is different from the area (in area memory) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. ing. Furthermore, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, but is not particularly limited as long as it is useful gaming performance information.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and this payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (fire control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32, and a payout control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that performs the following is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to send information regarding the payout operation status to the main control unit 20 ( status signals), etc. When it is necessary to pay out balls, the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control command regarding payout (a “payout control command” that specifies the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, and on the other hand, The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not), and a front frame 2 and/or a front operation panel. A door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) that detects the opening/closing state of 7 is connected, and the dispensing control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 receives detection information from a supply-out detection sensor 19a that detects a lack of supply of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b that detects game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, etc., provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism section (not shown) for paying out game balls). ing.

The dispensing control board 29 uses detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b as the state signals to detect a "ball jam" indicating a full state. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2/front operation panel 7 is open, "Out of supply signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormality in prize ball payout (insufficient payout, excessive payout) The configuration is such that various status signals can be transmitted to the main control unit 20, such as a "counting error signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door open error), and whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal ( It monitors whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error).

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the firing permission signal ES outputted from the dispensing control board 29, and controls the firing operation handle 15. The game ball can be launched by operating the ball. Specifically, the payout control board 29 outputs the firing permission signal ES, and a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal ES is not output, no firing operation is performed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength with which the game ball is launched can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control section 24)
The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 (which functions as a work area and buffer memory). It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), an audio control section (sound source LSI), an RTC function section (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16-bit (8-bit counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., to control the overall production operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and it also contains real-time time information such as the current time ("what hour, minute, and second it is now") and/or date (month, day, day of the week). Serves as a clock means of providing calendar information. In addition, like the main control unit 20, it is also provided with a backup function and a soft random number generation means (for example, a random number generation means for a lottery for performance).

The main roles of the production control unit 24 are to receive production control commands from the main control unit 20, to select and decide production based on the production control commands, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, to control the sound of the speaker 46, and to perform various functions. These include light emission control of performance LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other performance LEDs), operation control of various movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90), and the like.

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and an image ROM that the VDP develops. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs the control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and buffer memory.

The production control unit 24 also controls a light display device 45a that includes various production LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b to display a light display in order to perform image display production, light production, sound production, or movable body production. A control unit, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and movable accessory motors 80c and 91c that operate the movable accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped part 91, and arm 92). , 92c, etc. are provided.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable accessory is connected to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24 detects the current movement of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 monitors malfunctions in the operation of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs a predetermined error notification process if a malfunction occurs.

Further, the production control unit 24 is connected with a production button switch 13a that detects the operation of the production button 13, and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' that detects the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d), and controls the production. The unit 24 is capable of receiving operation detection signals from the performance buttons 13 and direction keys 75.

When the production control unit 24 receives a production control command sent from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 selects a production pattern by lottery or uniquely from among a plurality of types of production patterns prepared in advance based on the information included in the command. Then, various presentation means are controlled at the necessary timing to produce the desired presentation. As a result, the display of an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and other LEDs for effect (light effect) are realized. A "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized by chronologically developing various performance patterns (fluctuating decorative pattern display operations, preview performances, etc.). Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 determines which direction to perform with respect to the performance button 13 and/or direction key 75 based on operation detection signals from the performance button switch 13a and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' during a predetermined operation acceptance valid period. The structure is such that it is possible to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, a press, a long press, a continuous press, the order in which the direction keys 75 are pressed in the up, down, left, or right directions, etc.) (operation identification means). It has a configuration that allows execution and control of the performance.

The production control command defines the function with a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON, EVENT Bit 7 is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be sent, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for sending the command to the production control unit 24, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sends the command for the first time. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, event information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the strobe signal was transmitted, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period to ensure that the CPU 241 (performance control CPU) can receive commands.

In addition, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the production control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 is in the middle of executing interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically). Even if a command reception interrupt occurs, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the corresponding processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interruption processing is performed with priority.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the above-mentioned control device (FIG. 3) will be explained.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 operates based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, a game ball enters the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (winning). A "jackpot lottery" will be held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game by displaying special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, displays the result as a special symbol. It is derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the upper starting slot 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the lower starting slot 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result regarding the upper starting opening 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result regarding the lower starting opening 35 is derived on the special symbol displaying device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that a game ball enters the upper starting port 34, a first special symbol variable display game is started by displaying the special symbol 1 in a variable manner, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and a second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variable display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is a “jackpot”, a predetermined “jackpot” is displayed. If the jackpot lottery result is a "small win", the special symbol that is being displayed in a fixed manner will be stopped and displayed in a predetermined "small win" mode, and in other cases, in a predetermined "loss" mode. The game result (jackpot lottery result) is derived.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2." In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "Special Symbol 1" and "Special Symbol 2" will be simply referred to as "Special Symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "Special Symbol"), and "Special Symbol Variation Display Game 1" and " It may be referred to as the ``special symbol variation display game'' without distinguishing it from the ``special symbol variation display game 2''.

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (actual game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various performances will be held. When the special symbol variable display game ends, the decorative symbol variable display game also ends, a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the special symbol display device, and the jackpot lottery result is reflected on the liquid crystal display device 36. Decorative patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by a decorative symbol variation display game that includes a decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is a "jackpot", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (for example, 7 segments is displayed as “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left,” “middle,” and “right.” In each display area of ``, the display mode in which the decorative pattern reflects the ``jackpot'' (winning pattern: For example, in each display area of ``left'', ``middle'', and ``right'', 3 decorative patterns are ``7'', ``jackpot'') 7” (display mode of “7”)).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "jackpot" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the big winning hole solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 is activated, and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big winning hole 50, making the game more enjoyable than in the normal state. A special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the grand prize opening by the opening door 52b passes a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls into the grand prize opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number ( With one activation of the accessory, its entrance opens or the winning area is opened or expanded until the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning hole (for example, 10 balls) is reached. A "round game" in which the big prize opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the round game end condition (closing condition) is met) is played for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above-mentioned jackpot game starts, the opening effect is first performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game is played up to a predetermined number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). It will be held twice. When the maximum number of rounds ends, an ending effect is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and the series of jackpot games ends. Note that when the current round game ends, the next round game starts after a predetermined interval time (inter-round INT). Further, during a round game, an "in-round effect" appears, and between round games (during inter-round INT), an "inter-round INT effect" appears. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 specifically determines the information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 (winning). , "Jackpot", "Small hit", or "Lose" on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting hole sensor 34a or the lower starting hole sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding special symbols) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the type of the jackpot is determined. If it is a "small win", it is the type of the small win, and if it is a "loss", the Perform a jackpot lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' to determine the type of loss (if there is only one type of jackpot, small hit, or loss, there is no need to conduct a symbol lottery, so the lottery can be omitted) ), and based on the lottery result information, the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (special stop symbol) are determined. Then, as a performance control command that specifies the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" that includes at least special symbol fluctuation pattern information (for example, jackpot lottery results, information regarding the special symbol fluctuation time, etc.) is sent to the production control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the performance control section 24. In this embodiment, in order to provide a rich variety of presentations, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information regarding special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information) is also transmitted to the presentation control section 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery results, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern information may also include information specifying the execution of a specific preview effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-continuation effect (including the number of pseudo-continuations) described later). can. In detail, the fluctuation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into "win fluctuation patterns" in the case of a hit and "loss fluctuation patterns" in the case of a loss, depending on the jackpot lottery result.These fluctuation patterns include, for example, "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of a reach effect (including specifying the type of reach), "Normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of a reach effect, and 'Pseudo combination pattern' that specifies the execution of a pseudo linked effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a "normal variation pattern with pseudo-coupling" that specifies the execution of a pseudo-coupling effect but not specifying the execution of a ready-to-reach production. In addition, for the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuation variation pattern, a longer variation time is basically determined than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the performance time for the preview performance.

The performance control unit 24 performs time-series display during the decorative pattern fluctuation display game based on information included in the performance control commands (here, the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The contents of the performance (performance scenario) to be developed and the decorative symbols to be displayed in the final stage (decorative stop symbols) are determined, and according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, the preview performance during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game is decided. Controls the fluctuating display performance of decorative designs. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36 in time synchronization with the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. The period has substantially the same time width. Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, in accordance with the performance scenario, and develops various performances in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of images (image production) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of sound effects (sound production), and the lighting and blinking driving of the production LEDs such as the decorative lamps 45 (light production) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise necessary. In addition, for the convenience of explanation, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (especially the special symbol variation display game) is expressed as "number of symbol variations", "number of variations", or "* rotation ("*" is optional). sometimes referred to as "the number of

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main control unit 20 performs an "assistance winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, a normal symbol fluctuation display game is started by displaying the normal symbols expressed by the LED on the normal symbol display device 39a, and after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the result is displayed on the LED lighting and non-lighting. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance win", the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lighting).

When this "assistance hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see Fig. 3) is activated, which causes the movable blade 47 to open in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 to open. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged and becomes in a state where it is easy to flow in (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal power open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this normal power opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 operates (opening operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting port open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) has elapsed, or until the number of winning balls into the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be in an open state where it is opened or expanded, and either of these conditions is satisfied. In this case, the opening operation of the movable blade 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation holding ball)
In this embodiment, a prize is won at each start opening 34, 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37 during a symbol variation display game, a normal symbol variation display game, a jackpot game, a small win game, or a normal power release game. If this occurs, that is, if a detection signal is input from the upper starting port sensor 34a, the lower starting port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is established, this is set as the starting right of the variable display game. Such data, except for data related to variable display, is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit, which is the maximum number of held storages. The pending data that has not been subjected to this symbol variation display operation or the game balls related to the pending data are also referred to as "operation pending balls." In order to clarify the number of active and reserved balls to the player, a dedicated reservation display (not shown) provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 or a reservation display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. Display the device by lighting it.

Further, in this embodiment, up to four operation-reserved balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of confirmed fluctuations of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) regarding the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of stored symbols may be different, and the number can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are referred to as "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", and "special symbol 2". It is also referred to as the "Fuzu action holding ball".

(3-2. Gaming status)
Next, the gaming state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate multiple types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various gaming states will be explained.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" which is a functional part of the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). There are two types of this: a probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and a probability variation function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special symbol probability variation function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (high probability jackpot state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. . In a gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the jackpot lottery probability becomes high, making it easier for jackpots to occur. In addition, as already explained, in the case of this embodiment, the jackpot lottery probability at low probability and high probability differs depending on the setting value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability variation function changes the lottery probability of winning an assistance from a predetermined probability (normal probability) from a low probability to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function that generates a variable state of probability of receiving assistance. Under the gaming state in which this normal symbol probability variable function is active (assistance hit probability variable state), the lottery probability of winning assistance is in a high probability state, making it easy for assistance hits to occur, and general power open games occur frequently. , the operation rate is improved, in which the operation rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also includes a "fluctuating time reduction function (time saving function)" for which the main control section 20 is responsible. There are two types of this: a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which this special symbol time saving function is activated (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average variation time required for a no-reach loss variation). (the time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), resulting in an improved state in which the number of jackpot drawings per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the regular symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated (normal symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the normal symbols in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (shortened), the number of drawings per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an "opening extension function" in which the main control section 20 serves as a functional section. This opening extension function is a function that generates an "open extension state" in which the opening period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) is extended than the normal state. Under the open extension state, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable blade 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of opening and closing times is, for example, once (open extension function (when the opening extension function is in operation) is extended twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), resulting in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winnings to the lower starting port 35 increases, and therefore, in the gaming state, the starting condition for the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result is satisfied more frequently than in the normal state. This creates a gaming state that is advantageous for the player compared to a state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating). In this respect, the open extended state is also referred to as the "electric support state".

By operating one or more of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Below, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function are activated will be referred to as the "probability change state", and among these functions, A gaming state in which the special symbol probability varying function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and is a gaming state in which at least the special symbol probability varying function operates and the opening extension function does not operate (in this embodiment, a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability varying function operates) ) is called a "latent state", and a state where all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called a "normal state". Therefore, if we focus on the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot drawing probability will be 'low probability state (normal probability)', and if the gaming state is In the case of the "potential probability state" or the "probability variable state", the jackpot lottery probability is in the 'high probability state'. In addition, during the jackpot related to the operation of the conditional device, a winning game in which the jackpot is opened and closed occurs, but all of the above functions are inactive, and basically the game state is the same as the normal state above. The variable display of the special symbol is also interrupted.

(High base gaming state)
In this embodiment, the three functions related to the above-mentioned normal symbols, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function, operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function described above individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since it becomes a rate improvement state and the frequency of winnings to the lower starting slot 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), the gaming state is based on the frequency with which the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result are met or the balls are put out. This is a "high base gaming state (advantageous state for entering the starting ball)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. In addition, the "high base gaming state" here refers to the gaming state when the functions related to normal symbols (at least one of the normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) are activated, and the special symbol This is different from the gaming state in which at least one of the special symbol probability changing function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time saving function), when the above-mentioned special symbol probability changing function is activated, it becomes a "high probability state" where the jackpot lottery probability is higher than the normal state, When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, a "special symbol time saving state" is established in which the time required to complete the special symbol variable display game is shorter than that in the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base gaming state" in which the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high base gaming state", an electric chew support state to which at least an opening extension function is provided is treated as a "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of openings) of the movable blade 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 improves, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 increases, and the winning frequency per unit time increases. Since this increases, the game state becomes more advantageous for the player compared to the case where there is no electric chew support state (low base game state). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the gaming state is "normal state" or "potential state", it will be 'no electric chew support state', and if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "probable variable state" If so, it is determined that 'electronic chew support status exists'. In this specification, "no electric support support state" is referred to as "no electric support state" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric support support state" is referred to as "electric support support state" or "electric support support state". ``state''.

(3-2-1. Internal gaming status (gaming status determination number YJ): Figure 28)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) that determine the gaming state, the main control unit 20 side controls these functions. Its activation (5AH)/non-activation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. The gaming state that focuses on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state." The current internal gaming state is managed using an identifier called "gaming state determination number YJ". For example, if the gaming state determination number YJ is "00H", specify 'normal state', if it is "01H", specify 'variable state', if it is '02H', specify 'time saving state', In the case of "03H", 'potential state' is specified.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): Figure 28)
Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various performances related to the above-mentioned internal gaming states, the configuration is such that one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. The details will be explained later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as "general" and "premonition", and the variable state includes multiple types such as "early ST,""middleST," and "late stage ST." These are managed as different game states using an identifier called "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The entity of this variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode data). Therefore, for example, if the variable probability state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is divided into "early ST", "middle ST" and "late stage ST", that is, the fluctuation pattern swing corresponding to the variable probability state (YJ = 01H). If we define "Early ST (Tcode=02H)", "Middle ST (Tcode=03H)", and "Late ST (Tcode=04H)" as the minute designation number Tcode (see Figure 28), different fluctuation patterns will be generated for each. It becomes possible to select a distribution table.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of special symbols related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of special symbols) are used at least It is determined in association with the current gaming state (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result. For example, if the fluctuation pattern distribution specification number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is specified, and if it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the omen mode is specified. be done. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the general mode is selected, When the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "01H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is selected (see S413 in FIG. 12, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc. described later). ).

Also, due to this, multiple types of "performance modes" related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode are provided, and the performance under each production mode is displayed (executed) on the performance control unit 24 side. It is now possible to do so. Note that details regarding the production mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, that is, the "internal game When paying attention to the "state", even though it is the same "normal state", regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to select a variation pattern corresponding to the different variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode such as "general" or "premonition". This makes it possible to display effects related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the above-mentioned "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a time saving state, and a variable probability state (see the column "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the types of gaming states related to the "variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, in other words, the determination of performances, are different from the types of internal gaming states. These include "General," "Omen," "Ceiling," "Heaven," "Time Saving," "Early ST," "Middle ST," and "Late ST" (see the "Tcode" column in Figure 28).

In this way, the "internal gaming state" focuses on each function related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "fluctuation pattern distribution" focuses on determining the fluctuation pattern of special symbols (determining the performance). By managing the designated number Tcode as different from the designated number Tcode, even if the internal gaming state is the same (for example, normal state), it is possible to correspond to different fluctuation pattern distribution designated number Tcode (for example, during general and during premonition). It is possible to select a variation pattern. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the consumption time of the symbol variation display game (special symbol variation time) and the effects related to this, and even under the same internal gaming state. This allows for a rich variety of performances.

In this specification, unless otherwise required, at least the gaming state associated with the variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "gaming mode" (see the "gaming mode type" column in FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 28, this gaming mode is the gaming state related to the "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode and the gaming state determination number YJ (internal gaming state)", in other words, the "gaming considered as a whole gaming machine". It can be treated as "state". For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may be simply referred to as "gaming state" without distinguishing between them. Further, the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as a "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)", and is appropriately abbreviated as "Tcode".

<4. About winning>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, "winning" according to this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning type, the winning game operation mode, and the destination gaming state (transferring destination gaming mode) after the winning game.

(4-1. About the hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of winning types such as variable probability jackpots 1 to 6 and time saving jackpots 1 to 2 are provided as the winning types for the jackpot lottery, as shown in the figure. These hits belong to the "jackpot type" that triggers the activation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small wins) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the activation of the conditional device. Here, "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device that continuously operates special electric accessory) for playing round games, and is a specified device. Activates when a combination of special symbols is displayed or the game ball passes through a specific area in the grand prize opening (excluding those that enter the grand prize opening while the accessory continuous activation device is operating) . In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing the electric support state (opening extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (transitioning from one internal game state to another internal game state). .

Therefore, if a small hit is won, the conditional device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device also does not operate, so there is no transition of the internal gaming state (transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small winning is not performed). ). In addition, in the winning game based on the small winning (small winning game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like a jackpot is not executed, but depending on how the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined, It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being played. The operating mode of the small winning game is basically the same as the jackpot game, except that the round game is not executed, and after a predetermined start INT has elapsed, the "opening/closing operation game" that opens the big winning opening is executed. When the opening/closing operation game ends, a series of small winning games ends after a predetermined end INT. Such a small win is different from a mere "loss" in that it is a type of winning that triggers a transition (execution trigger) to a winning game (special game state) that involves the opening and closing of the big winning opening, just like a jackpot. make a difference.

Further, when a small hit is won, the internal gaming state is not transferred, but the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be configured to be transferred. If such a transition form is used, for example, if the gaming state after a small winning game and the gaming state after another jackpot game are transferred to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect will be achieved in both. You can stay in production mode. Also, due to winning a small hit, it is possible to shift from the first variable pattern selection mode to the second variable pattern selection mode, or to transfer from the second variable pattern selection mode to the first variable pattern selection mode again. It is. Although this embodiment does not provide a "small win," one or more types of small wins may be provided for the lottery targets on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side in consideration of gameplay etc. can.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, variable probability jackpots 1 to 3 and time saving jackpots 1 to 2 are subject to the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 1 side, and variable probability jackpots 4 to 6 are subject to the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 2 side. It has become. Further, the symbol lottery probability is as shown in the figure.

(4-2. Regarding winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning mentioned above will be explained.

The notations "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the "Win Details" column of FIG. 4 respectively indicate the maximum number of rounds related to the jackpot. In each jackpot of this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening in one round game is the "long opening time" in which it is fully expected that the number of prizes in the grand prize opening will reach the maximum number of prizes (10). (For example, 29.8 seconds)" is the jackpot. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big prize opening related to the round game is freely determined. For example, the opening pattern of the big winning opening for at least some round games (round games of a certain number of rounds) may be set to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" that is shorter than the long opening time, or , it may be set to an even shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may continue to be opened, or an opening pattern that involves closing one or more times (for example, "1.3 seconds open + 0.5 seconds closed + 27 seconds open" etc.) You can also use it as The profit state (profit degree) during a jackpot game increases as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening is higher when the jackpot is opened for a long time than when it is opened for a short time. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds is for a jackpot, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game will be.

(4-3. About the destination game state after a winning game: Figure 4)
Next, a description will be given of the gaming state (gaming mode) to which the player is transferred after each of the above-mentioned jackpot games. The column “Game state at the time of winning/Transition destination game state” shown in FIG. The relationship is shown.

In this embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined based on at least the type of jackpot won and the gaming state at the time of winning (internal gaming state). Specifically, when winning a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined based on the gaming state at the time of winning (internal gaming state or gaming mode) and the type of jackpot won. (See the gaming state transition table selection table in FIG. 21 and the gaming state transition table in FIG. 22, which will be described later). In addition, the "gaming state at the time of winning" in FIG. (internal game status).

In order to make the present invention easier to understand, first, the internal gaming state that is transferred to after the jackpot game will be explained. Details regarding the transition mode of the game mode will be described later using FIGS. 6 and 7.

(4-3A. If you win the time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case where time saving jackpot 1 (5R time saving A) and time saving jackpot 2 (5R time saving B) are won will be explained. When these time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "time-saving state (YJ=02H)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are called "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the time saving state is entered, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display game (number of symbol fluctuations) will continue until the specified number of times is reached, and a jackpot will be achieved within the specified number of times (however, in the internal gaming state) When the special symbol fluctuation display game ends without winning a small hit (excluding small wins that do not trigger a transition), the time-saving state will end and the next game will transition to the "normal state (YJ = 00H)". It has become. Note that whether or not the prescribed number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of times the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are executed (the same applies to counting the number of STs and counting the number of ceiling games, which will be described later). In other words, when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbols 1 and 2) ends for the specified number of times without hitting the jackpot, the time saving state is ended.

When the time saving jackpot 1 is won, the prescribed number of times is set to 100 times (time saving A), and when the time saving jackpot 2 is won, the number of time saving times is 50 (time saving B). That is, time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are time-saving jackpots (finite time-saving jackpots) that give a finite number of time-savings (finite time-savings). In this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-savings are provided, but all or part of the plurality of time-saving jackpots may have the same number of time-savings. Further, only one type of time-saving jackpot may be provided. Further, the time-saving jackpot may be provided with a time-saving jackpot (infinite time-saving jackpot) in which the time-saving state can be continued until the next jackpot is won (the number of time-savings is infinite (infinite number of times)). Further, if it is a finite time-saving jackpot, the number of time-saving jackpots may be set to "100 or more", and one or more types of time-saving jackpots with a time-saving number of "100 or more" may be provided. For example, multiple types of time-saving jackpots, such as the number of time-savings "150 times," "200 times," and "300 times," can be provided.

(4-3B. If you win the definite variable jackpot (probable variable jackpot 1 to 7))
Next, the case where the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be explained.

When winning any of probability-variable jackpots 1 to 7, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to "probability-variable state (YJ=01H)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Probable variable jackpots 1 to 7 are referred to as "probable variable jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a variable variable state.

In the case of transitioning to the above-mentioned "variable probability state", as in the case of transitioning to the time-saving state described above, the special symbol fluctuation display game continues until the number of executions (number of symbol fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times, When the special symbol variable display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the variable probability state ends, which is the so-called "number-cut variable probability type (ST type (finite probability variable type)"). To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a gaming state with at least a high probability state (variable state or probable state), if the specified number of times described above ends without winning the jackpot, the high probability state is terminated. to shift the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times this high probability state continues is referred to as the "ST number". Therefore, after transitioning to a definite variable state, there are two cases in which the definite variable state ends and the transition is made to the normal state (YJ=00H) when the ST number ends (definite variable A described later), and a case where the ST number ends. In a case where only the high probability state ends, in detail, only the "special symbol probability change function" ends among "special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function". This includes cases in which the state is shifted to the "time saving state (YJ=02H)" (probability variation B and probability variation C, which will be described later).

The probability variable state of this embodiment includes multiple types of probability variation states (probability variation A, probability variation B, and probability variation C) with different ST numbers, and depending on the winning jackpot type, probability variation A, probability variation B, probability variation It is designed to be migrated to either C. The details will be described later, but when focusing on the gaming mode, when moving to fixed variable A, it is ST100 mode, when moving to fixed variable B, ST75 mode, and when moving to fixed variable C, it is ST25 mode. A transition is made to a gaming mode corresponding to probability variations A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Definitely variable A, Definitely variable B, Definitely variable C)
The above-mentioned "probability variation A", "probability variation B", and "probability variation C" will be explained.

(a) Definite variation A (ST100 mode)
Probability variation A is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 100 times. In this embodiment, if the probability variation jackpot 1, probability variation jackpot 4, or probability variation jackpot 7 is won, the probability variation A is selected. When the game is shifted to probability variable A, the "probability variable state" ends when 100 STs are completed without winning a jackpot, and the internal gaming state is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game.
(b) Definitely variable B (ST75 mode)
Definite change B is a definite change state in which the number of STs is set to 75 (ST number of definite change B<ST number of definite change A). In this embodiment, if the probability variable jackpot 2 or the probability variable jackpot 5 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable B. When the game is shifted to probability variable B, when the ST number of times is 75 without winning a jackpot, the "probability variable state" ends, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the "time saving state" with the number of time saving times of 25. In detail, after the jackpot game is changed to the variable probability state, when the predetermined number of STs ends, only the high probability state is ended (the special symbol probability variable function is turned OFF), and the gaming state is changed to "low probability state + electric power". The state is shifted to the "with support state", that is, the "time saving state" (here, probability variation B = "75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving"). Then, when the 25 time saving times are completed without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric support itself is given for 100 times like the above-mentioned definite change A, but the definite change B shifts to the time saving state after the predetermined number of STs, and the above-mentioned definite change A It is very different.
(c) Definite variable C (ST25 mode)
Definite change C is a definite change state in which the ST number is set to 25 (ST number of definite change C<ST number of definite change B). In this embodiment, if the probability variable jackpot 3 or the probability variable jackpot 6 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable C. In the case of transition to Probable Variable C, if you complete 25 STs without winning the jackpot, the "Probable Variable State" ends, and from the next game onwards, you will be transferred to the "Time Saving State" with 75 Time Savings (here, Probability variation C = "25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving"). Then, when the 75 time saving times are completed without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the next game is shifted to the "normal state". Similarly to the probability variation A and B, the probability variation C also grants 100 electric support.

In addition, the fixed variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 are "pure variable variable jackpots (probable variable variable jackpots)" in that they are jackpots (probable variable time-saving jackpots) that give "probable variable state for a predetermined number of STs + time-saving state for a predetermined number of time-savers." However, in this specification, it is treated as belonging to a "probability-variable jackpot" in that it first shifts to a probability-variable state. Therefore, to be more precise, there are two types of variable jackpots: ``variable variable jackpots'' that do not give a time-saving state, and ``variable time-saving jackpots'' that give a time-saving state.

The above-mentioned probability variation A, probability variation B, and probability variation C have the same number of electrical support (number of times in the state with electrical support) (100 times), but at least one of probability variation A, probability variation B, and probability variation C is different. It may be the number of electric support. For example, Definite Change A has 200 electric support times, Definite Change B has 150 electric support times, and Definite Change C has 100 electric support times; It can be done once. Further, although the definite variable B and the definite variable C have been described as being transferred from the definite variable state to the time saving state, it may be a definite variable state that is not transferred to the time saving state only, that is, a definite variable state with a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the variable probability jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 may be defined as the same "variable probability jackpots" as the variable probability jackpots 1 and 7, instead of the above-mentioned "variable time saving jackpots". Moreover, at least a part of the variable probability jackpot of this embodiment may be a potential probability jackpot (potential probability state transition trigger jackpot). For example, the probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 on the special drawing 1 side can be made into potential probability jackpots.

<5. About the performance＞
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the performance mode (performance state) will be explained. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of production modes related to the gaming state (internal gaming state and/or variable pattern selection mode). For example, a ``normal performance mode'' that performs a performance related to a ``normal state,'' a ``time-saving performance mode'' that performs a performance related to a time-saving state, and a ``definitely variable performance mode (ST performance mode)'' that performs a performance related to a variable state. There are multiple types of performance modes related to each gaming state, such as a "time-saving performance mode" that performs a performance related to the time-saving state. The performance control unit 24 executes a performance based on the current performance mode, thereby realizing a performance related to the current gaming state. In addition, in each production mode, a background display (background effect) is displayed as the background of the fluctuating display screen of decorative symbols so that the player can understand which production mode corresponds to the gaming state he/she is staying in. BGM and the like are controlled to be switched to presentation modes related to the gaming state. Note that details regarding each production mode will be described later using FIGS. 6 and 7.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be able to control the transition between each performance mode in accordance with the transition (update) of the gaming state, and includes a functional unit (performance state transition control means) that controls the transition between multiple types of performance modes. ). Out of the performance control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), the performance control unit 24 uses a performance control command that includes information regarding the gaming state, specifically, designates the current gaming state, and specifies the gaming state. Based on the information included in a specific performance control command that specifies that the The production mode is managed in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state of the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. has been done. The above-mentioned specific performance control commands include, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command (a jackpot start command and a jackpot end command) sent during a win.

(5-2. Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be explained. The production control unit 24 performs various operations related to the jackpot lottery result based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern specification command (in this embodiment, the information included in the variation pattern specification command and/or the decorative pattern specification command). It is configured to be able to control the appearance of a "notice performance" (notice performance appearance control means). The main role of the preview performance is to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning type has been won (well-known ``win expectation level''), and the degree of expectation that a specific preview performance will occur (specific preview occurrence expectation level). These include suggestions. Many of the preview performances function as "inciting performances" to arouse players' expectations of winning. Typical preview performances include "reach performance,""pseudo-continuationperformance,""player participation type performance," and "pre-read preview performance." There are various types of preview effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur independently or in combination (overlapping) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach performance)
"Reach effect" refers to a mode of presentation that involves a ready-to-reach state (so-called ten-pai state), and specifically refers to a mode of presentation that can derive and display a game result via a ready-to-reach state. There are reach effects that, when a specific reach effect appears, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect (N reach (normal reach) appears. It is called "SP Reach (Super Reach)."SP Reach has a relatively longer performance time (variable time) than N Reach in order to stimulate players' expectations of winning, and usually it is passed through N Reach. The above-mentioned N reach and SP reach include multiple types of reaches associated with winning expectations.

In most cases where the game result is a win, the winning symbols (for example, a set of symbols) are derived and displayed via this reach effect. That is, in the process of deriving and displaying winning symbols, some kind of reach effect may appear. Therefore, for the player, whether or not a reach effect occurs is a clue to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as effects that foretell (suggest) the possibility of a reach effect, in other words, effects that can more clearly predict the degree of expectation of winning. This "notice performance" plays the role of an inciting performance that foretells the degree of expectation of winning, but it also raises the possibility that a specific performance (for example, a reach performance or a pseudo-series) will occur, or a specific performance. It also plays the role of definitively reporting outbreaks. Therefore, for example, in a ready-to-win performance scenario, a certain preview performance may occur before the ready-to-win performance occurs, not only foretelling the possibility of the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance but also foretelling the degree of expectation of winning. In other words, compared to the case where the reach effect occurs alone, if other preview effects are accompanied, the degree of expectation of winning becomes clearer, and the player's expectation of winning can be stimulated. In addition, in relation to the jackpot lottery results, one or more types of expected preview performances may occur in combination (simultaneously or overlappingly), and multiple types of expected preview performances may occur in combination. , it shows a clearer expectation of winning. For example, if a low-expectation preview performance with a low expectation of winning is combined with a high-expectation preview performance with a high expectation of winning, the expectation of winning will further increase, and if multiple high-expectation preview performances are combined, , the expectation of winning increases dramatically.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-connection performance (pseudo-connection))
"Pseudo series" refers to a performance mode that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (so-called "pseudo variation") of decorative patterns. This "pseudo fluctuation" refers to a display operation in which, during a decorative symbol fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols are re-fluctuated from the temporarily stopped state. A variable display mode that is repeated once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the "pre-reading preview performance" described later, which can be executed over multiple symbol change display games. Basically, the occurrence rate of "pseudo-links" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, if the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times than once, the expectation of occurrence of a preview performance with a high expectation of winning (for example, SP reach) will be higher. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario that includes a reach effect, a "pseudo-link" occurs mainly before the formation of a reach state (before the reach effect), and after performing one or more pseudo fluctuations. , the reach effect that is the main variation is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, when pseudo N is referred to, it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and real fluctuations. For example, when written as "Pseudo 2", it means "one pseudo fluctuation + real fluctuation", and when written as "Pseudo 3", it means "two pseudo fluctuations + real fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
"Player participation type performance" is a performance mode that belongs to the so-called "button preview performance", in which a predetermined operation (for example, one press, a long press, This is a preview performance mode in which the content of the performance can change based on the operation contents when a button (press, repeated tap, etc.) is performed. In the player participation type effect, when a predetermined button is valid, an "operation instruction effect" that instructs the operating means to perform a predetermined operation appears, and during the button valid period, the player cannot operate the operating means. When operated, the currently appearing effect changes to another effect (effect at the time of operation) based on the operation content, and depending on the effect before and after the operation (performance content), the expectation level of winning, winning or losing, or setting suggestion information is displayed. etc. can be reported. The production control section 24 is a functional section (operation section) that sets an operation validity period (button validity period) during which the operation of the operating means is valid, based on predetermined setting conditions (for example, a predetermined timing during a player participation type production). (validity period setting means); a pre-operation effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button validity period; It is equipped with an operation performance control means capable of controlling execution.

(5-2-5. Advance preview performance)
"Pre-reading notice performance" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") refers to balls with pending operation (unexploited pending balls) that have not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbols). , Mainly, by using the pending display mode (pre-reading notice of pending change) and the effect during the symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order (pre-reading notice of symbol changing), winnings related to the activated pending ball are This is a performance mode that allows for advance notice of expectations.

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to this embodiment, including the above-mentioned pre-read notice, will be explained using FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the illustration, below the decorative pattern display area), there is a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls and a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls. A hold display area 77 is provided to display whether or not there is an operation hold ball, and whether there is an operation hold ball or not, it is displayed in a lit state (with an actuation hold ball: "○ (white circle)" shown in the figure) or in an unlit state (no actuation hold ball: Information regarding the current number of active pending pitches is notified by the dashed circle shown in the figure.

The display regarding the presence or absence of this action pending ball (hereinafter referred to as "pending display") is displayed in order of occurrence (order of winning), and in each pending display area 76, 77, the leftmost action pending ball is It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) activated suspended ball that occurred on the time axis among all activated suspended balls in the relevant suspended display. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with hold display areas a1 to d1 ( (corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Normally, the display mode of these reservation display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is switched to the operation state (lit state) for the same number of active reservation balls, for example, three, as the number of active reservation balls that exist when making a pre-read determination. Therefore, this reservation display section functions as a reservation display means for displaying the number of active reservation balls. However, when executing the pre-read notice described later, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-read notice display mode (special hold display mode). This serves as a means of generating advance notice.

Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuating display area 78 is provided to show the activated holding balls that are currently being used in the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which an icon of a game currently being played pending K appears on top of the icon of the catch J. That is, when the variable display of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is changed to the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the catch J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the LCD screen shown in Figure 5, there is a display area for sub effects (sub effects) that are different from the main effects such as decorative patterns and preview effects. A sub-display area 79 is provided which can display information regarding the number of pending pitches for regular symbols, information regarding the variable display operation of the special symbols 1 and 2, and information regarding the variable display operation of the regular symbols. The information in this sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative pattern and/or the hold display section is hidden when displaying the preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being played and how many balls are on hold. Note that depending on the gaming state (gaming mode or internal gaming state), in the first gaming state (for example, in normal mode (normal state)), the pending display area 76 is given priority over the pending display area 77. Display (cooperatively) (display one and not the other, or lower the transmittance of one and increase the transmittance of the other, display one relatively larger than the other, or create effect images. In the second gaming state (for example, the time saving mode (time saving state) or the ST mode (variable probability state) described later), the hold display area 77 is changed to the hold display area. It can be displayed with priority over 76. Further, during the first gaming state, both the pending display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed, and during the second gaming state, the pending display area 77 can be displayed preferentially.

(About advance notice)
Next, a look-ahead notice will be explained. Regarding the appearance control regarding this pre-read notice, first, in the main control unit 20, when an action pending ball occurs (starting condition is met), the action pending ball executes the symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display Before the operation), a "pre-read hit determination" is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (steps S318 to S320 in FIG. 11 (random number determination process to special stop symbol data creation process)). ), see steps S410 to S410 in FIG. 12 (random number determination process for determining special electric accessory operation to special stop symbol creation process)).

Furthermore, by using the result of the above-mentioned "preread hit determination", the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the activated pending ball is used in a symbol fluctuation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see step S320 (starting opening winning random number determination process) in FIG. 11). This special symbol variation pattern determined in advance is referred to as a "preread variation pattern." In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, it is determined in advance, for example, what kind of reach state the reach variation pattern will pass through, or whether it will be a normal variation pattern that does not pass through the reach state. In this way, a series of processes for determining a prefetch variation pattern through a prefetch hit determination is referred to as a "prefetch determination."

When the information regarding the pre-reading determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control process regarding the pre-reading notice is performed in the effect control unit 24. In the case of this embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of pending balls at the time of pre-reading judgment (the existing number of pending balls including the currently occurring pending ball) and the above-mentioned pre-reading fluctuation pattern information (at least the information on which the win/loss result was pre-determined). A “pending addition command” is sent from the main control unit 20 to the production control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described below), and when the production control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, the processing is performed based on the information included in the command. As part of the display control process related to the above-mentioned hold display, effect control process related to the pre-read preview is performed.

Specifically, when the production control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, it performs a "pre-read preview lottery" regarding whether to execute (appear) the pre-read notice based on the pre-read fluctuation pattern information, and executes the pre-read notice. In this case, a production scenario related to the pre-read notice is determined, and the pre-read notice is made to appear according to the production scenario (for example, see FIG. 32 described later). The execution probability of the above-mentioned pre-read preview lottery is higher for a "jackpot" than for a "lose", and for a pre-read fluctuation pattern type with a relatively high winning expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning is indicated by whether or not a pre-read notice occurs. In addition, the pre-read notice will be issued at the timing when the action-pending ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that will be played earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game, and will target the current action-pending ball. A look-ahead notice may appear. In addition, the reservation addition command includes data on the upper byte side that allows the special figure type information (special figure 1 and 2) to be specified, and data on the lower byte side that allows the information on the number of pending balls to be activated at the time of look-ahead judgment. It consists of 2 bytes. In addition, the pending addition command is composed of two bytes: upper byte data that specifies the win/loss result, and lower byte data that allows the contents of the prefetch variation pattern to be specified as prefetch judgment information (Figures 24 to 27). reference).

In addition, the information regarding the above-mentioned look-ahead determination result includes the jackpot lottery result (jackpot lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation pending ball is used in the symbol fluctuation display game and the fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. This is game information obtained when patterns and the like are determined in advance. Therefore, the information regarding the look-ahead judgment result includes at least the look-ahead judgment result (look-ahead win/loss result) information of the winning/losing lottery result at the start of variation, and in addition, the look-ahead judgment result (read-ahead symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result, Pre-read determination result (pre-read fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation can be included. For example, the look-ahead variation pattern information includes not only information on whether it is a "winning variation pattern" when winning a hit or a "loss variation pattern" when winning a loss (information about winning/losing lottery results), but also the symbol lottery results. Information on the execution of specific preview performances, such as information on the look-ahead judgment results (look-ahead pattern results), information on the presence or absence of reach (if there is reach, its type), and the presence or absence of pseudo-runs (if there is pseudo-run, the number of times) may also be included. What kind of information the pending addition command should be sent to the production control section 24 can be determined as appropriate depending on the content of the notice to be notified.

Note that the "pre-read fluctuation pattern" obtained by the pre-read judgment when the action-holding ball occurs does not necessarily have to be the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the action-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. . For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that specifies "N Reach 1" at the start of fluctuation, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the type of reach itself, "N Reach 1", but the gist of "N Reach 1". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2)" may be specified.

(Winning timeline advance notice: Pending change notice)
In this embodiment, when a pre-read notice is executed (if a pre-read notice lottery is won), the hold icons in the hold display areas a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in Note 3 of FIG. 29 described later, Among the alien icons shown in 32), the hold icon that was the target of the pre-read notice changes from the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) white to the notice display blinking white, blue, yellow, etc. A pending change notice that changes to a special pending color such as green, red, or rainbow color or a colored pending display (special pending display mode) may be executed. This pending change notice is also referred to as a "winning time-based advance notice" because it can appear when a prize is won (pending display).

As this reservation change notice, FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched operation reservation sphere of the reservation display section b1 changes to a special reservation display. Here, the display of the pending icon blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors means that the probability of winning is high in this order. In particular, the display of the rainbow-colored pending icon means that the jackpot is confirmed. It is a premium-like hold icon (probable reservation notice) that is displayed as (probable). The blinking white icon is a pending icon that indicates the possibility of a "step-up pending change notice," which will be described later, and makes you look forward to what the final pending color will be. (In some cases, the indicator may remain blinking white without changing.) In the case of blinking white, if the pending display remains as it is, the expectation of winning is the lowest among the special pending displays, but if it changes to another pending color, the expectation of winning by that pending color increases.

In this embodiment, regarding the preview performance, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, it will be selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a jackpot, it will be selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, such as a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, a preview performance with a high expectation of winning of 20% or higher (in this embodiment, a preview performance with an expectation of winning of 20% or more) In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectation of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color is 1%, respectively. If the percentages are 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, then "green, red, and rainbow colors" belong to the high expectation preview effects, and the others (flashing white, blue, yellow), and low expectations. It belongs to the expectation level preview performance.When a look-ahead notice occurs, during the symbol change display game for the activated pending ball, a high expectation level notice with a relatively high winning expectation (high number of pseudo consecutive, SP reach, etc.) ) occurs, combined with the content of the advance notice performance, the expectation of winning will further increase.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially consumed with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one action-holding ball has been used up, the display position of the holding display section corresponding to the existing action-holding ball is moved forward (sequentially shifted to the left), and the number of displayed balls is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display. In this respect, the look-ahead notice can appear over multiple symbol change display games (multiple symbol change display actions), and is different from the one-time symbol change such as pseudo-continuation. This is different from the preview performance that takes place during the operation.

The special pending display related to the pending change notice is (A) a case in which it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case in which it appears at the timing of the pending display, and (B) a normally reserved display (white) when a prize is won. (C) Cases in which the normal pending display is changed to a special pending display (blue, etc.), (C) A change to a special pending display that has a relatively higher winning expectation than the current special pending display (for example, a change from blue to yellow or higher) There are also cases where the color is changed in a step-up manner. In the case of (B) or (C), the predetermined timing during the shift display, the predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, the predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific preview effect, and the pending It is possible to change from one pending display mode to another pending display mode during a player participation type presentation for change notice (for example, during a valid button operation period). It should be noted that a pending change notice such as (B) or (C) above, which changes to a pending display with a higher winning expectation, is referred to as a "step-up pending change notice."

Also, when the pending K is placed on the catch J during game execution, basically the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the display mode is basically the same as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77. A pre-read notice (special suspension display) for the activated pending balls can be notified to the player even during the game, but at a predetermined timing during the symbol change display game, the pending display mode of the pending K during the game execution. may change to other pending display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the game suspension K is also handled as belonging to the step-up suspension change notice.

In addition, as a general rule, there is no "special pending display fall" that changes from the current pending color to a pending color with a relatively low winning expectation, but in the exceptional case where a falling change occurs, the activated pending ball will be the winning ball. It is suggested that this is the case, and it becomes a premium reservation change notice similar to this reservation notice. An example of a downward trend is when the pending color changes to a pending display with a lower expectation of winning than the current pending display, such as "blue → white" or "red → blue." In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display as a still image (static display mode), but also the hold icon display as a moving image (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon can be rotated, vibrated, rocked, blinked, etc.). It may also be displayed by blinking at high speed or blinking at low speed).

(Pre-reading notice during pattern fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning time series" look-ahead preview performance, it is possible to display a "fluctuating look-ahead notice" that is triggered by the start of the symbol change display game. This pre-reading notice during fluctuation is different from the above-mentioned pending change notice and can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation display, so it is also referred to as a "pre-reading notice during symbol fluctuation system (change system at the start of fluctuation)".

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or more symbol fluctuating display games (single or continuous display). ) is a preview notice. In other words, when a game ball enters the starting hole during a certain symbol variation display game and the starting condition is met, the pre-read notice during variation temporarily suspends and stores the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the starting condition. At the same time, a pre-read preview lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and when executing this pre-read preview lottery, if there are multiple active pending balls (pending memory) existing at that time, , all or some of these reserved memories can be expressed in a way that has some kind of relation to the symbol variation display game. For example, during a game where all or some of the existing motion pending balls from the oldest motion pending ball to the motion pending ball subject to the look-ahead notice are displayed in a game, a look-ahead-only preview image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. (For example, a preview image imitating a lightning bolt in FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, pre-read previews that are different in whole or in part may be displayed. For example, if the symbol is displayed over three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image displaying rain falling from a thundercloud) or The thundercloud image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of winning may vary depending on the preview image. In the above example, a thundercloud image can have a low expectation level, a rain image can have a medium expectation level, and a lightning image can have a high expectation level. In this case, if the game ends with only the thundercloud image, the expectation of winning is low, but if the lightning image is displayed, the expectation of winning can be dramatically increased. Furthermore, it may be a step-up type pre-read notice in which the level of expectation develops (the level of expectation increases) in stages such as "thunder cloud image → rain image → lightning image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

Note that the performance means used for the pre-read notice during fluctuations and the content of the performance can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the case of image display, a combination of a background image or decorative pattern exclusively for pre-reading may be used, or a combination of dedicated sound effects, light effects, or movable object effects may be used to accompany this image display. Good too.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead notice during change and the pending change notice can each appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the pending change notice and the lottery for executing the look-ahead notice during fluctuation are each independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases in which a pending change notice occurs independently, a case in which a look-ahead notice during variation occurs independently, and a case in which a pending change notice and a look-ahead notice during change occur simultaneously (overlappingly). Note that the performance means used when executing the pre-read notice during fluctuation and the content of the performance can be determined as appropriate.

(4-2-6. Setting suggestion effect)
Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a presentation mode (setting suggestion presentation) that suggests information regarding the above-mentioned "setting value." For example, the following settings (a) to (b) are suggested.
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests low setting ranges (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(Sa) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests high setting ranges (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(Me) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that definitively notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "Setting N confirmation effect" that definitely announces "Setting N". However, it is not desirable to definitively notify internal setting values blindly. The reason for this is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting area, such as setting 1 or setting 2, reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitely notify one of settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area. Particularly, if a specific setting confirmation performance in which a high setting such as setting 5 is confirmed or setting 6 is confirmed appears, the player's desire to play can be improved.
(iii) ``Specific setting negative effect'' that definitively informs that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(c) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests setting values in a specific range. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α≦set value≦β), suggests settings 4 or more (α≦set value), suggests multiple specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6”, etc. . In addition, we can vary the appearance rate depending on the setting value, suggesting whether a certain setting value is more likely or less likely to appear, for example, it is difficult to appear with setting 1, moderately appears with setting 4, and easy to appear with setting 6. It is possible to do so.

Note that the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be determined as appropriate according to the setting value. For example, it may be determined that the lower the setting value is, the lower the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. Further, there is no particular restriction on the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation, and one or more presentations among sound presentation, light presentation, image display presentation, and movable body presentation may be used.

Further, the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with the preview performance or independently. In addition, it can be displayed not only during the symbol variation game, but also during a jackpot game, or during a "demonstration start wait effect" or "customer wait effect (demonstration display)" which will be described later while waiting for the game to start.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific preview performance according to a set value, the preview performance itself can function as a "setting suggestion performance." For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-sequence (a specific pseudo-sequence mode or a specific number of pseudo-sequences), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific pre-read notice. By varying it according to the setting value, the preview presentation itself can function as a "setting suggestion presentation." For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear in the event of a loss, "high setting rich", if a loss is likely to result in 3 pseudo-sequences (2 pseudo fluctuations + real variation), "high setting rich", or a specific button. When an operation effect appears, it is a suggestion such as "Setting 6 confirmed". Further, by using the look-ahead preview performance, a look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear. For example, if the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich indication, and if one or all of the hold icons change to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

<6. Direction means>
Various performances in the game machine 1 are produced by performance means provided in the game machine. Such a presentation means may be any stimulus transmission means that can produce a presentation effect by appealing to human senses such as visual, auditory, and tactile senses, and may include light generation (light emission) means such as decorative lamps 45 and LED devices. (light production means), a sound generating device (sound production means) such as the speaker 46, a production display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressure device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, a vibration device that applies vibration to the player. Typical examples include a vibration device that applies vibration (for example, the firing operation handle 15 vibrates), a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable accessory that produces a visual performance effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a visually appealing display device like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it refers to a type that mainly displays effects (image display effects) by displaying images, and devices that express effects by means other than images, such as a 7-segment display, are based on the above concept of effect display device. contained within.

<7. Game mode transition form: Figure 6, Figure 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the "gaming mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode and the transition control between each gaming mode (between each gaming state) will be explained. FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are game flows showing an outline of the game mode and the production mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, multiple types of game modes are provided, such as "general, omen, ceiling, heaven, and ST (early ST, middle ST, and late ST)". The progress of the game is controlled under the game mode.

(7-1A. Regarding “normal mode”)
The normal mode is a gaming mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the normal state. This is the game mode.

This normal mode includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "01H". "General mode" is the game mode in which you can stay the longest during the game, and basically, if you win a jackpot from this general mode, you will move to other game modes (ST mode, time saving mode, etc. described later). will be done.

(7-1A-1. Regarding production in general mode)
During the general mode, a transition is made to a "general performance mode" that performs a performance related to the general mode. The general performance mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general performance modes, and for example, by operating the operation means (the performance button 13 or the direction key 75) while waiting for a customer, the player can select the desired performance mode. It is possible to switch to general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the block frame of the normal mode in FIG. It is possible to select one of three types of performance modes (player selectable performance modes). However, what should not be confused is that these production modes are production modes under the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H), and the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. does not mean. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the effects that appear may differ, but the internally selected special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern distribution table) does not change, so the symbol fluctuation display game The time (variation time of special symbols) itself does not change.

"Normal mode" is the default production mode, and "Simple mode" is a production mode in which the appearance rate of specific preview effects is lower than normal mode, or does not appear at all (occurrence rate 0%). (specific preview effect appearance rate change mode).
In "Simple mode", for example, (a) the appearance rate of specific high-expectation notices with relatively high winning expectations (for example, winning expectations of 30% or more in normal mode) is higher than in normal mode. The probability of winning is low, and when the specific high expectation notice appears, the expectation of winning is greatly increased, and the excitement level when the high expectation notice appears. In addition, (b) the appearance rate of specific low-expectation notices with relatively low winning expectations (for example, performances with winning expectations of less than 30% in normal mode, pre-read notices) is lower than in normal mode (0% ), there is little excessive inciting performance (performance when losing), and it is suitable for players who like simple performances. In addition, (c) the appearance rate of player participation type productions is lower (including 0%) than in normal mode, and the appearance rate of productions that involve operation of production buttons is lower, so it is suitable for games that prefer calm games. It is suitable for people.
In "Premium Mode", the probability of occurrence of a winning performance (a performance that is highly likely to win a jackpot (for example, with a winning expectation of 90% or more) or a performance that is guaranteed to win a jackpot) is higher than in normal mode and simple mode. The appearance rate of multiple types of specific low expectation notices is low probability (including 0%). Therefore, this performance mode is suitable for players who want to enjoy the appearance of premium performances that can predict their winnings.
It should be noted that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion performance in any of the normal, simple, and premium performance modes may be set to the same probability, or may be set to different probabilities.

Further, in each of the normal, simple, and premium presentation modes, unique presentations corresponding to each presentation mode are displayed so that it is possible to identify which mode the player is in. Specifically, image display effects (e.g., background images (background display), characters appearing in preview effects, decorative designs, etc.), sound effects (e.g., BGM, sound effects), and light effects (e.g., specific At least one of the effects (light emitting mode of the effect LED) changes corresponding to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify which production mode, normal/simple/premium, is in progress. In this embodiment, in the normal mode, a "daytime background image" in which the sun shines is used as the base, and in the "normal mode", a background image reminiscent of the season 'spring' (for example, a background image containing cherry blossom trees, etc.), ``Simple mode'' uses a background image reminiscent of the season ``summer'' (for example, a background image that includes the sea or a sandy beach), and ``Premium mode'' uses a background image that suggests the season ``autumn'' (for example, a background that includes mountains and trees with autumn leaves). image), etc., and are controlled to switch to at least a background display (background effect) according to each effect mode. It should be noted that under other game modes, it may be configured to be switchable between at least two production modes, normal, simple, and premium modes. In this case as well, as described above, the configuration can be such that it is possible to visually identify which mode the player is in.

(7-1B. Regarding portent mode)
In addition, the above-mentioned "harbinger mode" is a game mode that is shifted to when the "ceiling (climb relief function)" described later is almost reached, and for example, a "harbinger effect" is executed to notify that the ceiling is almost reached. It is provided as a game mode for. This precursor mode is shifted to when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a jackpot during the normal mode (normal state). In the case of this embodiment, if the user gets addicted to the 989th game during the general mode, the transition to the omen mode starts from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the “omen mode” in FIG. 7). Details regarding the "ceiling" will be described later, but in this embodiment, if you get addicted to (continue to lose) 1000 games (1000 rotations) during normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is normal), the ceiling function will be activated. Special benefits (ceiling benefits) are granted (see the example column of ceiling benefits in Note 2 of Figure 7).

(7-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, the mode is shifted to the "omen performance mode" which performs an effect related to the omen mode (omen performance). During the omen effect mode, the display is switched from the general mode's "daytime background image" with the shining sun to the "night background image" where the stars are shining, to notify that the omen mode is in progress. Further, even during the harbinger effect mode, it is possible to switch between normal/simple/premium modes (see the block frame (γ) of the harbinger mode in FIG. 7). In addition, during the omen effect mode, for example, a countdown display appears as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling (remaining number of ceilings) (in the omen mode of Fig. 7). (See block frame (δ)). This remaining ceiling number display performance may be made to appear during a part of the period in the precursor mode, and for example, the remaining ceiling number display performance may be started (countdown display starts) from the 996th game, which is close to the ceiling. For example, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, a countdown display (for example, a ceiling game suggests count zero) can be performed between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 and 1000 games including ceiling games. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage in that the player can prevent unnecessary plays until the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, during the portent effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from that in the general mode is displayed. For example, in the general production mode, the pending display mode is based on a simple "round icon" as shown in Figure 5, but in the omen production mode, a dedicated pending display mode based on the "character icon" is displayed. (See the block frame (ε) of the precursor mode in FIG. 7 and FIG. 32). In general mode, one or more pending displays that exist immediately before the transition to portent mode (989th game) will be changed all at once to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to portent mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the pending display to be consumed during the sign mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three pending balls during the execution of the 988th game, the pending display for the 989th to 991st games will be changed to a round icon (in general mode). ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 990th game)'' ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 991st game)''. In addition, from the start of the harbinger effect mode until the predetermined number of games are played, the same hold display (round icon) as in the general effect mode is displayed, and when the ceiling is almost reached (for example, considering the maximum number of hold memories of 4, 996 game to 999 game), the display may be switched to a hold display (character icon) dedicated to the omen. Further, during the omen effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" and/or "hold display exclusively for omen" may be displayed.

(About selecting normal/simple/premium mode during omen mode)
Although it has been explained that during the foreshadow production mode of this embodiment, it is possible to switch to any of "Normal/Simple/Premium modes", the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is not possible (in the state where switching is not possible). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the That is, during the omen performance mode, the performance modes selectable by the player can be fixed. For example, it is possible to fix the production mode that was selected in the general mode, or forcibly fix it to any production mode among normal, simple, and premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to the heaven mode described below). In this case, the event that the production mode, which was switchable in the general mode, becomes unswitchable can give the player a sense of discomfort and make him realize that he is almost reaching the ceiling. In particular, when the omen production mode and the general production mode are in a secret state in terms of production (for example, the omen production mode and the general production mode have a common background image, the production mode common between the omen mode and the general production mode) (internally it is an omen mode, but the production mode is the general production mode), there is no omen mode itself), and by giving the player the uncomfortable feeling of being unable to switch the production mode, it is possible to reach the ceiling ( It is possible to notify that a game (ceiling game) is approaching.

(7-2. About "ST mode")
The ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is a variable probability state (YJ=01H), and this ST mode has a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "02H", "ST early mode", and "ST mode". It includes the "ST middle mode" of "03H" and the "ST final stage mode" of "04H". This ST mode is entered when one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of this embodiment, depending on which of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the game mode is shifted to one of the above-mentioned "probability variation A" to "probability variation C", so the transition form of the game mode also differs. In detail, the transition forms are as shown in (A-1) to (A-3) below.

(A-1: If you win the probability variation jackpot 3, 6 (5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST25) that grants probability variation C (ST number 25 times + time saving number 75 times))
If you win either probability variable jackpot 3 or 6, as already explained with reference to FIG. 4, you will be transferred to "probability variable C" and will be given "25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving". In this case, the game mode transition mode is to stay in "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th game (early stage within the number of ST times), and to stay in "time saving mode" from the 26th to 100th game (within the number of time saving times). It has become. Focusing on this series of transition modes, ``ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ time-saving mode,'' the gaming mode that is transitioned to when winning the probability-variable jackpot 3 or 6 is also referred to as the ``ST25 mode'' (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: If you win the probability variation jackpot 2 or 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75) that grants probability variation B (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving))
If you win either probability variable jackpot 2 or 5, you will be transferred to the above-mentioned "probability variable B" and will be given "75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving" (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early mode" from the 1st to the 25th game (early stage within the ST number), and to stay in the "ST middle stage mode" from the 26th to 75th game (middle stage within the ST number). , and stays in "time saving mode" until the 76th to 100th game (within the number of time saving times). Focusing on this series of transition modes, ``ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ Time saving mode'', the game mode that is transitioned to when winning 2 or 5 guaranteed jackpots is also referred to as ``ST75 mode''. (See Figure 4).

(A-3. If you win the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation) that grants probability variation A (ST number of 100 times))
If you win any of the probability variable jackpots 1, 3, and 7, you will be transferred to the above-mentioned "probability variation A" and will be given "100 STs" (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition form of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early mode" from the 1st to the 25th game (early stage within the ST number), and to stay in the "ST middle stage mode" from the 26th to 75th game (the middle stage within the ST number). , and stays in "ST final stage mode" from the 76th to the 100th game (the final stage of the ST number). Focusing on this series of transitions, ``ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)'', we will focus on the game mode that will be changed to when you win the probability jackpot 1, 3, or 7. This is also referred to as "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Consecutive winning performance of definite variable A to definite variable C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode))
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether it is transferred to one of "probability variation A to probability variation C", during the state with electric support in probability variation A to probability variation C ( The pullback rate (so-called "consecutive winning rate") of a jackpot in the variable probability state or short-time state is also different. That is, the degree of advantage to the player (the state of profit (degree of profit) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 when low probability, 1/63 when high probability), the continuous winning rate of variable A (100 ST times), that is, the continuous winning rate during ST is about 79.8%. . In addition, the consecutive rental rate for fixed variable B (100 electric support with "75 times ST + 25 times shortened hours") is approximately 70% for ST, approximately 12.4% for shortened time, The overall success rate (75 STs + 25 time-savers) is approximately 73.6%. In addition, the consecutive rental rate of fixed variable C (100 electric support with "25 times of ST + 75 times of shortened working hours") is about 33% for ST, approximately 32.8% for shortened working hours, The overall success rate (with electric support) is approximately 55%. In addition, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the success rate (time-saving medium success rate) is approximately 41.2%.

As described above, in this embodiment, since a plurality of probability-variable jackpots with different number of STs are provided, the degree of consecutive winnings during ST can be varied depending on the type of jackpot won. In particular, as in this embodiment, when the number of times the electric support is present (the number of electric support) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST 25 times, ST 75 times, ST 100 times), The degree of profit and the degree of successive winnings during the state with electric support can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot won. As a result, the degree of freedom in gameplay is increased, and the fun of the game can be further improved. Further, the degree of freedom in the production related to the ST mode (ST production mode to be described later) is improved, and the production can be varied.

(7-2-1. Regarding the fluctuation status at the beginning of ST, middle of ST, and end of ST)
As already explained, the "ST early stage mode", "ST middle stage mode", and "ST late stage mode" have different variation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see FIG. 28). As a result, a variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode can be selected, so that each ST mode can create an ST mode with its own characteristics. For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for early ST mode, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected with high probability, and in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for mid-ST mode, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected with high probability. In the variation pattern distribution table for the ST final stage mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability. In other words, the average execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game (the average execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game per game or the number of executions of the symbol fluctuation display game per unit time: hereinafter referred to as the "average (also referred to as "digestion time"). Note that the average digestion time (average digestion time) of the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation display game is the average digestion time at least at the time of loss, that is, the "average fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation pattern" in each ST mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship between the average digestion times related to the ST mode is determined to satisfy "ST late stage mode < ST middle mode < ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, the early ST mode is controlled under the "high-speed fluctuation state (fastest of all game modes (shortest average digestion time))", the middle ST mode is controlled under the "medium speed fluctuation state", and the late ST mode is controlled under the "low speed fluctuation state". . Note that as long as the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the above relationship of "ST late mode < ST middle mode < ST early mode", there is no particular restriction on the time. However, ST mode is a game mode related to probability variable states, and the "special symbol time saving function" is activated during ST mode, so any variable state is at least more stable than the normal mode (normal state) in the symbol variable display game. The average digestion time is short. Each of the above fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed, and low speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that places emphasis on gameplay, such as "increasing the average game completion speed and increasing the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game." During ST mode (variable probability state), it becomes "state with electric support + high probability state (special symbol probability variable function activated) + special symbol time saving state (special symbol time shortened function activated)", and the symbol variable display game is at least compared to normal mode. The average time required to complete the game is relatively short, and the game state is designed to make it easier to win the jackpot. Many players want to win the jackpot as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected, and a "high-speed variation state" is generated.

On the other hand, in contrast to the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state," under the "medium-speed fluctuation state" or "slow-speed fluctuation state" in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected, the average of the symbol fluctuation display game is Although the digestion time is longer than in the ``high-speed fluctuation state,'' the performance time can be taken longer in return, so it is useful for game modes that place emphasis on gameplay, such as ``enjoy the performance.''

(7-2-2. Regarding production during ST mode)
As described above, the ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode". Therefore, the production modes (ST production modes) corresponding to these ST modes include the "ST early production mode" in which productions related to the "ST early stage" (ST early production) appear, and the "ST early production mode" related to the "ST middle stage". There is a "ST mid-stage production mode" in which a production (production for the middle of the ST) appears, and a "ST final stage production mode" in which a production related to the "ST final stage" (production for the ST final stage) appears. ing.

(7-2-3. Example of production during ST mode: Figure 29)
FIG. 29 shows examples of performances in the ST early stage performance mode, ST middle stage performance mode, and ST final stage performance mode.

Referring to FIG. 29, the "ST early production mode" according to the present embodiment is an "underwater acoustic battle mode" that produces a production that depicts a battle between submarines, and the "ST mid-stage production mode" produces a production that depicts a battle between fleets. The ``surface battle mode'' and ``ST final stage production mode,'' which create expressive effects, are the ``land battle mode,'' which creates effects that express the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three stages: early ST, middle ST, and late ST, depending on the number of remaining STs, and which of these three ST divisions you are staying in is mainly determined by the ST division performance. In addition, the player is notified of dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state from high speed to medium speed to low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of background effects, preview effects, etc.). It should be noted that the illustrated display of "Right hit ⇒" is a firing guidance notification performance (right hit instruction performance) that urges the player to play right. Further, the hold icon is shown only in the production example (production example related to ST100 mode) in FIG. In addition, although the illustration shows the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed, for convenience of explanation, this is only when the game ends and the decorative symbols are being displayed in a stopped state.Actually, they are not in operation. If there is a reserved ball, the decorative symbols will naturally be displayed in a variable manner under the current performance mode.

Regarding the "ST division production" that separates the production modes during the ST period, each production mode of "ST early production mode", "ST middle production mode", "ST final production mode", underwater sound battle mode , surface battle mode, land battle mode, etc., and it is announced that the number of STs is gradually approaching the final time.

In this embodiment, even if any of the probability-variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the production mode starts from the "underwater acoustic battle mode" of the ST early production mode. In other words, the ST early performance mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown. However, each ST mode has a different transition form of the game mode, and accordingly, a different form of transition of the production mode.

(For ST25 mode: Figure 29 (c))
In the case of the ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. 29(c), the game stays in the ST early presentation mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) for the 1st to 25th games. When the 25th and final ST game is completed, the game mode is changed from the ST early stage mode to the time-saving mode, and along with this, the production mode also changes from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the time-saving production mode (fighter planes fighting each other). (The details of the time-saving mode and the time-saving production mode will be described later). The player stays in this time-saving production mode (air battle mode) for 26 games to 100 games (time-saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is completed, the time-saving mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to normal mode, and along with this, the production mode also changes from the time-saving production mode to the normal production mode. (general performance mode) (the same applies to ST75 mode, which will be described later).

(For ST75 mode: Figure 29 (b))
In the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. 29(b), the game stays in the ST early presentation mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) for the 1st to 25th games. When the 25th game ends, the game mode will shift from ST early mode to ST middle mode, and along with this, the production mode will also shift from ST early production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to ST mid-stage production mode (water battle mode). and stays in this ST mid-stage production mode (water battle mode) until the 75th game. After completing the 75th game, the final ST game, the game mode shifts from the ST mid-stage mode to the time-saving mode, and along with this, the production mode also changes from the ST mid-stage production mode (water battle mode) to the time-saving production mode (air battle mode). will be migrated. In the case of ST75 mode, the player stays in this time-saving production mode (air battle mode) for 76 to 100 games (time-saving final game).

(For ST100 mode: Figure 29 (a))
In the case of ST100 mode (100 STs), as shown in FIG. 29(a), up to the 75th game, the above-mentioned ST75 mode is the same game mode and performance mode transition. However, after completing the 75th game, the game mode is shifted to ST mid-stage mode and ST final stage mode, and along with this, the production mode and production mode change from ST mid-stage production mode (water battle mode) to ST final stage production mode (land battle mode). will be moved to In the case of ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the electric support state are in ST (probability change), and this land battle mode is a special performance mode that occurs only in ST100 mode. In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, the background changes sequentially in all sections of ST mode, so the player's sense of tension is enhanced. It becomes stronger each time the mode changes (at the end of the ST), and becomes the strongest when you reach the land battle mode at the end of the ST. Although not shown in the diagram, when the 100th game is completed, the ST mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and shifts to the normal mode, and along with this, the production mode changes from the ST final stage production mode to the normal production mode. mode (general production mode).

In this manner, in this embodiment, no matter which jackpot is won, the game starts from the "ST early stage mode + ST early stage production mode". In other words, regardless of the game state to which the jackpot game transitions (probable variation A to probability variation C), in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number (the number of ST given), the start effect mode after the jackpot game (initial The production mode) is the same.

(Modification example related to ST mode: Fig. 30, Fig. 31)
Incidentally, the transition of the ST mode and the ST performance mode in the game progress is not limited to the above embodiment (FIG. 29), but can be configured to follow the transitions shown in Modifications 1 and 2 below. Modifications 1 and 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

(Modification example 1 related to ST mode: Fig. 30)
FIG. 30 shows a first modification of the ST mode of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the hold icon corresponding to the production mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31, which will be described later).

In the case of this example (Modification 1), the ST mode is divided into multiple categories, but the starting performance mode differs depending on each ST mode (according to the type of jackpot won), and the starting effect mode differs depending on the number of remaining STs. , it is designed to start from a different production mode.

Referring to FIG. 30, in the case of ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29(A)) is followed.

However, in the case of ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 time saving times), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining ST number is 75, the following mode transition ( ST mode and the transition of the corresponding production mode).
"1 to 25 games": "ST mid-stage mode + ST mid-stage production mode (water battle mode)"
“26 to 75 games”: “ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)”
"76 to 100 games": "Time saving mode + time saving production mode (air battle mode)"

In addition, in the case of ST25 mode (25 ST times + 50 time saving times), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining ST number is 25, the following mode transition is performed as shown in Figure (C). It is designed to be followed.
"1 to 25 games": "ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“26 to 100 games”: “Time saving mode + time saving production mode (air battle mode)”

In this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. This example differs from the above embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, if we focus on the fluctuating state, the ST75 mode starts from the mid-ST mode (surface warfare mode), so the fluctuating state starts from the "medium speed fluctuating state." Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST25 mode is started from the ST final stage mode (land battle mode), the fluctuation state is started from the "low speed fluctuation state". That is, in the case of this example, the smaller the initial number of STs is, the slower the average completion time of the symbol variation display game is to start the game mode. Therefore, the section (between 1 and 25 games) corresponding to the "high-speed fluctuation state" at the beginning of ST in the above embodiment becomes the section of the medium-speed fluctuation state or the low-speed fluctuation state, so even if the number of STs is small, , there is an advantage that there is no fear that the ST period will end too quickly, and that the ST period can be enjoyed for a long period of time.

(Modification example 2 related to ST mode: Figure 31)
FIG. 31 shows a second modification of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. In this example, regardless of the number of STs, the game is started from a common "ST performance mode", and when the time saving state is entered, the state is changed to the "time saving mode". The illustration typically shows an example where the process starts from the ST middle mode.

In the case of this example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31B, ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes are all a common ST mode and ST production mode (surface battle mode). That is, during the ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode is the same (in this example, the ST middle mode "03H"), and at least the variation state (average digestion time) does not change depending on the number of remaining STs. In this respect, this embodiment differs greatly from the above embodiment and modification example 1. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the ST number ends, the ST mode will be transferred to the time saving mode (the variable pattern selection mode will be updated to the time saving mode "05H"), and along with this, the production mode Also, the ST mid-stage presentation mode is shifted to the time-saving presentation mode. In other words, in the ST25 and ST75 modes, the gaming mode (variable pattern selection mode) with electric support is shifted, and in the ST100 mode, the gaming mode (variable pattern selection mode) with electric support is shifted. ) transition does not occur.

In this example, since the ST production mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of STs, for example, the number of STs is relatively small such as "5, 10, 15 times" (low ST probability variable state). This is suitable when providing multiple types of. This is because when the number of STs is small, if the performance mode or variable pattern selection mode is changed recklessly, the player will feel bothered.

In addition, during ST mode, it may be configured such that "Normal mode", "Simple mode", and "Premium mode" explained in the normal mode cannot be switched, or it may be configured such that they can be switched by the player as in the normal mode. (The same applies to other game modes (time saving mode and heaven mode, which will be described later)). If you want a switchable configuration, you can set the background image color to a specific color (for example, dark You can change the display color and pattern of weapon images (submarine, ship, tank, fighter jet (in the case of time-saving production mode described below)) related to each ST mode to normal/simple/premium mode. By performing display processing such as changing in each production mode, it is possible to configure so that it is possible to identify which production mode is being switched to. Further, it is free to determine how the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is determined. In this embodiment, the relationship of "ST final stage mode < ST middle mode < ST early stage mode" has been explained, but it may be configured like the variable states of Modifications 1 and 2, or "ST early stage mode < ST middle mode < ST final stage mode". There may also be a relationship in which the fluctuating state relatively slows down depending on the number of STs, such as in the relationship ``mode''.

The following configurations (1) to (10) can be used for the "remaining ST count notification effect" that notifies the remaining ST count and the "remaining power support count notification effect" that notifies the remaining power support count.
(1) In each ST effect mode (Each ST mode), a "remaining ST count notification effect" and/or a "remaining power support count notification effect" can appear.
In addition, (2) when displaying the remaining ST number notification effect, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, if you are in early ST mode, the countdown will be displayed from 25 times remaining, if you are in middle ST mode, the countdown will be displayed from 50 times remaining, and if you are in late ST mode, the countdown will be displayed from 25 times remaining. etc.
Also, (3) a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining ST count notification effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST count cannot be grasped). In this case, only the residual power support number notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (4) the remaining ST count notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the ST start. For example, the countdown display may start five games before the ST ends.
Further, (5) the remaining ST number notification effect may be displayed only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be ST25, ST75, or ST100, but the more STs remaining, the more players tend to play the game while paying attention to the number of remaining STs. It is preferable to make it appear.
(6) During the ST performance mode (ST mode), the remaining ST count notification performance may be displayed, and during the time saving performance mode (time saving mode), the remaining power support count notification performance may be displayed.
Furthermore, (7) the remaining ST count notification effect and the remaining power support count notification effect may not be separately displayed separately, but may also be used as a countdown display, for example. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display may be "white" during ST mode and "red" during time saving mode, or a predetermined effect image (( For example, the display may be displayed with light (glow effect, shadow effect), gradation, blur, emboss, or other appropriate effect image processing, but no effect may be displayed during the time saving mode.

(7-3. Regarding “time saving mode”)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 6. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the time saving state (YJ=02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In time saving mode, in addition to winning time saving jackpots 1 and 2 (5R time saving A, 5R time saving B), probability variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R probability variation ST75, 5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation) This is a gaming mode that is entered even after the number of STs has ended when winning ST25) or the like. After the time saving mode ends (after the number of time saving times ends), the mode is shifted to the "normal mode" (see the upward thick arrow in the time saving mode block frame in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Regarding fluctuation status during time saving mode)
During the above time saving mode, the state will be "low probability (special symbol probability change function not activated) + electric support state + special symbol time saving state", but regarding the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game, the high speed related to the above ST mode The fluctuation state may be the same or substantially the same as the fluctuation state, medium speed fluctuation state, or low speed fluctuation state, or the fluctuation state may have an average digestion rate different from these. However, the time saving mode is also transitioned from the ST mode; specifically, in the case of ST25 mode, the transition is from "ST early stage mode (high-speed fluctuation state)" to "time saving mode", and in the case of ST75 mode, is that it shifts to "time saving mode" after passing through "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and that the probability of jackpot lottery is low during time saving mode (loss probability) It is preferable to position the time-saving mode as a game mode that emphasizes the gameplay, such as "enjoying the performance." Therefore, it is preferable that the fluctuation state (average digestion time) during the time saving mode be set as "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode < the high speed fluctuation state during the ST mode", and more preferably "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode ≤ the high speed fluctuation state during the ST mode". medium-speed fluctuation state. Note that, like the ST mode, the time saving mode may also be configured to be able to shift between a plurality of time saving modes, and in this case, a plurality of variable pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. Regarding production during time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, a transition is made to the ``time saving effect mode'' in which an effect related to ``in the time saving state'' is displayed. The time-saving production mode is an "air battle mode" in which the production depicts a battle between fighter planes, and is distinguished from each game mode in the ST mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode). In this embodiment, in addition to winning time-saving jackpots 1 and 2, when shifting to the time-saving mode after the ST of probability-variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 ends, the same time-saving effect mode is entered in both cases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to shift to a time-saving production mode that provides different performances for time-saving jackpot 1 and time-saving jackpot 2 (for example, time-saving A production mode when time-saving jackpot 1 is won, and time-saving B production mode when time-saving jackpot 2 is won). . Further, the time-saving performance mode when winning the time-saving jackpot and the time-saving performance mode after the end of ST when winning the probability variable jackpot (time-saving performance mode related to ST25 and ST75) may be different.

(7-4. About "ceiling mode": Figure 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 7.

In this embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in case of a serious jam. This ceiling function is a function that, when a predetermined number of games (ceiling number of games) is reached without winning a jackpot, a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) is given to the player in order to relieve the player. In addition, the ceiling function mainly has a configuration in which a "ceiling benefit" can be granted as is when the ceiling number of games is reached, and a "ceiling benefit" can be granted through a predetermined lottery when the ceiling number of games is reached. There are two types of configurations.

The latter "predetermined lottery" includes a lottery to determine whether or not a ceiling benefit is "granted or not granted" (if there are multiple ceiling benefits, one of the ceiling benefits will be granted upon winning). (There may be a loss (not awarded)), a lottery to determine which one of the multiple ceiling benefits will be awarded (a lottery that assumes that the ceiling benefit will be awarded), and a jackpot lottery to determine which ceiling benefit will be awarded. There is a lottery that can determine a certain jackpot (for example, one of the winning types shown in FIG. 4 (which may be the winning type on the special drawing 1 or 2 side) is determined as a ceiling benefit).

The above-mentioned "ceiling benefit" provides a benefit state that is more advantageous than the normal state at least in terms of the addictive relief function. Further, the number of ceiling games (the number of games in which the ceiling function is activated) can be determined as appropriate, but from the viewpoint of the addictive relief function, it is preferable to determine the number of games in consideration of the jackpot lottery probability. The number of ceiling games in this embodiment is the number of games taking into consideration the jackpot lottery probability at low probability settings of 1 to 6 (1/240 to 1/189: see Figure 4), and is the 1000th game in the normal mode. Yes (about 3 to 4 times the low probability), and the ceiling mode is the game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. If you are a "sweet digital type" with a relatively high jackpot lottery probability (around 1/100) during the normal state, it is preferable to set the ceiling number of games to about 300 to 500 games.

Note that in this embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different ceiling games can be determined for all or part of each set value. In other words, the number of ceiling games may be varied depending on the set value. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with a setting estimation factor based on the difference in the number of ceiling games. For example, the following (a) to (c) can be used.
(a) Each set value (settings 1 to 6) determines a different number of ceiling games. For example, the higher the setting value is, the fewer the number of ceiling games will be, and conversely, the higher the setting value is, the more the number of ceiling games will be.
(b) defining different ceiling games with at least some of the set values; For example, the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) has a first ceiling game number, and the medium/low setting area (settings 1 to 3) has a second ceiling game number. In addition, it may be set as "the number of first ceiling games<the number of second ceiling games", or it may be "the number of first ceiling games>the number of second ceiling games".
(c) Only a specific setting value determines the number of ceiling games that is different from other setting values. For example, only a specific set value is set as a first ceiling game number, and other set values are set as a second ceiling game number different from the first ceiling game number. The specific setting value can be, for example, the highest setting 6, the lowest setting 1, or some other setting value. In this case, if a ceiling benefit is given when the first ceiling number of games is reached, the player can definitely know that the specific setting value is reached.

First, let me explain the types of ceiling benefits. As shown in the list of "Examples of Ceiling Benefits" in Note 2 of Figure 7, the types of ceiling benefits are, for example, "Infinite Time Saving", "Limited Time Saving", "Infinite Variable", "Finite Variable", " There are "infinite potential", "finite potential", "forced hit", etc. Broadly dividing these benefits, "infinite time saving" and "finite time saving" are "ceiling time saving types", "infinite definite variation" and "finite definite variation" are "ceiling definite variation types", and "infinite potential" and "finite potential" are "ceiling time saving types". ``Definite'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling potential type'', and ``forced hit'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling hit type''. Below, these ceiling benefit types will be explained one by one.

(Infinite time saving)
(A) "Infinite time saving" is a privilege that grants a time saving state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite time saving, the number of time saving times is "unlimited number of times (infinite)", but the number of time saving times until the next jackpot, for example, "10000 times" or "65536 times", etc. Considering the jackpot lottery probability when the probability is low (in the case of this embodiment, 1/240 with setting 1), there is no possibility of ending the time saving state due to the number of time saving times being reached (it is safe to think that it is 0%). In the present invention, even if the number of time reductions that cannot be completed during the business hours of the pachinko hall is given (for example, approximately 4,000 to 5,000 times or more), it can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(Limited time saving)
(B) "Limited time saving" means that a time saving state is granted up to a predetermined number of times in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. This point is different from the above-mentioned infinite time saving, which has no limit on the number of times. Typical examples of the number of time savings granted are, for example, the same number of time savings as in Time Saving Jackets 1 and 2, 100 times, or 75 times, but it is not limited to giving the same number of time savings as the Time Saving Jacket, but also a different number of time savings. A number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite time saving", when giving a time saving number that is "substantially until the next jackpot", it can be said that it belongs to this finite time saving in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as described above, the present invention In this case, it can be treated as belonging to the infinite shortening of time.

(Specific example of granting limited working hours)
Here, when granting a finite time reduction, the following granting forms (1) to (4) (limited time saving granting forms 1 to 4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to a jackpot (the number of time reductions granted due to winning a jackpot (time reduction state)), the number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (work reduction state) is more than one type. Decide on a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of the number of time savings due to the jackpot: 100 times (time saving A) and 50 times (time saving B). It is configured so that only one type of 100 times (time saving A) is given. Note that, as long as the relationship "Number of Types B<Number of Types A" is satisfied, a different number of time saving times (for example, 150 times) than the number of time saving times due to the jackpot may be given. In addition, if there are two or more types of number of working hours reduced (working hours reduced state) due to ceiling benefits (in the case of "2 ≦ number of types B < number of types A"), one of the number of reduced working hours (time reduced state) will be selected by a predetermined lottery. ) can be configured to be decidable.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of time saving times (work time saving states) due to ceiling benefits, one of the time saving times (work time saving states) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling benefit lottery).
For example, the time saving number can be determined by lottery from among a plurality of time saving times (in this embodiment, 50 times and 100 times) given due to winning the jackpot. In this case, the number of time savings equivalent to a jackpot can be given. Of course, the number of time reductions may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of number of time reduction times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including a number of time reductions different from the number of time reductions given due to winning the jackpot. In this case, a different number of time saving times than a jackpot may be awarded. Note that the lottery probabilities (selection rates) of the ceiling benefit types (herein, each time saving number) to be lottery targets may be the same or substantially the same, or may be different in whole or in part. Further, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege loss" in which a ceiling privilege is not given. In the case where a ceiling award loss is involved, the ceiling award is not necessarily awarded even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, the "execution of the ceiling award lottery" itself can provide a profit to the player. It can be said that the ceiling bonus lottery serves as a relief function for addicts.

Alternatively, a lottery probability may be determined according to the "set value", and one of the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling award lottery according to the setting value). For example, the configuration is such that as the set value increases, a relatively large number of time saving times (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the setting value increases, benefits with relatively high profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, if "100 times, 75 times, and 50 times" are set as the types of time saving times, and these lottery probabilities are "setting 1", "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" In the case of 6”, it is “45%, 30%, 25%”, etc. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more likely it is to become addicted, the configuration may be such that the lower the set value is, the more likely a relatively large number of time saving times will be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the set value becomes lower, benefits with relatively higher profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which "a specific set value is determined when a specific ceiling benefit is granted." For example, if 25 time saving times are given, "setting 6 is confirmed", and if 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed", etc. In this way, the ceiling benefit determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information such as the setting estimation factor, and is therefore useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned finite time saving grant forms 1 and 2, finite time saving is targeted, but "infinite time saving" may be included in the time saving state due to a jackpot (time saving jackpot) and/or the time saving state due to ceiling benefits.

(Limited time saving grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time savings due to the time saving jackpot is N, and the average number of time savings due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 1) to (Formula 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". In the case of this embodiment, the average number of time savings N due to the jackpot is 75, so the average number M of time savings due to the ceiling benefit is set to be greater than this (for example, 100 times or more). In this case, the time-saving state due to the ceiling bonus has a higher degree of profit than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it is a nice benefit for players who are addicted to playing and have significantly decreased their desire to play. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of time reductions M is set to an infinite number of times, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction" is provided.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time-saving state due to the jackpot and the time-saving state due to the ceiling benefit have the same degree of profit. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in both the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot and the time saving state due to the ceiling benefit. In this case as well, "average number of time reductions N (infinite number of times)=average number of time reductions M (infinite number of times)", which satisfies (Formula 2).
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit is relatively lower in the time-saving state due to the ceiling benefit than in the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefit provision. Note that the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to the ceiling benefit does not include "infinite time saving".

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) Similar to (Formula 3) above, focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, at least the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship "number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits ≦ maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot" stipulate. In this embodiment, the number of time savings due to the ceiling benefit is equal to or less than the number of time savings of "Time Saving A" due to Time Saving Jackpot 1, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Further, focusing on the minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot, the number of time savings may be the number that satisfies the relationship "minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot ≦ number of time savings due to a ceiling benefit < maximum number of time savings due to a jackpot". In this embodiment, the number of time savings due to ceiling benefits is greater than or equal to the number of time savings B due to time saving jackpot 2 and less than the number of time savings A of time saving jackpot 1, for example, 50 times, 60 times, etc. Note that the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to the ceiling benefit does not include "infinite time saving".

(infinitely variable)
(C) “Infinitely variable” is a privilege that grants a variable probability state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation, the number of STs is "unlimited number of times (infinite)", but like the same event as the above "infinite time saving", the number of STs until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times) or 65,536 times).

(finite definite variation)
(D) "Finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, and is a state in which a probability variation state is given within a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, like the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7, the number of STs is given as 100, 75, or 25. Of course, it does not have to be the same number of times as the ST number of probability variable jackpots 1 to 7, and may be given 50 times, 150 times, etc. In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite definite variation", when the number of STs that are "substantially until the next jackpot" is given, it can be said to belong to this finite definite variation in that there is a limit on the number of times, but it is the same as the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction". It may be treated as belonging to infinite definite variation, as in the case of the elephant, or it may be treated as belonging to finite definite variation (the same applies to infinite definite variation, which will be described later).

(Specific example of adding finite definite variation)
Here, when granting a finite variable, the following ceiling benefit granting forms (finite variable granting forms) 1 to 4 are the same as those explained in the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 4 of "Limited time saving" above. It can be set to 4. In addition, in the following finite variable granting forms 1 to 4, the "time saving number" explained in the above "finite time saving granting forms 1 to 4" has been replaced with "ST number", "time saving state" has been read as "definite variable state", etc. Since the contents (concepts) are substantially the same, the contents will be omitted as appropriate in the description to avoid duplication.

(Finite variable grant form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of ST times due to jackpots (ST times given due to winning a jackpot (probable variable state)), but the number of STs due to ceiling benefits (probable variable state) is smaller than that. (Number of types B). In other words, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (probable variable state) given to the probability variable jackpot due to winning is 100 times (probable variable A), 75 times (probable variable B), 25 times (probable variable C). ), but the ceiling benefit is configured to award only one type, for example, 100 STs (probability variation A).

(Finite variable grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST times (variable probability states) based on ceiling benefits, one of the ST numbers (variable probability states) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding this point, it is substantially the same as the content explained in "(Limited time reduction granting form 2)" in the above finite time reduction, where the "number of time reductions" is replaced with "ST number", "time reduction state" is read as "variable state", etc. as appropriate. It is.

(Finite variable grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to variable probability jackpots is N, and the average number of STs due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 4) to (Formula 6). Regarding these (Formula 4) to (Formula 6), the wording of "Number of time saving" in (Formula 1) to (Formula 3) explained in "(Finite time saving provision form 3)" in the above finite time saving is changed to "ST number of times". ” is substantially the same as the other words.
(Formula 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N<average number of STs M". Note that the average number of ST times M may be an infinite number of times. When the average ST number M is set to infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite probability variation" is provided.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite variable grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of STs is determined to satisfy at least the relationship "Number of STs due to ceiling benefits ≦ maximum number of STs due to jackpot". In this embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling bonus is less than or equal to the number of STs due to the probability variable jackpot 1, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Alternatively, focusing on the minimum number of STs due to a jackpot, the number of STs may be one that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to a jackpot≦ST count due to a ceiling bonus<maximum number of STs due to a jackpot." In this embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling bonus is greater than or equal to the number of STs due to probability variable jackpot 6, etc., and less than the number of STs due to probability variation jackpot 1, etc., for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (the same number of STs as ST75), etc. It is.

(infinite potential)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a privilege that gives you a potential status until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite potential, the number of STs is "unlimited (infinite)", but as with the infinite time shortening and infinite probability variation above, even if you give the number of STs that will essentially reach the next jackpot. good.

(finite potential)
(F) "Finite potential" differs from the above-mentioned infinite potential, and gives a potential state up to a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, a potential jackpot that triggers a transition to a potential state is not provided, but if a part of the probability variable jackpot is a potential probability jackpot, the finite probability variable grant form 1 explained in finite probability variable It is possible to use the same configuration as in 4 to 4 (configuration related to assigning the number of STs). Regarding this point, the content is essentially the same as that of finite definite variation (the wording of "definite variable state" is replaced with the wording of "potential state" as appropriate), so detailed explanation will be omitted to avoid duplication. .

(per force)
(G) "Forced win" means a forced jackpot win, regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the jackpot lottery is completely unrelated. Not limited to meaning.

The types of jackpots due to forced hits are variable probability jackpots (finite probability variable jackpots, infinite probability variable jackpots), time-saving jackpots (finite time-saving jackpots, infinite time-saving jackpots), or potential probability jackpots (finite potential probability jackpots, infinite potential probability jackpots). There may be. Furthermore, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be determined as appropriate. Furthermore, the destination gaming state after the forced win can be determined as appropriate. For example, the destination gaming state may be the same as when the jackpot shown in FIG. It is also possible to shift to a gaming state similar to awarding modes 1 to 4, finite probability variable awarding modes 1 to 4, and the like.

However, in order to prevent excessive benefits from being granted, the forced win is any jackpot among the jackpot lottery targets (in this embodiment, any jackpot from the probability-variable jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2). ) is preferable. More preferably, the profit level is not higher than the total jackpot. The profit here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the destination gaming state." In this embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the following relationship: "Profit from forced hit≦Profit from definite variable jackpot 4 (the jackpot with the highest profit level among all jackpots)".

The above-described ceiling benefit is useful as an addiction relief function because it can provide a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, although various ceiling benefits have been explained above, it is free to choose which ceiling benefit to adopt. In addition, for ceiling benefits, we can provide multiple types of benefits with different characteristics (for example, finite time reduction and finite variable rate), or benefits with the same characteristics but different advantages (profit status) (for example, finite time reduction of 100 times). It is possible to provide multiple types of time saving A, limited time saving B with a limited number of time saving times of 50, etc.). In this case, what types of multiple types of ceiling benefits (two or more ceiling benefits) are provided can be determined as appropriate. For example, it is possible to provide a finite time reduction and a finite fixed variation, and determine which ceiling benefit to be granted by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the lottery probability may be set to be the same regardless of the setting value, but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the setting value, as in the above-mentioned "ceiling bonus lottery". Specifically, as the setting value increases, benefits with relatively high profit levels (for example, in the case of a lottery between finite time saving and finite definite variable, the "finite definite variable" side) are likely to be granted, and conversely, As the setting value becomes higher, the structure can be such that a benefit with a relatively low profit level (for example, in the case of drawing a lottery between finite time saving and finite fixed variable, the "finite time saving" side) is more likely to be granted. Note that compulsory In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics'' includes cases such as ``providing at least two of the time-saving jackpot, guaranteed variable jackpot, and potential jackpot'', and cases of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics''; However, cases in which multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit states) are provided include, for example, cases in which multiple jackpots with different time-saving numbers (time-saving jackpots) and multiple jackpots with different ST numbers (probable variable jackpots) are provided. There are also cases where a "potential jackpot" is established.

Further, after the ceiling privilege is awarded, the game state (gaming mode) related to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is consumed or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite benefit" such as finite time saving, finite variable variable, or finite potential, if the specified number of time saving or ST times ends without winning the jackpot, or if you win the jackpot. In this case, the ceiling privilege is not granted until the mode is shifted to the normal mode (normal state) and the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite type benefit" such as infinite time saving, infinite probability variation, or infinite probability, the benefit state will continue until the next jackpot, and the privilege state will be terminated with the winning of the jackpot.

In addition, if the ceiling privilege is finite variable, it is a "finite variable time saving type" ceiling privilege that transitions to a time saving state (finite time saving or infinite time saving) when the specified number of STs ends, such as ST75 mode or ST25 mode. It's okay. This "finitely variable time-saving type" includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) A ``finite variable/finite time saving'' type ceiling benefit that transitions to a finite time saving (for example, 100 time saving times) when the specified ST number of times (for example, 75 times) ends.
(B) A ``finitely variable/infinite time saving'' type ceiling benefit that transitions to infinite time saving after the specified number of STs ends.
(C) When the first prescribed ST number (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric support state ends, and the state shifts to the second prescribed ST number (for example, 100 times). ” type ceiling benefit (the first prescribed number of STs and the second prescribed number of STs may be the same number of times or may be different numbers of times).
(C) A ``finitely variable/infinitely certain'' type ceiling benefit that only ends in the electric support state when the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) ends and shifts to infinitely certain.

Returning to the explanation of the ceiling mode in FIG. 7. Here, a configuration in which "finite time saving" (100 times, the maximum number of time saving by jackpot) is adopted as a ceiling benefit will be explained as a representative example.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time-saving state or a fixed-variable state, depending on the ceiling privilege, but here we are explaining an example in which "finite time-saving" is granted, so the ceiling mode is , the game mode is related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to a dedicated "06H" in order to select a variation pattern dedicated to the ceiling.

Here, when reaching the ceiling (during a ceiling game), a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern) is selected in order to ensure the duration of the "ceiling effect" described later. There is. In this embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected in all game modes (in all variation pattern selection mode) (see the "ceiling variation" column in FIG. 26). There are no particular restrictions on the variation pattern for the ceiling as long as the production time width of the "ceiling effect" can be secured, but it is recommended that the variation pattern has a variation time that is at least longer than the SP reach in normal mode (at least equal to or greater than the SP reach without pseudo connection). It is preferable to configure it so that it can be selected.

In addition, the jackpot lottery will be carried out as usual for the 1000th game (ceiling game), so if you win the jackpot in the 1000th game, the jackpot game will start as usual after the 1000th game ends. Become.
The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, if you happen to win a jackpot in the ceiling game, the activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see the ceiling activation management process in FIG. 13 described later). ), if the ceiling benefit is given, it will be the case that the 1000th game is a "lose". If a small win is provided, even if you win the small win in the 1000th game, you will be given a ceiling benefit in the same way as if you were a loser.
This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling benefit is a finite time reduction, but also applies to the case where the ceiling benefit is an infinite time reduction, an infinite variable variable, a finite variable, an infinite potential, or a finite potential. However, if the ceiling benefit is "forced win", the jackpot lottery will be forcibly controlled, so the jackpot lottery itself will not be executed for the 1000th game, or the result will be invalidated even if the jackpot lottery is executed. Treat it as if the jackpot for the ceiling has been won. Therefore, if the ceiling benefit is a "forced hit", after the end of the 1000th game, the jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the ceiling jackpot will start in the same way as when a normal jackpot is won. becomes.
In addition, the winning performance during the forced jackpot game may be the same as the normal jackpot (same as any of the time-saving jackpot 1 and the sure-change jackpot 1 to 7), or a winning performance exclusive to the forced jackpot may be displayed. It's okay.

(7-4-1. Regarding production during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling presentation mode" in which a presentation (ceiling presentation) for notifying that the vehicle has reached the ceiling appears. This ceiling effect mode is a effect mode exclusively for the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, it is a effect mode for only one game (one rotation only). As an example of a presentation in the ceiling presentation mode, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for ceiling) that is different from at least the normal mode (numeric symbols 1 to 9) is displayed. The reason why I chose "at least a decorative pattern that is different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling will be reached when you encounter a big addiction in normal mode, and the decorative pattern that is different from the decorative pattern that has been appearing in normal mode for a long time will reach the ceiling. This is because it is appropriate to make it appear and notify that it has reached the ceiling.

Specifically, the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a special pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or text, and the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of production. Preferably, for example, the decorative pattern 778 (decorative patterns of "Heaven", "☆", and "Well") shown in Note 1 of FIG. 7 is used. Although there are usually three decorative pattern rows: a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 5), the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, there may be four symbol rows of "heaven," "well," "reach," and "tatsu," or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well." Furthermore, in order to emphasize that the object has reached the ceiling, a huge decorative pattern with a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding decorative patterns related to ceiling games, when displaying a variable display, normal decorative patterns are used (all or part of the same decorative pattern), and only the decorative pattern that is to be stopped at the end (decoration stop pattern) is used as a ceiling decorative pattern. Good too.

Further, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, a "right-handed hit instruction image (right-handed hit notification image 779)" appears as a firing guidance notification effect that encourages right-handed hitting at the start of the symbol variation display game. It is.

The reason why the right-handed hitting instruction image 779 is displayed is as follows. When a finite time reduction is granted as a ceiling benefit (the same applies to cases where an infinite time reduction, a finite probability change, or an infinite probability change is granted), a "power support state" occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, this is to immediately notify the player that playing right-handed is advantageous so as not to put the player at a disadvantage. In this embodiment, the right-hand hitting instruction image 779 appears at the same time or approximately at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in consideration of the fact that the "power support state" occurs at the ceiling (1000th game), during the precursor mode or for some periods (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (the final precursor mode)), It is preferable to display a performance (pre-launch guidance notification performance) that notifies that "right-handed batting" will soon become advantageous.

Further, in the case of a "lose" in the symbol variation display game at the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific preview effect. For example, at least the highly anticipated preview performance does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-link, reach-to-reach performance, and player participation type performance does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for an exaggerated preview performance that stirs up expectations of winning the jackpot at the ceiling. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-run, a reach effect, a player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a preview effect exclusively for the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to display preview effects that arouse expectations of winning, so when displaying preview effects such as pseudo-links, reach effects, or player participation effects, other effects should be avoided. It is preferable to use a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from the presentation mode that appears in the mode. Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a bonus for reaching the ceiling. This is because providing players with useful information such as setting estimation factors is useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is made to appear at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be set to 100%, or it may be made to appear by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, if you happen to win a jackpot in the ceiling game (1000th game), the effect related to the ceiling effect mode will not appear, but will appear in the normal effect mode (for example, during the general mode or the omen mode). The same effect as the preview effect that can appear when winning the jackpot is displayed (see the "Ceiling" column in Figure 24). Specifically, as shown in the "ceiling" column of FIG. 24, in the case of a jackpot in the ceiling game, the variable pattern distribution table "FB2" used in the general mode or the omen mode is selected. As a result, when a jackpot is won in the ceiling game, a performance related to the normal performance mode (in the general mode or in the omen mode) is made to appear. The reason for doing this is that if a ceiling effect is displayed even when a jackpot is reached in a ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether it is a jackpot or a ceiling benefit is given, which confuses the player. This is because

(7-5. Heaven mode)
Heaven mode is a game mode that is transferred to the next game (1001st game) after the ceiling game, and depending on the ceiling privilege, the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state or a variable probability state, etc. Since an example is described in which "finite time saving (100 times of time saving)" is provided, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to a dedicated "07H" in order to select a variation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is a case of a ceiling privilege other than "forced hit" (finite time saving, infinite time saving, infinite definite variable, finite definite variable, infinite potential definite, finite potential definite, etc.).

The heaven mode is ended when a jackpot is won or, in the case of the above-mentioned finite ceiling privilege, when the prescribed number of time reductions or ST times are completed without winning a jackpot. Here, the ceiling privilege is explained as "finite time saving (100 time saving times)", so heaven mode is activated when the 100 time saving times are completed or when a jackpot is won while the time saving number is being used. It will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, if the ceiling benefit is finite probability variable or finite potential, it will end when the ST number ends or if you win the jackpot within the ST number. In this case, the game will end if the jackpot is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation status related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation states, medium-speed fluctuation states, and low-speed fluctuation states can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state during heaven mode according to the ceiling benefit type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time saving or infinite time saving, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes the gameplay such as "enjoying the performance", as in the time saving mode. In other words, the fluctuating state in heaven mode when finite time saving or infinite time saving is granted is "fluctuation state in heaven mode < high-speed fluctuating state in ST mode" or "fluctuation state in heaven mode ≦ medium-speed fluctuating state in ST mode" ” is preferable. However, in the case of infinite time saving, taking into account that there is no limit to the number of time saving, a high-speed fluctuation state may be used.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the jackpot lottery probability is high in addition to the state with electric support, so it is possible to make the fluctuation state the same or almost the same as the high-speed fluctuation state in ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, when infinite potential or finite potential is granted, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but since it is controlled without electric support, it is difficult for balls to be activated to occur as in the normal state. . Considering this point, when infinite latency or finite latency is granted, the fluctuation state is the same or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state is slower than the time saving mode (the fluctuation state where the average digestion time is relatively long). ) is preferable. That is, the relationship satisfies "fluctuation state in normal mode ≦ fluctuating state in infinite potential or finite potential < fluctuating state in time saving mode".

(7-5-2. About the production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven production mode" which makes a production related to the heaven mode (a production for heaven). This heaven production mode is a production mode exclusively for the next game onwards (1001st game onwards), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this heaven production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space) to notify that the heaven mode is in progress.

In addition, when a finite time saving or infinite time saving is given as a ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "time saving production mode (air battle mode)" related to the time saving state may be adopted as the heaven production mode.

Furthermore, when a finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite potential probability, or infinite potential probability is given as a ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST performance mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven production mode. In this case, similarly to the above-mentioned ST performance mode, it may be configured to shift to a different ST performance mode depending on the number of ST consumption times. Specifically, depending on the number of ST consumption, the production mode will be changed sequentially like "ST production early mode (underwater sound battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle mode (surface battle mode) ⇒ ST production final mode (land battle mode)" It can be migrated. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation or infinite potential probability, there is no limit to the number of STs, so from the 101st ST onwards, the ST final stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a separate new ST production mode (ST continuous production mode) You may also move to Alternatively, the process may return to the ST performance early stage mode at ST101 and loop the transition of "ST performance early mode⇒ST performance middle mode⇒ST performance final stage mode" again.

Also, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured to be switchable to any of the normal/simple/premium modes, similar to the same phenomenon as the previously explained "harbinger production mode" and "ST production mode". , a configuration may be adopted in which switching between normal/simple/premium modes is impossible (control is performed in a state where switching is disabled).

Furthermore, as part of the relief measures for players who have become addicted to the game, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher during the heaven mode than in other game modes. For example, the heaven mode should be configured so that the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects that may appear during the symbol variation display game) is higher than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode). Can be done. In particular, if the ceiling benefit is a benefit with electric support (ceiling benefits other than infinite potential and finite potential), the player will be placed under a high base state during heaven mode, so the player can It is possible to proceed with the game without significantly reducing the amount of game media held by the player (game media, game value equivalent thereto, etc.), or while maintaining the current status. For this reason, some players say, ``I don't mind getting a little hooked until I see the setting suggestion effect,'' and they learn advantageous information by getting hooked, contrary to the normal mode. It is thought that there are many players who would like to do so. Taking these points into consideration, it is preferable to vary the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects to a high probability during the heaven mode, and to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone." This can improve the player's desire to play after getting addicted to the game.

<8. About the game progress form: Figure 6, Figure 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress form related to the gaming machine 1 will be explained, focusing on the game mode transition control and the presentation aspect.

Furthermore, the way a player should play to create an advantageous situation basically changes depending on the internal gaming state (when focusing on the gaming mode, (changes depending on the game mode). As already explained, in the normal state (normal mode), it is considered advantageous to hit the game ball to the left so that it passes through the left downstream path 3b, and in the variable probability state (ST mode) or time saving state ( In the case of time saving mode, ceiling mode, heaven mode), it is considered advantageous to "hit the ball to the right" in which the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right-flowing path 3c. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed hitting (normal state), the game is called "Special Figure 1 Side Symbol Variation Display Game 1". is executed, and if the right-hander is advantageous (variable probability state, time saving state), the description will be made assuming that "symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed. Furthermore, the game mode will be explained as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

If a jackpot is won during the normal mode, it is a so-called "first win" and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (see the "first win" block frame in FIG. 6). The way to hit the jackpot is to hit the right hand, aiming at the jackpot 50 side.

Focusing on the production aspect, if you win the probability-variable jackpot 1 (5R probability-variable ST100: special pattern 1 side highest profit jackpot) during normal mode, the decorative symbols will stop at "7 symbols complete (777)". You will be notified that you have won the jackpot that will bring you the highest profit. In the winning performance when winning the probability-variable jackpot 1, a "ST entry confirmation effect" that definitively notifies entering the ST mode is displayed, and a transition to the ST100 mode is also notified. After the jackpot game, the mode is shifted to ST100 mode.

On the other hand, if you win the variable probability jackpot 2 or 3 or the time saving jackpot 1 or 2 during the normal mode, the decorative symbols will stop at a point other than "7 symbols in a row", and in this symbol variation display game, it will be a probability variable jackpot. You will not be notified whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not. If the game stops at something other than "7 symbols", a player-participation type "ST entry challenge performance" will be performed in the winning performance during the subsequent jackpot game, and the type of jackpot will be announced based on the result of this performance. . In this ST entry challenge performance, when a successful performance appears, it is definitely reported that it is a probability-variable jackpot, and when a failure performance appears, it is definitely notified that it is a time-saving jackpot. In addition, there are two types of success effects: ``Great Success Effect'' and ``Normal Success Effect'', and if the ``Great Success Effect'' appears, it means that you have won the Guaranteed Weird Jackpot 2 (ST75 mode). However, if the "normal success effect" appears, it will be announced that the player has won the probability-variable jackpot 3 (ST25 mode). On the other hand, there are two types of failure performances: "big failure performance" and "normal failure performance", and if the "big failure performance" appears, time saving jackpot 2 (time saving B: time saving 50 times) If the ``normal failure performance'' appears, it will be announced that the user has won the Time Saving Jacket 1 (Time Saving A: 100 Time Savings).

If you win probability-variable jackpots 1 to 3, you will be transferred to the corresponding ST mode after playing that jackpot game (see the ST mode block frame in Figure 6), and if you win time-saving jackpots 1 to 2, you will be transferred to the corresponding ST mode after playing that jackpot game. , the time-saving mode is entered (see the time-saving mode block frame in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and the time saving mode, as described above, it is advantageous for hitting the right hand, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special symbol 2 side is executed. If a jackpot is won on the special drawing 2 side, as shown in Figure 4, all jackpots are variable jackpots, so as long as the jackpot continues to be won during ST mode or time saving mode, ST mode will loop and the player will receive a large profit. It is designed to bring about

If you win any of the probability-variable jackpots 4 to 7 during the ST mode, a decorative pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win "Probability Jackpot 4 (10R Probability ST100)" of the highest profit jackpot (highest profit jackpot among all jackpots) on the special map 2 side, special decorative patterns that are not displayed in normal mode (for example, numbers A symbol (such as a symbol displaying a character instead of a symbol) stops and congratulates the jackpot winner. In addition, if you win "Probable Variable Jacket 5 (7R Probable Variable ST75)", which has a lower profit level than Probable Variable Jacket 4 (10R Probable Variable ST100) but higher profit level than Probable Variable Jackpot 6 (7R Probable Variable ST25), When the "equal pattern pattern" is stopped, and the lowest profit level "probability variable jackpot 6 (7R probability variable ST25)" is won, the "even pattern pattern pattern" is stopped. In addition, during the jackpot game, a winning performance according to the jackpot type is displayed.

(About the case where you win “Kokuhen Jackpot 7 (Special 7R Definitely Hen)”)
However, if you win "Probable Variable Jackpot 7 (Special 7R Probable Variable)", "odd symbols aligned" or "even symbols aligned" will be stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability. If you win that the even numbered symbols will stop, during the subsequent jackpot game, you will receive a winning effect that is at least partially common with the above-mentioned probability-variable jackpot 5 (7R probability-variable ST25) and/or probability-variable jackpot 6 (7R probability-variable ST75). At a predetermined timing of the winning performance, for example, during a specific round performance or ending performance, information regarding the winning of 7 winning jackpots (for example, confirmation of entering ST mode (ST100 mode)) will be announced (promotion). be notified). As a result, even if the "even numbered pattern alignment" stops, there is still a possibility of entering the ST100 mode where high profits can be expected, and with the winning performance, it is possible to stimulate the expectation of entering the ST mode. It has become.

However, in the winning performance, without making the promotion notification mentioned above, a winning performance that is common (same) as the certain strange jackpot 5 (7R certain strange ST25) and/or certain strange jackpot 7 (7R certain strange ST75) appears in the performance. Then, the probability variable jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) winning may be kept secret, and the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) winning may be announced during the ST mode after the jackpot game.

If the above promotion notification is to be performed during ST mode (ST production mode), it is sufficient to do so until the ST early stage mode ends (until the ST number of times is 25). It is preferable to notify during the 25th rotation). Specifically, the number of games during the ST is increased until the first ST number (for example, ST 25 times due to a probability variable jackpot 5 winning) or the second ST number (for example, ST 100 times due to a probability variable jackpot 7), whichever is smaller. (until 25 times), the display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether it is a first win (for example, a probability variable jackpot 5) or a second win (for example, a probability variable jackpot 7). It is. However, the notification timing is not limited to this, and the timing of the promotion notification may be, for example, the start of the next game after the ST early performance mode ends, or a predetermined timing during the ST middle stage mode. Further, "step-up" promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early performance mode and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage performance mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that definitely notifies entering the ST75 mode or higher, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that definitely notifies entering the ST100 mode. In this way, it is possible to maintain the tension of whether the winning type of jackpot is one of probability variable jackpots 5 to 7 over a long period of time from the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, the anticipation of transition to ST100 mode can be maintained. It should be noted that whether to notify the promotion during the winning performance or during the ST mode can be determined by a scenario lottery etc. when determining the winning performance scenario at the start of the jackpot game.

(Transition to ceiling mode)
In addition, in the normal mode, if a jackpot is not won until the 989th game, the game is shifted to the ``omens mode'' from the 990th game (see the block frame of the omens mode in FIG. 7). If the game reaches the 1000th game without winning a jackpot during the omen mode (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In the present embodiment, in the event of a loss, a ceiling benefit of "limited time reduction" is given, and after the 1001st game, the game will be shifted to heaven mode.

<9. Regarding the function of prohibiting specific preview performances during the omen mode: Figure 32>
Here, in this embodiment, a specific preview performance prohibition function (specific preview performance prohibition means) operates during the sign mode. In detail, we will focus on the fact that the omen mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is near, and the fact that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits. mode) prohibits the appearance of specific preview effects. In the case of the present embodiment, the prohibition function is provided with a "pre-read notice prohibition means (specific pre-read notice prohibition means)" which prohibits the execution of pre-read notice. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 32, the ``means for inhibiting pre-reading notice during a sign'' will be described in detail.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a pre-read notice is prohibited by the pre-read pre-notice prohibition means. In FIG. 32, an explanation will be given of a form in which a "pending change notice" is treated as a prohibited object by the look-ahead notice inhibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can be used as a "pre-reading notice."

(A. Configuration in which there is no means for inhibiting advance notice during warning signs (normal case): Figure 32 (a))
The "normal case" will be explained with reference to FIG. 32(a). This "normal case" refers to a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is not provided, and a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during an omen (see figure 1) and 2 is provided, which will be described later. ) is shown as a comparative example. Note that the shown hold icon 770 is a “normal hold display (white hold)”, the hold icon 771 is a “high expectation hold display” of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772 is a “high expectation hold display”. indicates "ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". In addition, the reservation icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow reservation (this reserved reservation display)" that may appear when a jackpot is won among the special reservation displays.

In addition, for convenience of explanation, in Figure (A), when there are currently three activated suspended balls for games 997 to 999, the activated suspended ball for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is used as the fourth activated suspended ball. (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game held ball") is a representative example of a case where this occurs.

In the case of the comparative example shown in Figure (A), since the configuration does not include the "pre-reading notice prohibition means", the presence or absence of the special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the ceiling game is reached depends on the configuration. Regardless, execution of the ceiling suspension display (ceiling suspension change notice) is permitted for the 1000th game suspension display. Here, "allowing" the ceiling hold display means that it may always appear or it may appear only when a person wins a predetermined lottery (described below). ) (The same applies to Ha-1) (Ha-2)). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured hold), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is changed to Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for the ceiling). (on hold display).

However, if a jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling pending display. In addition, if a pending change notice (special pending display) that foretells the winning expectation level and a pending change notice for the ceiling (ceiling pending display) that foretells that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notices have different characteristics. The displays will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a means for inhibiting a pre-read notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Example of a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is provided: Figure 32 (B), (H-1), (H-2))
Hereinafter, an example of a configuration in which the above-mentioned "pre-predicting notice inhibiting means" is provided will be described. There are two forms of this: ``a case in which ordinary advance notice is executed with priority'' as shown in Figure (B), and ``a case in which priority is executed in advance with ceiling advance notice'' shown in Figures (Ha-1) and (Ha-2). be.

(Case where normal look-ahead notice is executed with priority: Figure 32 (b))
Figure 32 (b) shows a case in which the normal pre-read notice is executed with priority, and specifically, a case in which the pre-read notice for the ceiling is prohibited (ceiling game held ball Cases in which advance notice is prohibited for Here, similar to the case shown in FIG.

In this example, if the current hold exists before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) but becomes the "normal hold display". appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "pre-reading prohibited target suspension" by the pre-reading notice prohibition means is made into "ceiling game pending ball".

The reason why the suspension subject to look-ahead prohibition is referred to as the "ceiling game suspension ball" is as follows. If this reserved hold exists before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling benefit is granted), so there is little need to display the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the configuration is such that the ceiling hold display is prohibited when the current secured hold exists, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, there is an inference factor that ``this secured hold is present before the ceiling game is reached.'' There is also a performance advantage in that a player who knows this can prevent unnecessary hits until the ceiling is reached. However, if the reservation retainer exists, the ceiling display is not prohibited at all, but if the reservation change notice (rainbow reservation) related to the reservation retainer is not displayed, in other words, the pre-reading for the reservation retainer is not prohibited. If the preview lottery results in a "lose", a ceiling pending display may be displayed (allowed). If the reservation change notice related to the reserved hold is not displayed, the player will not be able to know that the reserved hold exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. However, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling display when the reservation change notice (rainbow color reservation) related to the reserved reservation is displayed, it is not prohibited to display the reservation change notice for the ceiling (for example, green reservation or higher). It may be configured to prohibit the appearance of the ceiling suspension display when the suspension change notice is displayed.

(Case where pre-read notification for ceiling is executed with priority: Figure 32 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, a "case where ceiling pre-read notice is executed with priority" will be described.

Figure 32 (Har-1) is an example of “a case where ceiling pre-read notification is executed with priority”.
(α) A configuration example in which “while in the precursor mode, some normal look-ahead notices are prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed”;
(β) This shows a configuration example in which “during the precursor mode, normal look-ahead notices are completely prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed.”
The configuration example shown in this figure (H-1) does not set the target for which look-ahead is prohibited as the "ceiling game suspended ball" as shown in the above figure (B), but instead sets the target for which look-ahead is prohibited to be suspended during the precursor game. This is an example of a configuration in which the ceiling game pending balls are excluded from the prohibited targets.

In (α) above, "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, among the normal pending change notices (special pending display), while allowing the appearance of low expectation pending change notices, The configuration is such that the appearance of a notice of pending change in the level of expectation is prohibited. Specifically, the following configurations 1 and 2 are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of reservation change notices below yellow reservation (blue reservation and yellow reservation) is allowed, and reservation change notices of green or higher that have higher winning expectations than the yellow reservation (green reservation, red reservation, and rainbow color) are allowed. A configuration that prohibits the appearance of (reserved).
(Configuration 2) A configuration that allows the appearance of a pending change notice (a pending display other than rainbow-colored pending) that indicates something other than correct, but prohibits the appearance of a pending change notice that indicates a correct.

The above-mentioned "Configuration 1" prohibits only high expectation reservation change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of the reservation reservation. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Configuration 2" prohibits only the "Rainbow color reservation" of the reservation reservation display among the high expectation reservation change notices. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, the occurrence of reservation change notices other than "rainbow reservation" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Completely prohibiting advance notices" in (β) above means that normal advance notices (here, pending change notices) are completely prohibited, and the appearance of ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) is prohibited. The configuration is that it is allowed. Therefore, in the case of the configuration (β) above, no normal pre-read notice is displayed during the precursor mode, and only the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed to appear.

The reason for doing as shown in Figure (C-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially the This may cause confusion for players (beginners to the game). In particular, if the high expectation level pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the player's degree of confusion increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead notice itself or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change notice. In addition, if some or all of the advance notices are prohibited during the precursor mode, the player may not be aware of the existence or likely existence of the current reservation before reaching the ceiling game. This is because even if a high expectation pending change notice indicating that the player has not reached the ceiling is not displayed, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player if he wins the jackpot before reaching the ceiling game. Furthermore, if the advance preview itself is completely prohibited during the precursor mode, it will also lead to a reduction in the production control burden.

Figure (H-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above-mentioned Figure (H-1), a part of the period in the precursor mode is defined as a look-ahead prohibited section, thereby preferentially executing the pending change notice for the ceiling. As a representative example, Figure (H-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved pitches before the ceiling game (section of the 996th to 999th game) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, advance notice is completely prohibited in the 996th to 999th game section. However, instead of prohibiting all advance notices in this section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of advance notices" as shown in (α) in the above figure (c-1).

In addition, in each of (a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2) in Figure 32, the number of ceiling games is The number of games remaining until the end of the game can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the degree of expectation of winning, but merely informs of remaining ceiling games, and does not perform a notice function like a pre-read notice. However, it is also possible to foretell the degree of expectation of winning using a countdown display, that is, to notify the possibility of the existence of the reserved spot. For example, in the case of preferentially executing the pre-read notice for the ceiling as shown in Figures (Ha-1) or (Ha-2), the suspended balls (1 to 2) that occurred chronologically earlier than the current secured bullet (3rd bullet) A special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that differs from the normal countdown display (the display format when the corresponding reservation does not exist) is performed each time the number (item) is consumed, and the result is confirmed. It may also indicate the existence of a reservation. For example, if a normal countdown display uses white number images, a special countdown display may change the number image to a color other than white (red) or make the number image larger. be.

This embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding the pre-read notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires predetermined game information based on the establishment of a starting condition (triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winnings based on the gaming information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol fluctuation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to a symbol stop display mode;
Reservation storage means (retention storage area of RAM 203) that stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means on hold up to a predetermined maximum number of storage items until the game information is displayed in a variable display operation of the game symbols on the symbol display means. , S311 to S314 in FIG. 10),
A look-ahead determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) that looks ahead and determines at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the variable display operation of the game symbols based on the suspended memory is executed;
A look-ahead notice performance control means (performance control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice that notifies information related to the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means;
a pre-read notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) that prohibits execution (display) of the above-mentioned pre-read notice based on predetermined prohibition conditions;
Ceiling benefit control means (S420, S421, S412 in FIG. 7, FIG. 12, S421, S412 in FIG. 7, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) that grants a ceiling benefit that is more advantageous than in the normal state (controls the execution of the ceiling benefit) based on predetermined grant conditions. and,
The above-mentioned ceiling benefit is granted (for example, the ceiling game is close, or the ceiling benefit is granted within the existing number of active pending balls, or the symbol fluctuation display game related to the target active pending balls is a ceiling privilege advance notice control means for controlling the execution of a ceiling pre-announcement effect (for example, the ceiling suspension change notice (ceiling suspension display) in FIG. 32) that notifies in advance that a ceiling privilege will be granted when executed; , and can be configured to be able to control multiple types of gaming states (gaming modes). The above-mentioned pre-read notice prohibition means prohibits execution of the above-mentioned pre-read notice during all or part of the period in a specific game mode (FIGS. 32(b), (c-1), and (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to ceiling mode), and specifically corresponds to a precursor mode immediately before reaching the ceiling game (game mode immediately before shifting to ceiling mode). In addition, specifically, the above-mentioned ceiling benefit control means starts the winning game after a predetermined starting condition is satisfied (for example, after the electric support ends, after the jackpot game, or after transitioning to a gaming state with a low probability state, etc.). Normally, when the number of symbol changes (number of games) executed in a play state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (ceiling number of games) without occurring (or without winning the jackpot) It functions as a functional unit that controls ceiling benefits (privilege game state) that are more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, data values that are different from the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) and the gaming state determination number YJ corresponding to other gaming states may be determined. What is necessary is to provide a "potential mode" as a game mode corresponding to the potential state, and a "potential performance mode" as a performance mode related to the potential mode. Moreover, although all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as gaming modes corresponding to a "probable state", all or part of the ST mode can be treated as a gaming mode corresponding to a "potential state". The fluctuating state under the potential mode (potential state) is explained in "When infinite potential or finite potential is granted" in "(7-5-1. Fluctuation states related to heaven mode)" above. Similarly, it is preferable to set the fluctuation state to be the same or approximately the same as the normal mode, or at least slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figures 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18, gaming operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists of an infinite loop main processing (main processing on the main control side: Fig. 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (timer interrupt processing on the main control side: Fig. 8). 9).

<12. Main control side main processing: Figure 8>
With reference to FIG. 8, main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main processing on the main control side) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of the main control side main processing.

The trigger for starting main processing on the main control side is when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power outage or power abnormality, or when the control program goes out of control, and the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated and the CPU may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing necessary for starting the gaming operation as part of the power-on processing (step S011). ).

When the initial setting process in step S011 is completed, it is then determined whether the state is a transition state to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (the door open sensor 61 is ON (open detection)), the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON. If the gaming machine 1 is powered on while the operation is continued (both the setting key switch signal and RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change permissible state where the setting value can be changed is assumed as the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are met. (setting change mode transition state).

If the setting change mode is in the transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of setting values (1 to 6 levels) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, check whether the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). Determine whether or not. If the gaming operation is normal, the set value storage area stores any set value data (set value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to settings 1 to 6. However, the setting value data may be damaged due to some kind of malfunction, and a value that does not correspond to any of settings 1 to 6 may be set (setting abnormal error). Therefore, if the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value 00H (here, setting 1).

When the initial value is returned or when the value is normal, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97. Thereafter, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. Regarding the setting value during setting change (setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting value changes in the range of settings 1 to 6 in a cyclical manner, and the setting change is displayed on the setting display 97. The current settings are displayed. If the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the setting value has been finalized, and the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to intra-area RAM clearing processing (step S031), which will be described later.

Note that the configuration may be such that the RAM clear switch 98 functions as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any one of settings 1 to 6 can be selected. Alternatively, the setting key switch 94 may be configured to function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it is checked whether the setting value data (setting value Nc) in the setting value storage area is a normal value, and whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a power re-on standby process (step S020) related to a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, if it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is normally executed in the power abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) to be described later. is set to Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where some kind of problem occurs and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠5AH). Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), a power restart wait process is executed (step S020).

In the power restart waiting process of step S020, the game is controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending a power restart command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clearing process that clears the WDT until a power outage occurs and checking the ON state of the power abnormality signal (confirming the power outage) The process (power supply abnormality check process) is repeated. Note that when a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power outage is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. In addition, when the production control unit 24 receives a power-on command, a RAM error notification (power-on command production) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 saying "RAM error. Please turn on the power again and set the setting value to 1. ” is displayed, all the LEDs for presentation such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

If the power restart waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, turn the power on to the gaming machine 1 again and operate it so that it is set to the setting change mode transition state when the power is turned on again. Unless the change process (step S023) is executed, the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be resolved. In this embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting abnormal error), the internal RAM clearing process of step S031, which will be described later, is executed. This clears virtually the entire area of the RAM 203 (excluding the RAM area related to performance display (RAM area outside the area)), which returns the RAM 203 to its initial state and eliminates the RAM error. ing.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear mode transition state is entered (step S025). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is operated OFF (do not operate to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is operated ON (setting key switch signal OFF). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, it is assumed that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the RAM clear mode transition state.

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to performance display out of the storage area of the RAM 203 and the storage area in the in-area RAM area excluding the setting value storage area are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF, the checksum value, etc. that were set when the power was cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Also, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, a "waiting for customer command", etc.) are transmitted to the production control section 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes an initialization notification performance to notify RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. That is, when the area RAM clearing process is executed, the game mode is set to the initial mode, normal mode, and the production mode is also set to a normal production mode related to the normal mode (for example, normal (normal A production mode), simple (normal B effect mode) or premium mode (usually C effect mode)).

After completing the intra-area RAM clearing process in step S031, an initial setting process when clearing the RAM (initial data setting process at power-on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process when the power is turned on, for example, a timer for transmitting a RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) is set to 30,000 ms, and the special symbols (special symbol 1 stop symbol, special symbol 1 stop symbol, Loss pattern data is set as the special figure 2 stop pattern) data. Then, a CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether the current setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation allowed state). (Step S026). In the case of this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the device 1 is turned on, it is assumed that the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied, and the device is controlled to transition to the setting confirmation mode (see steps S014 to S026).

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), a setting confirmation process (step S027) is executed to control the current setting value to a setting confirmation state where the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, a backup restoration process (step S028) is executed to restore the gaming process from the backup data backed up at the time of power outage. In the setting confirmation process in step S027, display processing is performed to display the current setting values on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display). The display of the set values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process described above is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and based on the backup data, the game at the time of backup is Resume processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned settings change processing (step S023), area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC settings The process is executed (step S036). Here, CTC setting processing is executed to periodically generate a timer interrupt every 4 ms. As a result, from now on, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game is ready to start, the firing control signal (firing permission signal ES) that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state), and the game starts. A start command is sent to the production control section 24 (step S037). This allows the firing operation of the game ball from the firing device 32. Further, when the production control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initialization operation regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check regarding the movable accessory when the power is turned on.

Note that after executing the backup restoration process in step S028, before executing the CTC setting process in step S036 (in the case of the second embodiment described later, before step S061), the performance indicator 99 is not displayed normally. It may be configured to be able to execute an "operation confirmation setting process" necessary to execute a confirmation operation to determine whether or not the device is operating. In this confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d is changed to "all flashing" which periodically repeats all lights on and all lights off for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). display (operation confirmation display)” mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, display processing related to operation confirmation is performed in performance display monitor processing (step S102: out-of-area program) during main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, so the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process. ) or during the setting confirmation process (step S027), the performance display 99 does not display the base value at this stage. Taking advantage of this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 is configured to be usable as the setting display 97, and the performance display 99 is temporarily used as the setting display 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, the setting display 97 can be replaced by the performance display 99, which can contribute to reducing control burden and cost.

When the above-mentioned series of power-on processing is completed, an infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled to be in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, the CPU is set to an interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this various random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical value range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special symbol determination used in symbol drawings, random numbers for auxiliary winning lottery (random numbers for auxiliary winning determination used in auxiliary winning lottery, normal symbol determining random numbers used for auxiliary winning symbol lottery) random numbers) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special symbol determination, initial value random number for assistance hit determination, etc.), random number for fluctuating pattern used to select fluctuating pattern, etc. Update.

After completing the above various random number updating processes (step S041), next, performance display monitor total division processing for out-of-area programs is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor total division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor total division process in step S043 is finished, interrupts are enabled (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeated (main loop process). . The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes and performance display monitor total division processes, except while performing timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power level supplied from the power board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power outage occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF←5AH), the checksum value is Backup processing is performed, including checksum calculation (in this case, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the internal RAM) and storage of the calculation results. The power abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is shut off.

Next, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (times) used to control the gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, input management processing is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, a winning counter for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on input information (detection information) from various sensors and switches installed in the gaming machine 1. (input data creation process). In addition, input data is also created here based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in accordance with the abnormality in the error management process (step S089), which will be described later. In addition, here, it is also monitored whether the input information related to a specific winning opening is fraudulent (unauthorized winning monitoring process). For example, if a winning is detected in the big winning opening 50 even though the jackpot game is not in progress, or if a winning in the lower starting opening 35 is detected even though the supplementary winning game is not in progress, the winning It is assumed that this is an unauthorized winning, and predetermined error processing is performed (winning invalidation processing).

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the setting value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data and a setting error is detected. Set the flag to ON state (5AH). Then, a setting value abnormality command is sent to the production control section 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, it uses the effect means to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). Note that, when this setting abnormality check process is executed again, if the setting error flag is in the ON state, the process exits without doing anything.

Next, timer interrupt random number management processing is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, random numbers related to each variable display game are updated regularly. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for assistance hit determination is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and the random number counter is updated in one round. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Note that the random number for internal lottery (random number for jackpot determination) is generated by the random number generation circuit, so it is not updated here.

Next, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on detection information related to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming operation, and whether or not an error has occurred is monitored. If so, an error command that can specify the error type is sent to the production control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. Further, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is sent to the effect control section 24 to execute error cancellation processing.

Next, prize ball management processing is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the entered prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute a payout operation for the specified number of prize balls.

Next, normal symbol management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for determining a support hit) necessary for the support win lottery is sent. The game information is stored as pending data (normal pattern action holding balls) up to the maximum number of pending memories (here, 4 pieces) (normal pattern holding memory processing). Then, when the predetermined starting conditions are met, a supplementary winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol operation holding ball, and based on the supplementary winning lottery result, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected and the normal symbol stop display mode (normal stopping symbol). Determine. Also, here, in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, if the symbol is in motion, create LED display data for the variable display, and if it is not in motion, create LED display data for the stop display (normally symbol display data update processing).

Next, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electricity release game is executed based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned auxiliary winning lottery. Specifically, solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is generated and set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, and the operation pattern of the movable blade 47 is controlled. be done.

Next, special symbol management processing is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing necessary for the special symbol variation display game is executed. This special symbol management process mainly includes reservation memory regarding special symbol activation reserved balls, pre-reading judgment, determining a pre-reading fluctuation pattern based on the pre-reading judgment result, jackpot lottery, determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation based on the jackpot lottery, special It performs processing related to determining stopping symbols, controlling the variable display operation of special symbols, setting transitions to gaming states, etc. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, special electric accessory management processing is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, processes necessary for winning games (big winning games, small winning games) are executed. The special electric accessory management process mainly performs processing related to execution control of the winning game based on the jackpot lottery result, setting of the destination gaming state after the jackpot game, etc. Note that details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

Next, right-handed hit notification information management processing is executed (step S097). In this right-handed hitting notification information management process, in order to light up the right-handed hitting display device 39b when the game state is "advantageous to right-handed hitting" (during a winning game, in a state with electric support (time saving state or variable probability state)). LED data is created for turning off the right-handed display device 39b when the game is in a gaming state (normal state) in which left-handed players are advantageous.

Next, LED management processing is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. Control signals based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right hit notification information management process (step S097), etc. are output in this LED management process. be done.

Next, external terminal management processing is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various external terminal signals are created and output control is executed to the external device through the frame external terminal board 21.

Next, solenoid management processing is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094), the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the grand prize opening solenoid 52c are The excitation signal output control is executed for the excitation signal. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the opening door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening/closing operation of the lower starting opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 is realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor process, necessary processes related to calculation of a base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control are executed. In addition, type test signals are created and output processed here.

Next, the count value of WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt, and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the above steps S081 to S104 are completed, the timer interrupt process is ended, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special symbol management processing: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special map 1 starting port check process" regarding the special map 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) (step S301), and then on the special chart 2 side (lower starting port 35 side). "Special figure 2 starting opening check process" related to this is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening checking process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the starting opening check process in steps S301 and S302, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). This "small win medium flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a small win game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that a small win game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small winning game is not in progress. In addition, although a small hit is not provided in this embodiment, below, description will be made assuming that "small win" is included in the winning type.

If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303:≠5AH), then the state of the conditional device activation flag is determined (step S304). This "conditional device activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and the flag is When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

If a small winning game is in progress (step S303: = 5AH) or a jackpot game is in progress (step S304: = 5AH), the processing related to the special symbol fluctuation display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and the process continues to step S309. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process. Therefore, during either a small win game or a jackpot game, the special symbol variable display operation is not performed. In other words, during the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is maintained as determined and displayed as the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the conditional device activation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304:≠5AH), that is, if the small winning game is not in progress or the jackpot game is not in progress (step S303:≠5AH, and step S304: ≠5AH), and performs processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is: "Waiting (00H, 01H)," "Fluctuating (02H)," or "Checking (03H)." Then, any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) is performed, and when it is "fluctuation (02H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and "changing" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in the process of variation (fluctuating display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has finished changing and is stopped (confirmed) and being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). Through these processes, a special symbol variable display operation (a display operation that sets one set of a variation start and a variation stop) will be realized. The details of the special symbol fluctuation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later in FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B, respectively.

After completing any of the processes in steps S306 to S308, special symbol display data update process in step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (7-segment blinking display data that is fluctuating) is determined. ) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for a stop display (data for a 7-segment blinking display during a stop display) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) in FIG. 9, and variable display and static display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. . When the special symbol display data update process is finished, the special symbol management process is exited and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 starting gate check process: Figure 11>
Referring to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 starting gate check process.

This special figure 1 starting hole check process plays a role as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to reservation storage when a game ball enters the upper starting hole 34. It is mainly composed of processing related to read-ahead determination. In addition, the difference between the special figure 1 starting gate check process and the special figure 2 starting gate check process is whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. Substantially, the processing content is the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the explanation will focus on the special figure 1 start opening check process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether a winning ball (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When a winning of the upper starting opening 34 (special figure 1 side starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4 balls). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting opening check process is exited without doing anything.

If the number of special drawing 1 activated reserved balls is 4 or more, that is, if an over winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over winning command that specifies an over winning (in the case of special drawing 1 B006H, B106H in the case of special figure 2) is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation (step S313), and step S314 Proceed to processing.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special symbol 1 action pending ball that has occurred this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, and random numbers for fluctuation patterns are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random values are stored in the reserved storage area of the internal RAM. This reservation storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol fluctuation display game as an operation reservation ball (reservation data), and this reservation storage area stores the above various random numbers as reservation data for special symbols. Until the first variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are held and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are met (in the winning order). In addition, the above-mentioned reservation storage area includes a reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the special symbol 1 reservation storage area (first reservation storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and the special symbol A special figure 2 reservation storage area (second reservation storage area) corresponding to 2 is provided, and each can store reservation data for the maximum number of activated reservation balls.

Next, prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits prefetch determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the above-mentioned "pending addition command" (step S315), Subsequently, it is determined whether the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits pre-reading judgment (prohibits pre-reading notice) targeting the special drawing 1 activation pending ball side (special drawing 1 pre-reading prohibition condition) when the special drawing 1 start opening check process is in progress. ), and when the special figure 2 starting hole check process is in progress (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the pre-reading judgment (prohibiting the pre-reading notice) targeting the special figure 2 activation pending ball side (special figure 2 pre-reading prohibition condition) ). In this embodiment, if it is a "gaming state with an electric support state (time-saving state or variable probability state)" in which a special figure 2 actuation reserved ball can occur with a higher probability than a special figure 1 actuated held ball, 'special figure 1 Pre-reading is prohibited', and conversely, it is a ``gaming state with no electric support state (normal state or potential state)'' in which a special figure 1 activated pending ball can occur with a higher probability than a special figure 2 activated suspended ball. It says 'Special map 2 pre-reading is prohibited'. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, if the current gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied. Further, as a pre-reading prohibition condition, pre-reading can be prohibited when a specific game mode is in progress (for example, in a portent mode).

Here, in this embodiment, since the current gaming mode can be specified by the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see the Tcode column in FIG. 28), when determining the gaming mode, the variation pattern selection mode ( However, apart from the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), an identifier (for example, gaming mode determination number YM) that can identify each gaming mode itself is provided, and this allows the current The game mode may also be determined. For example, if "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, they have the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), but are treated as different game modes. This is a case that you want to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current gaming state (internal gaming state or gaming mode) (when performing gaming processing that requires information regarding the gaming state), the current internal gaming state, the current fluctuation pattern Game operations are performed using one or more identifiers that can identify the selected mode or the current gaming mode (gaming state determination number YJ, fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, aforementioned gaming mode determination number YM, etc.). It is sufficient if the configuration is capable of processing. The present embodiment will be described on the assumption that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to the pre-reading determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped and the process proceeds to step S322, which will be described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the current special figure 1 activated hold ball will not be executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (see step S322 below). ). As a result, the execution of the pre-read notice for the current operation pending ball is prohibited (the pre-read notice for the current operation pending ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317:=5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting abnormality error) has occurred, the process related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the processing in step S322 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the pre-reading judgment for the current operation pending ball is not executed, and a pending addition command having the pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the pre-reading notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data specifying that the processing related to prefetching determination (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317:≠5AH), after transmitting the "setting value command", random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'winning/losing lottery at the start of fluctuation' (described later) is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. ``Step S410 in FIG. 12)'' is performed in advance.

(Set value command)
The above-mentioned "setting value command" includes information that can identify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of a preview effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the setting value. be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation pending ball occurs in the starting port check process. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can control the appearance of a preview performance related to the operation pending ball (for example, a setting suggestion performance related to a pre-read preview performance) based on correct setting value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is acquired, and a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table, a winning/losing lottery (pre-read winning/losing determination) targeting the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning/losing result) is obtained.

The above-mentioned hit random number determination table includes the hit random number determination table (special figure 1 A winning random number determination table, a winning random number determination table for special drawing 2) are provided. During the special figure 1 starting opening check process, the ``special figure 1 hit random number determination table'' is referred to, and during the special figure 2 starting opening check process, the ``special figure 2 hit random number determination table'' is referred to. This winning random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the later-described "random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory object (step S410 in FIG. 12)".

These hit random number determination tables include determination areas (judgment values) for determining the type of win or loss (big hit, small hit, or loss) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability or low probability); A random number value for determining a jackpot (size of random number for determining a jackpot: 65536) is determined in association with the random number value. Specifically, the type of win or loss is determined depending on which determination value the random value for determining a jackpot belongs to.

In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned hit random number determination table is provided with a table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table with at least a different jackpot lottery probability depending on settings 1 to 6). There is. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at low probability (probability increase rate: high probability / low probability) is the same for each setting value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that cannot be exceeded. For example, setting 6 "1/189 when low probability, 1/63 when high probability", setting 5 "1/198 when low probability, 1/66 when high probability", setting 2 "1/66 when low probability", etc. 231, high probability 1/77'' and setting 1 ``low probability 1/240, high probability 1/80'' to win the jackpot. Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, a special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'pre-read judgment' process, and here, the 'symbol at the start of fluctuation' process is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. ``Lottery (Step S411 in FIG. 12, which will be described later)'' is determined in advance by ``pre-read symbol determination''.

In the above-mentioned special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table (not shown)" is created according to the pre-read win/loss result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) to be processed this time. )”. Then, the random value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery (pre-reading) for the current operation pending ball is The lottery result (pre-read symbol result) is obtained.

The above-mentioned "symbol table" includes a "jackpot pattern table", "small win pattern table", and "loss pattern table" for determining the jackpot type, small win type, and loss type, and each pattern table has a special symbol. They are provided depending on the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of variation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

In the symbol table, a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and a random value for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random value for special symbol determination: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type can be determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number value belongs to. When the symbol table is referred to, "special symbol determination data" and "special stop symbol number", which will be described later, are acquired as data indicating the lottery result.

In this embodiment, one of the jackpots is determined according to the symbol lottery rate shown in FIG. Also, although not shown, there are multiple types of losses on the special drawing 1 side, ``Loss A'' and ``Loss B'', and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for Loss A, 95% for Loss A, and 95% for Loss B is 5%. Note that when loss B is selected, a reach other than the N reach (for example, a reach equal to or higher than the SP reach) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). Moreover, the type of loss on the special drawing 2 side is one type of “loss A”. Note that the type of loss is not particularly limited, and one or more types can be provided. Further, the symbol lottery probability can also be determined as appropriate.

The above-mentioned "special symbol judgment data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: jackpot type, small hit type, and loss type (including the time-saving award type described later if provided)). Specifically, it is data for identifying which of the winning types (probable variable jackpots 1 to 7, time-saving jackpots 1 to 2) and the loss types (not shown) (loss A, loss B) won. This special symbol determination data is used for processes that require winning type information (for example, the game state transition preparation process in step S412 in FIG. (Special electric accessory management process in Figure 17) etc. Also, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data that specifies the special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used in the main control It is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the part 20 side.As with the special symbol, the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number are provided for the regular symbol as well.

Note that a symbol table common to all settings may be determined, but a symbol table may be determined depending on the setting. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or more winning types differs in some or all of the set values. For example, the symbol lottery rate for probability variable jackpot 1 can be determined such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability becomes relatively.
(B) For all or part of each setting value, the variable probability entry rate (total symbol lottery rate of at least a jackpot with a high probability state (probable variable jackpot and/or potential probability jackpot)) is different. For example, the probability variable entry rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (refer to the symbol lottery probability of probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 in Figure 4), but for example, if the probability variable entry rate of settings 1 to 6 is ``40%, 42 %, 44%, 46%, 48%, 50%," and so on, so that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability is (easier to enter the probability variation). The same applies to the time-saving entry rate (total symbol selection rate of time-saving jackpot).
In any case, it is sufficient to set the ball payout performance (machine rate) to be more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher.

When the above-described special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 is finished, a random number determination process at the time of starting opening winning is executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of winning the starting opening is also performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation' when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is determined. Perform a 'look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination' that is determined in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, the results of the pre-read symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery results obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the fluctuation pattern data obtained in step S314 are used. A random number (size of random number: 10,000) is used to pre-read and determine the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" regarding the current operation pending ball. Note that pre-reading pattern determination is to determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, so a "pre-reading determination table" is separately provided that has the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Do this by referring to However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, the fluctuation pattern distribution tables shown in FIGS. At both the time and the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern allocation table is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is pre-read and determined based on the random number value for the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314.

The look-ahead determination regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation will be explained using the "hit fluctuation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 24. In Figure 24, the notation ``Kaku'' means a definite variable jackpot, the notation ``toki'' means a time-saving jackpot, and the notation ``Kaku 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7'' means a definite variable jackpot 1 to 7, “Toki 1, 2” means time saving jackpot 1, 2. Referring to FIG. 24, for example, the current look-ahead symbol result is "probability variable jackpot 1 (probability 1)", the current gaming state (variation pattern selection mode Tcode is "general mode (00H)", variation pattern If the random number belongs to the judgment value (judgment area 0 to 49) for "Normal variation direct hit", EVENT1 "21H" shown in the figure is obtained (see the EVENT1 column of "Normal variation direct hit") ).The Arabic numerals shown in the figure indicate the judgment value (size of the judgment area) (the same applies to Figs. 25 to 27). If "Hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000) and belongs to the judgment value 50-129, "Normal Medium N Reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000) and if it belongs to the judgment value 130-209. "Normal Medium SP Reach A" will be selected (selection rate: 80/10000), and if it belongs to the judgment value 9850-9999, "Special Reach" will be selected (selection rate: 150/10000). It has become.

The above "EVENT1" is data (winning command data 1) used to create the pending addition command, and is the data of the second byte (lower byte) of the pending addition command. As a result, the prefetching prohibition data "9FH" acquired in step S315 is updated in this process to a data value that specifies the content of the prefetching variation pattern, and the prefetching variation pattern is specified. Note that the data of the first byte (upper byte) of the hold addition command (data regarding the number of active hold balls) is acquired in step S322, which will be described later.

Note that in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the number of pending pitches at the time of the look-ahead determination is not taken into account. The reason is as follows. At the stage of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into account the number of pending pitches (for example, see the columns of the number of pending pitches in FIGS. 26 and 27). However, at the time of look-ahead determination, since the number of balls on hold at the time of look-ahead determination does not necessarily match the number of balls on hold at the start of fluctuation, it is not possible to determine an accurate fluctuation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the fluctuation pattern type (basic pattern) that is the gist of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is determined without considering the number of pending pitches at the time of the look-ahead determination. For example, if you refer to the normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal medium N reach A columns of the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. Different data (see COM2 (variation pattern specification command data) column) is acquired to identify whether it is a fluctuation or normal N reach A, but when making a look-ahead judgment, it does not depend on the number of pending pitches. , data (EVEN1 "01H") that is common to normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal medium N reach A is acquired.

After finishing the random number determination process at the time of starting opening winning in step S320, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the high-order byte side is then obtained based on the current number of active pending balls and the special symbol type. Here, "B6H to B9H" are obtained according to 1 to 4 reserved balls operated by special figure 1, and "BBH to BEH" are obtained according to 1 to 4 reserved balls operated by special figure 2.

Then, the acquired winning command data 2 (MODE: number of active pending balls (the existing number of active pending balls including the active pending ball that occurred this time) and special symbol type information) and the above entered award command data 1 (EVENT) on the lower byte side : Prefetching variation pattern information), the production control unit creates a "pending addition command" (step S322), and without storing it in the RAM 203 (since data regarding the pending addition command is unnecessary from now on). 24 (step S323). In addition, in this embodiment, the structure is such that the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information and the number of active pending balls (number of active pending balls and special symbol type information) at the time of look-ahead determination are transmitted in one command (hold addition command). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-read fluctuation pattern information, the number of pending balls and the special symbol type information may be transmitted in separate commands. Specifically, it is configured to transmit a first command (command at the time of winning) that can specify the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information, and a second command (pending addition command) that can specify the number of active pending balls and special symbol type information. Good too. In this case, the effect control unit 24 may be configured to be able to execute effect processing related to a pre-read notice (such as a pre-read notice lottery to be described later) when receiving the first command and the second command.

In addition, if pre-reading is prohibited or if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading prohibited data "9FH" will be maintained as is, so a pending addition command with "pre-reading prohibited data" will be sent to the production control unit 24. (Refer to the processing route of steps S315→S322 or S316→S322).

When the above-mentioned pending addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 that received the command determines whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed if the information included in the pending addition command is “other than designation of prohibition of pre-reading”. A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is held, and if the lottery is won, a presentation scenario of the pre-reading notice is created, and based on the scenario, the appearance of the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation pending ball is controlled. On the other hand, if "pre-reading prohibition designation" is specified, the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed but the lottery result is forcibly treated as a loss, and the generation of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, a pending addition command with pre-reading prohibited is sent either when pre-reading is prohibited or when an abnormal setting error occurs.The reason is as follows. .

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the gaming operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason for this is that, as explained above, setting abnormal errors can be resolved by changing settings, but changing settings during business hours is a matter of incitement to gambling from the perspective of legal requirements. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Second, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when an abnormal setting error occurs, the player will become distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, if a symbol fluctuation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or if a jackpot game is in progress, an abnormal setting error may occur and the game will be immediately disabled. If this happens, the profits that the player should have originally gained will be lost, leading to a sense of distrust among the players. Taking these circumstances into consideration, when an abnormal setting error occurs, the error is only notified and the game itself is allowed to proceed, although there are conditions. The reason why I say "conditionally" is because if an abnormal setting error occurs, advance notice will be prohibited and the result of the symbol fluctuation display game will be forced to be a loss (see Figure 11). Step S317 (=5AH), see the processing route of Step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and subsequently, the special figure 2 starting opening checking process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol fluctuation start processing: Figure 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of active pending pitches in FIG. 2 is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero (step S402), and the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) targeting the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is executed. Through the processing of steps S401 and S402, the "priority" of which of the special figure 1 action reserved ball and the special figure 2 action reserved ball should be preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which action reserved ball to be used) is determined. "Fluctuation rank" is determined. In this embodiment, when there are operation reservation balls in both the special figure 1 operation reservation sphere and the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere, the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere is preferentially extinguished.

In addition, when the number of active pending balls for both the special figure 2 active pending ball number and the special figure 1 active pending ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state is "no active pending balls". becomes. This state of "no action pending ball" is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. If the state becomes "no ball pending operation", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no ball pending operation" ( Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)" when the state of "no action pending ball" is reached (step S417: NO) (processing during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 16A described later) (see step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (step S418). Then, as a performance control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 (step S419), and the process exits from the special symbol variation start process.

When the performance control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, based on predetermined execution conditions, a "customer waiting performance (demonstration display)" is performed in which a demo movie is played to explain and introduce (demonstrate) the game related to the gaming machine 1. )” appears. Specifically, after receiving the waiting customer command, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without the game being started, that is, without any pending ball being activated (without receiving the pending addition command). If the time has elapsed, a customer waiting effect will appear. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) before the start of the customer waiting performance has elapsed, the display state of the decoration stop symbol that stopped after the end of the current symbol variation display game will continue to be displayed, and the decorative lamp 45 will emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, a "demonstration start waiting effect" is displayed in which the speaker 43 is muted (or may be performing a predetermined sound effect), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts.

Further, after the start of the customer waiting performance (demonstration display), the performance control unit 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied. In the case of this embodiment, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) without any pending balls occurring and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , the presentation mode is shifted to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the words "Power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and some or all of the decorative lamps 45 and other presentation LEDs are displayed. Control all lights to be turned off (power saving control).

If the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls or the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. In addition, regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 explained below, the only difference is whether the target is the special figure 1 action reserved ball or the special figure 2 action reserved ball, and the contents are not substantial. is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless there is a particular need, the explanation will be made without distinguishing which operation-holding ball the processing is intended for.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of pending balls on the special figure side to be used for the current variable display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including the information on the number of pending balls after the subtraction is sent to the production control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that specifies the special symbol type of the current variation start side, and if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, it is "00H", and if special symbol 2 is the variation start side, it is "00H". For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (pending 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 is read out, and is stored in the random number storage area for judgment in the internal RAM. , the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are respectively stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free space (step S407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol fluctuation display game matches the order of the number of active pending balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the active pending balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening are in any pending memory. It is specified whether the ball corresponds to the area, and it is possible to store a new operation-reserved ball.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, a "gaming state designation command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes gaming state information that can specify the gaming state at the start of the game. When the production control unit 24 receives the gaming state designation command, it grasps the gaming state based on the information included therein, and manages the production mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. The gaming state information included in the gaming state designation command may be any minimum necessary information when performing the intended gaming process, such as "internal gaming state (gaming state determination number YJ)" and/or "fluctuation pattern". The information may include the "allocation designation number Tcode". In addition, as a gaming state specifying command, it is possible to transmit an "internal gaming information command" that can specify the gaming state determination number YJ and/or a "distribution mode specifying command" that can specify the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). can do.

In addition, here, as necessary, a "time saving number command" including information regarding the special symbol time saving number counter (time saving number information) and an "ST number command" including information regarding the special symbol probability changing number counter (ST number information) are provided. Sent. The production control unit 24 grasps the remaining time reduction number or remaining ST number based on the information included in these commands, and performs a "remaining number display effect (for example, countdown display)" can be controlled. Specifically, as the remaining number of times display effect, if the time saving mode is in effect, a ``remaining time saving number of times display effect'' is displayed, and if in the ST mode, a ``remaining ST number of times display effect'' is displayed. Note that the time saving number command and ST number command sent in this process are counter values that have not been subtracted for the current game. During the processing during the symbol confirmation time (performed in S479, S484), the performance control unit 24 appropriately decrement the grasped counter value and display the remaining number of times display performance (as described below). The same applies to the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time reduction number command is sent when the special symbol time reduction number counter is other than zero (the time reduction number counter ≠ 0), and similarly, the ST number command is sent when the special symbol probability change number counter is other than zero. It is transmitted when (the probability variation count counter value≠0). Of course, even if the counter value is zero, it may be configured to transmit a time saving number command or ST number command that includes information that the counter value is zero.

In addition, depending on the gaming state, it can be determined whether to send only the time saving number command, only the ST number command, or both commands. However, if infinite ceiling benefits are granted, specifically, "infinite time saving" where there is no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite definite change" or "infinite potential" where there is no limit on the number of STs, or When infinite time saving, infinite probability change, or infinite potential is granted, where an unlimited number of times (such as 65,536 times) is set and the number of time reductions or ST times can be regarded as "infinite number of times" (time reduction due to the time reduction given below) (including when the state (privilege) is an infinite number of times), and in the gaming state related to the benefit (heaven mode in this embodiment), the time saving number command and ST number command are not transmitted in order to reduce the control burden. You can also use it as Also, in the case where the time saving state or the variable probability state given by winning a jackpot continues until the next jackpot, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted.

Further, the above-mentioned "remaining number of times display performance" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes, such as the time saving mode, the ST mode, and the heaven mode. Note that it is preferable that the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite system is a form of effect that notifies that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, if it is an image display performance, it may be "infinite times remaining" or "continue until the next jackpot".

(About the remaining ceiling number display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling number command" including information on the number of remaining ceiling games (information regarding a ceiling counter to be described later) is also transmitted. The performance control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls display of the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display performance". In the case of this embodiment, this remaining ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear in "general mode" and/or "in precursor mode". Further, when displaying the remaining ceiling number display performance in the normal mode, different performance modes can be used in the general mode and the omen mode. For example, during general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in a small display area at the corner of the LCD screen (displaying a small countdown display), and during precursor mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in a large display area in the center of the LCD screen. It is possible to notify (display a large countdown display).

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route that follows S420)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409:≠5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is sent to the effect control section 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management processing: Figure 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be explained. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the ceiling number of games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of this embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of games that is the trigger for setting data regarding ceiling benefit provision ( Steps S903 to S904 (ceiling flag turned ON), which will be described later, and step S915 in FIG. 15 showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12).

The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of executions, the number of establishments, or the number of occurrences of a specific event, and functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (a ceiling privilege granting trigger). The "specific event" here refers to the execution of a symbol variation display game (win variation or loss variation), winning of a jackpot, small hit, or loss, transition to a specific gaming state (transition to a specific gaming mode or specific (or to a specific internal gaming state), the execution of a jackpot game or a small win, and specific events such as the establishment of specific conditions regarding the game. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine whether an opportunity to activate the ceiling function has arrived. Such a counting means can be used, for example, for "Modification 1 and Modification 2 of benefit granting formats (FIGS. 33 and 34, granting formats (α) to (μ))" and other granting formats (granting formats (ν)), which will be described later. )(ξ))" etc., it is used as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation opportunity or a predetermined privilege granting opportunity.

If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited without doing anything. The initial value is set to the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared by clearing the area RAM during the main processing on the main control side (step S031) shown in FIG. 8, or when the normal mode is changed from another game mode. In other words, when the internal gaming state shifts to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 in FIG. 16B, which will be described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is directly exited and the value is zero. If so (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process of step S412, which will be described later (see step S915 in FIG. 15). With the above, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is finished, a random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory actuation random number determination process, the random number for jackpot determination is used to execute a "winning/losing lottery at the start of variation" targeting the operation pending balls that will be used for the current variation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process of step S318 in FIG. 11, which has already been described, so the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

In this random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table for the side to be processed this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the target to be processed, the winning random number for the special figure 1 side is random number table). Next, the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, and a winning lottery is executed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table. Then, if the lottery result is a "big hit" win, the jackpot determination flag is set to "5AH", and if the lottery result is a "small hit" win, the small hit determination flag is set to "5AH", and "big hit" and "small hit" are set. If the player does not win any of the winnings, that is, in the case of a loss, both the jackpot determination flag and the small hit determination flag are set to "00H".

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management process: Figure 14>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. 12. In this ceiling activation management process, necessary setting processes related to ceiling benefit provision are performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the current game result is a "jackpot" (step S920).

If the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (step S911:≠5AH), then it is determined whether the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether to activate the ceiling function (or not to grant ceiling benefits), and when the flag is in the ON state, ceiling benefits are granted. If the flag is in the OFF state, the ceiling benefit is not granted. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter reaches zero in the gaming state transition preparation process of step S412, which will be described later (steps in FIG. 15 showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process). (See S915-S916). If this ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that a ceiling activation opportunity has arrived in this game (step S921: = 5AH), and the necessary processing to grant the ceiling benefit (steps S922 to S925) is performed. executed. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921:≠5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the process exits the ceiling activation management process without doing anything.

If the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921:=5AH), the process necessary for granting the ceiling benefit (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the values of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412) described later are set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, the specified ceiling privilege state is controlled. In the case of this embodiment, finite time saving (time saving state with 100 time saving times) is specified, and the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "01H" of the precursor mode to "06H" of the ceiling mode. It has become. Then, as an end process for granting ceiling benefits, each status buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processes when ceiling is activated), and then the ceiling flag and ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step S924-S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the gaming state information transmission process here, a gaming state designation command including finite time saving (time saving state) information is transmitted to the production control section 24. As a result, with the start of the current game (1000th game), the control is made into a finite time saving state, and in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413), which will be described later, a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected, and a ceiling effect mode is selected. The performance below will be revealed.

Returning to the explanation of step S911, if the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911:=5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, if a jackpot is won, even if it is a ceiling game, the game is controlled to be in a "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the process for winning a jackpot is executed preferentially. Therefore, in order to receive the ceiling benefit, the condition is that the player has been addicted to 1000 games. As described above, in this embodiment, the game period to be monitored for the number of addictive games (number of consecutive losses) is set to be 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and if the game is addictive during this period, a ceiling benefit is given. ing.

(Variation example 1 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In addition, when winning the jackpot, a ceiling benefit may be given without controlling the ceiling function to a prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling benefit will be limited to this game (one game only). This is because the jackpot game starts after the current game ends. However, even if it is a ceiling benefit that is only for one game, if a time-saving state or a variable probability state is given with a state with electric support, the benefit of electric support will not be available until the end of this symbol change display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that it becomes easier to enter the lower starting hole 35, and it becomes easier for the ball to be held on the special drawing 2 side to occur. When giving a game state with an electric support state as a ceiling benefit, in this game, at least the "right-handed hitting instruction image 779" shown in FIG. 7 should be displayed to encourage the player to play right-handed. preferable.

(Variation example 2 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling benefit is granted upon the start of a game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a configuration in which a ceiling benefit is granted upon the end of a game. In other words, the ceiling activation trigger is the end of the ceiling game. In the case of this modification, the ceiling benefit will be awarded immediately after the end of the symbol variation display game. For example, if the ceiling benefit is a finite time reduction, the time reduction state can start immediately after the end of 1000 games. In addition, when the ceiling privilege is a "forced win", a forced win jackpot game (forced win game) will be started after 1000 games are completed. In addition, when the end of the game is used as the trigger for ceiling activation, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed, for example, during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B), which will be described later, related to the process at the end of the symbol fluctuation display game. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Variation example 3 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that a ceiling benefit is given for the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may also give benefits. For example, if you are addicted to 1000 games (the first granting condition is met), the right to grant a ceiling benefit is established, and the ceiling benefit is granted after a predetermined number of precursory games are played (the granting of the ceiling benefit is temporarily suspended, and multiple games (schedule in advance). In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of numbers of portent games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and determine the number of portent games by lottery (lottery for number of portent games). When determining the number of precursor games by lottery, the lottery probability for each number of precursor games may be the same for all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of games. If this is determined, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the setting based on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of portent games (for example, 7 games) is selected, a lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as a high setting confirmed or a setting of 6 confirmed.

(Variation example 4 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the above modification 3, an example was described in which the right to grant a ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended until a predetermined number of precursor games are played, that is, an example in which the right to suspend the right is dependent on the number of times the game is played. However, the rights reservation period may not depend on the number of times the game is played, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, this is a "timed" ceiling award form in which a ceiling benefit is awarded when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, a ceiling benefit is given at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game related to a ceiling game. In this case, the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling benefit is used to create an effect that notifies you in advance that a finite time reduction will occur soon, such as the "right-handed hitting instruction image 779" shown in FIG. This allows players who are playing left-handed to be encouraged to play right-handed, thereby preventing them from making unnecessary hits.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling activation management process in step S421 is finished, a special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed using the winning/losing lottery result in step S410 and the random number value for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 that has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, a symbol table (one of the jackpot symbol table, small prize symbol table, and loss symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the winning/losing lottery result in step S410. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is 'special symbol 1 side' and the winning/losing lottery result is 'jackpot', "Jackpot symbol table for FIG. 1" is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination result is the lottery result. The data and special stop symbol number are respectively stored in corresponding areas of the in-area RAM.

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 15>
The above gaming state transition preparation process (step S412) will be explained. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process.

This game state transition preparation process includes a process for storing data in a predetermined buffer (state buffer) for specifying the destination game state (see FIG. 4) after winning a jackpot. (Steps S911 to S914), and when the ceiling flag is ON due to a loss, processing is performed to store data for specifying ceiling benefits in a predetermined buffer (Steps S915, S916, S917). ing. First, the contents of the processing in the case of winning the jackpot will be explained.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911:=5AH), the "gaming state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, with reference to the acquired jackpot game state transition table selection table, the current game state (the game state at the time of winning (in this embodiment, the game state determination number YJ)) and the winning type (special symbol determination data) are determined. A game state transition table (any one of JTTBL-1 to JTTBL-5) corresponding to the game state is acquired (step S913), and data defined in the acquired game state transition table is stored in various state buffers (step S914: buffer setting processing). This gaming state transition table defines various data for transitioning to a target gaming state. The game state transition table according to this embodiment is provided with JTTBL-1 to JTTBL-5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A" and JTTBL-2 is "time saving B". , various data are defined for transitioning JTTBL-3 to "Probable Variable A", JTTBL-4 to "Probable Variable B", and JTTBL-5 to "Probable Variable C".

The value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end process ((step S509 in FIG. 17, see step S592 in FIG. 18 for details) shown in FIG. 18, which will be described later), and is stored in a predetermined storage area ( This is stored in the flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each status buffer.Thereby, the gaming status after the jackpot game (transition destination gaming status in FIG. 4) is specified.

The roles of the various status buffers mentioned above are as follows.
(α) "General symbol opening extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time-saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time-saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
Designation data of ON (in operation)/OFF (inactive) of each function for designating the internal gaming state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time-saving function, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, and the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data is set for the symbol probability changing state flag, the special symbol time saving state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and the special symbol probability changing state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function.
(β) “Special symbol time saving number counter buffer”
Data (data for the special symbol time saving number counter) for specifying the number of time saving times (electronic support number of times) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 16A to 16B).
(γ) “Special pattern definite change number counter buffer”
Data for specifying the ST number (data for the special symbol probability change number counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 16B).
(δ) “Special symbol variation counter 1-3 buffer”
Data (data for the special symbol variation number counter) for specifying the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(ε) “Fluctuation pattern distribution specification number 1-3 buffer”
When a predetermined update condition is met, data (data for the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) specifying the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set.

For example, if the current gaming state is "Normal State (YJ=00H)" and you win "Probable Variable Jackpot 2 (5R Probable Variable ST75)", based on the gaming state transition table selection table shown in FIG. -4'', that is, the game state transition table for probability variation B (see FIG. 22) is obtained. In this case, "5AH (ON designation)" is set in each of the normal electric utility opening extension transition state buffer and the special symbol probability change transition state buffer, and the special symbol time saving number counter buffer is set to "100 times (electric support number 100 times)". ” is set, and “75 times” is set in the special symbol probability change count counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination gaming state after the jackpot game is designated as "75 ST times + 25 time saving times" (after 75 rotations in the variable probability state, transition to 25 rotations in the time saving state). In addition, as game mode transition specification data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation number counter 1 buffer. is set, and "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST mid stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation number counter 2 buffer. Ru. As a result, the game mode transition form "25 times in early ST mode ⇒ 50 times in middle ST mode ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(Variation example of S. ST number and time saving number: Case where ST number or time saving number differs depending on the setting value)
In the present embodiment, the explanation has been made assuming that when the same jackpot is won, the same gaming state transition table is selected regardless of the set value. In other words, regardless of the current setting of 1 to 6, if, for example, the variable probability jackpot 1 is won, the state is shifted to the variable probability state (probable variable A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the same jackpot is won, depending on the setting value, it may be possible to shift to a variable probability state with a different number of STs or to a time saving state with a different number of time savings. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability change number counter and/or the special symbol time reduction number counter may be configured so that different game state transition tables can be selected according to the set values.

Further, although the case where the same jackpot is won has been described above, it is also possible to adopt the configuration described below by focusing on different jackpots. For example, the presence or absence of a specific number of STs or the presence or absence of a specific number of time reductions may be determined depending on a set value. Specifically, in the case of the first setting value, there is a specific jackpot that gives a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second setting value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the "specific jackpot" is included in the jackpot lottery targets, but in the case of the second set value, the "specific jackpot" is not included in the jackpot lottery targets.

By having the above configuration, when a specific variable jackpot (or a potential jackpot is also acceptable) or a specific time-saving jackpot is won, the gaming characteristics described in (SA) and (SB) below are created. be able to.

(SA) For example, if you win a specific probability variable jackpot, you may set a different ST number for each setting value (settings 1 to 6) (each will be moved to a probability variable state with a different ST number), or at least A different number of STs may be set for one set value (at least one set value is shifted to a variable state with a probability of the number of STs different from other set values). As a typical example, in the former case, if you win the same probability-variable jackpot, for example, "set the number of STs of settings 1 to 6 100 to 105 times" (one of the setting values will be known depending on the number of STs) case). In the latter example, if you win the same variable jackpot, for example, "Settings 1 to 5 are ST times 100 times, setting 6 is 101 times" (case where setting 6 is confirmed after 101 ST times), or " Settings 1 to 4 are ST times 100 times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times.'' (case where the high setting is confirmed after 101 ST times), ``At least the first setting value is ST number 100 times, and the second setting value is 105 times.'' It can be "times" etc.
In addition, if the focus is on different probability-variable jackpots, for example, "Among the winning types subject to the jackpot lottery, if you win the first jackpot, it will be the first ST number (for example, ST 100), and if you win the second jackpot" may be set to a second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included.
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variable jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so it is possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of STs. Specifically, if a specific ST number is reached, one of settings 1 to 6 will be found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 negated, setting 6 confirmed, etc.) Something turns out to be true. In other words, it is possible to create novel gameplay in which the function of the setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion) is created using the "ST number".

(SB) Also, if you win a specific time-saving jackpot, you may set a different number of time-savings for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), as in the same event as (SA) above, or at least 1 You may set a different number of time saving times in the setting value. In addition, if the focus is on different time-saving jackpots, for example, ``Among the winning types eligible for the jackpot lottery, if you win the first one, it will be the first time-saving number (for example, 100 time-savers), and if you win the second one, In this case, the second time saving number (for example, 105 times) is set different from the first time saving number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. In these cases, as well as the above-mentioned (SA) configuration, when the number of time reductions is a specific number, it is set to one of settings 1 to 6, or is set to a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is now possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of time saving times, such as Setting 1 Negation, Setting 6 Confirmation, etc., and the novelty of creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion performance by using the ``time saving number''. It is possible to create a unique gameplay experience. It is possible to provide a plurality of time-saving jackpots in which the number of time-savings is "100 times or more (which may include infinite time-savings)".

Note that one or more jackpots can be provided as the specific jackpot in this example. Further, the specific jackpot is preferably a jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, variable probability jackpot 1) or a jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit state). The reason is as follows.

The jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that is difficult to win. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information called "setting suggestion" as a bonus. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit status) has a low profit even if the player goes to great lengths to win the jackpot, resulting in a disappointing jackpot for the player, which may reduce the player's desire to play. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information called "setting suggestion" to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

The configuration (SA) above can be, for example, the configuration (SA-1) below.
(SA-1)
A lottery means that executes a lottery for a plurality of types of winnings, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means;
A symbol display means that displays a symbol in a variable manner and displays a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol;
A winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win;
After the above-mentioned winning game ends, until the number of fluctuations of the symbols reaches the predetermined upper limit, a high probability state (specifically, a high Equipped with a probability fluctuation control means that can control a gaming state accompanied by a probability state (probability variable state or potential probability state),
A gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the winning lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on a set value that can be changed in multiple stages,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The above probability fluctuation control means is
When the set value is the first set value, if the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached;
When the set value is the second set value, if the first win is won by the lottery means, the high probability state will continue until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number is reached. can be configured to control.

Furthermore, the above (SA-1) may be configured as shown below (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The above probability fluctuation control means is
If the first prize is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached;
When the second winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until a second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached;
When the set value is the first set value, the lottery result by the lottery means may not include at least a second win.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration (SB), instead of the probability fluctuation control means, an "advantageous ball entering state (electrical support state)" in which the state of ball entering the starting means is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (normal state) An advantageous gaming state control means for controlling an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) accompanied by "advantageous gaming state control means" is provided. and,
The above advantageous game state control means is
When the set value is the first set value, if the first winning is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached;
When the set value is the second set value, if the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state will continue until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached. The configuration may be such that it is controlled.

(If you do not win the jackpot (lose) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 15 again. If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH) and the ceiling flag is ON (step S915: = 5AH), ceiling activation pre-processing (pre-processing for granting ceiling benefits) As part of this, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). The ceiling activation flag set to the ON state in this process is checked in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 23 is obtained (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (limited time saving to infinite potential) are illustrated as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. In reality, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided depending on the ceiling benefit type.

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 14), and are stored in the predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (each flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the state buffer. As a result, the gaming state related to the ceiling privilege is designated. Note that "* (times)" and "* (H)" shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the gameplay and design values. For example, in the case of this embodiment, "Limited time saving (number of working hours 100)" is typically explained as a ceiling benefit, so in this case, the data value shown in the "Limited time saving" column shown in the figure is determined. It is being

Incidentally, when both the jackpot determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when step S911 is ≠5AH and step S915≠5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 12 again. After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27) corresponding to at least the current gaming state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 above is acquired, and the obtained variation A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern allocation table and the random number value for variation patterns (variation pattern lottery). In the case of this embodiment, the current setting value, the current fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the symbol lottery result, and the number of active pending balls (excluding the active pending balls used for the current variable display operation) A "fluctuation pattern distribution table" corresponding to the number of pitches (0 to 3: see step S403) is acquired.

(Fluctuation pattern distribution table: Figures 24 to 27)
FIGS. 24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern distribution tables. Figure 24 shows the distribution table of each hit fluctuation pattern for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use", and Figure 25 shows each hit fluctuation pattern for "for early ST, for middle of ST, for end of ST". Figure 26 shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for 'general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use', and Figure 27 shows the pattern allocation table for the early ST, middle ST, and late ST stages. This table shows each "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" for In addition, "FB1 to FB17" shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 are the winning fluctuation pattern distribution table types selected at the time of winning, and "FH1 to FH22" shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 are the winning fluctuation patterns selected at the time of losing. Indicates the pattern distribution table type.

Note that "Heaven's Time Saving" (see the "Time Saving/Heaven's Time Saving" column) of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables shown in FIGS. 24 and 26 is a table common to the time saving mode. The reason for using a common table is from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden. If the same gaming state as the ceiling privilege is provided, a common variable pattern distribution table can be provided for the ceiling privilege and its gaming state. Of course, a dedicated variable pattern distribution table may be provided depending on the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite time saving or infinite time saving, there is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heavenly time saving", in the case of finite definite variation or infinite definite variation, there is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heavenly definite variation", and in the case of finite definite variation or infinite definite variation, In this case, there is a "fluctuation pattern distribution table exclusively for heavenly detection".

Further, although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to the setting values (settings 1 to 6) is provided. In other words, the probability that one or more specific variation patterns will be drawn may vary depending on the setting value, and for example, setting inference factors may be given based on differences in the appearance rate of effects related to the specific variation pattern. is now possible.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, each variation pattern distribution table has one or more types of variation patterns, such as the gaming status (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)), the number of balls pending operation (currently available for variation display operation), etc. It is determined in association with the number of active pending balls (excluding the active pending balls), the symbol lottery result, and the random number value for the fluctuation pattern. As shown in the figure, various types of variation patterns are provided. The relationship between the level of expectation of winning is as follows. The relationship between reaches of the same type is "N reach A < N reach B" between N reaches, and "SP reach A < SP reach B < SP reach C" between SP reaches. The relationship between different types of reaches is "N reach A < N reach B < SP reach A < SP reach B < SP reach C < special reach." Moreover, the "inciting reach" is provided as a special reach that is mainly selected in the normal mode when a prize is won in the lower starting opening 35 which is the starting opening on the special map 2 side.

Note that when pseudo-runs and other preview performances are performed in combination, the expectation level of winning may change. For example, even if SP Reach A has a relatively low expectation of winning, as in "SP Reach B < Pseudo 3 + SP Reach A," if it is accompanied by a pseudo connection, the expectation of winning will be higher than SP Reach B or SP Reach C. It may be higher. Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, if pseudo 4 is involved, the occurrence of SP reach B or higher is certain. In addition, in the illustration, N reaches are shown as "without pseudo connections," but in reality, N reaches with pseudo connections include, for example, pseudo 2-3 + N reach A, pseudo 2-3 + N reach B, etc. If 3 or more is involved, the occurrence of SP reach is confirmed.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process is basically the same as the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 11) which is the pre-read fluctuation pattern determination process described above. Here, the variation pattern distribution table is referred to, and a variation pattern is determined according to the random number value for variation patterns (variation pattern designation command data COM2 shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is obtained). Once the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the "TIME" column in the figure). This variation time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is a timer management area of the in-area RAM. Then, in order to notify the production control unit 24 of the content of the determined variation pattern, a "variation pattern specification command" containing variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as a production control command, and this is used to control the production. The information is transmitted to the section 24 side. Specifically, the special symbol variation pattern creation process includes the following processes (A) to (D) as processing related to determining a "variation pattern specification command" for specifying a variation pattern at the start of variation. has been done.

(A) “Fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation” that determines the “Fluctuation pattern distribution table”;
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27)" determined in (A) above, the number of pending pitches and the random value for the variation pattern obtained in the process of step S314 are determined. a “variation pattern specification command data acquisition process” (variation pattern lottery process) that determines a variation pattern based on the data and obtains the command data (COM2) of the corresponding variation pattern specification command;
(C) "Variation time setting process" which determines the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process and sets it in the "special symbol accessory movement timer" which is a timer management area of the RAM in the area. ,
(D) A "command transmission process" for transmitting the variation pattern designation command acquired in (B) above to the production control section 24.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least other winning/losing lottery results (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), It can include the current gaming state, variable time information, execution designation information of a specific preview performance (presence or absence of a reach performance and its type, pseudo-continuation designation information, etc.). The main control unit 20 transmits a “variation pattern specification command” whose contents can be specified to the production control unit 24, and the information included in this variation pattern specification command is used by the production control unit 24 to determine the current symbol variation. It is used to determine the performance scenario related to the display game (fluctuating display of decorative symbols, various preview performances, display suggesting settings during fluctuation, etc.).

(About characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, characteristic elements related to the fluctuation pattern will be explained, focusing on points having multiple types of ST modes and points having a ceiling function.

(About fluctuation status)
The above fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed, low speed fluctuation states) in each game mode are realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 26 to 27. For example, if you refer to the "losing fluctuation pattern distribution table for ST" shown in FIG. 27, in the early stage of ST, in order to realize a high-speed fluctuation state, normal fluctuation on the special chart 2 side (fluctuation pattern belonging to the normal fluctuation pattern) The shortest variation pattern with the shortest variation time of 2s (seconds) (normal variation 2s at the beginning of ST) is selected with a high probability. In addition, in the middle of the ST and the end of the ST, a variation pattern with a longer variation time (3 seconds of normal variation in the middle of the ST, 4 seconds of normal variation in the end of the ST) is selected with a high probability. Realize states and slow fluctuation states. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27, when losing, reach variation patterns are likely to be selected in the order of "late ST, middle ST, early ST" mode (in this embodiment, the selection rate of reach variation patterns is higher during the early ST stage). zero), and its fluctuation time is also relatively long. From this point of view, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game becomes relatively long in this order of the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage mode.

Further, in the ST early stage mode, only the normal variation type (ST early stage normal variation 2s, 8s) is selected in the event of a loss. In other words, during the early stages of ST (within 1 to 25 games), the moment you hit the reach, it becomes a "win" (when you win the jackpot, the "direct reach" is selected (see Figure 25)). In this embodiment, when winning in the ST early stage mode, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected regardless of the winning type, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the ST middle mode and ST final stage mode, a configuration may be adopted in which different fluctuation pattern distribution tables are selected depending on the winning type.

Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that there are multiple types of ST modes, the following configuration (I) or (II) can be achieved.
(I) A configuration may also be adopted in which a Tcode dedicated to the final time of the ST mode is provided, and a specific fluctuation pattern (final fluctuation) can be selected for the final time. A Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one of the ST early mode, the ST middle mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST opening final inciting A, ST middle final inciting A, ST final final inciting A" shown in notes 2 to 4 in Figure 25 (at the time of jackpot), or "In notes 2 to 4 in Figure 27 (at the time of loss)" These include the final incitement B at the beginning of the ST, the final incitement B in the middle of the ST, and the final incitement B at the end of the ST. In this case, the following effect can be produced. Taking the final game of the ST early stage mode (25th game in ST) as a representative example, in the final game, when a jackpot is achieved, "ST early stage final agitation A" is selected, and when it is a loss, "ST early stage final agitation A" is selected. "B" is selected. At this time, in both of the symbol variation display games related to the final incitement A and B at the beginning of the ST, a common specific effect is displayed for a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game). , a loss or a jackpot is kept secret for a while to arouse the players' sense of tension. Then, if it is a loss, the game is stopped at the ``lost pattern (uneven pattern)'' without applying the reach, and if it is a jackpot, the game is stopped at the ``symbol match (winning pattern)'' by applying the reach. Particularly in the case of this embodiment, during the early stages of the ST, it becomes a certainty as soon as a "reach" is applied, so if a performance that stimulates whether or not a reach is applied is produced as the above-mentioned common specific effect, This can arouse the players' sense of nervousness and anticipation of winning. In addition, the fluctuation time of final trigger A (when winning) and final trigger B (when losing) may be the same fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time during jackpot is set to be longer than when losing, and after the reach effect, winning can be performed. Specific performances such as a blessing performance, a promotion performance that can notify you of a promotion display from an even numbered pattern to an odd numbered pattern, or a non-promotional display from an even numbered pattern to an even numbered pattern, depending on the type of jackpot won. It is preferable to let

(II) When the winning jackpot type (or one or more specific jackpot types may be used) is hidden in the performance and the destination gaming state is hidden (in the performance during the symbol fluctuation display game and the performance during the winning) For example, in the final game (ST 25th game) of the ST early stage mode, if you lose, you can use the ST early stage final incitement to determine whether the ST mode will end or not. The ``continuous inciting performance'' will emerge. For example, if the current game mode is ST25 mode, a continuation failure effect that notifies ST non-continuation is displayed as a result of the continuation promotion effect, and if the current game mode is ST75 or ST100 mode, a continuation failure effect is displayed to notify ST continuation. Achieve continuous success performance.

Both of the configurations (I) and (II) described above can arouse the player's sense of tension in the final ST game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Furthermore, the above-mentioned "final fluctuation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or some ST modes. However, in an ST mode that is in a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode, it is preferable to configure the final acceleration fluctuation to be selectable. In the case of the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the player continues to lose without winning the jackpot, the ST (probability fluctuation state) ends quickly, and the player feels a strong sense of disappointment. Therefore, it is preferable to have the player select the "final excitement variation" in the final round to maintain the player's sense of tension, from the standpoint of making the game more interesting. Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the ST final game, but may be such that the "final incitement" is continuously selected from games one or more games before the final game. For example, during the three games ST23 to ST25, "Final Incitement" is selected consecutively.

(About fluctuation patterns related to ceiling mode)
In addition, referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the "ceiling" column shown in the figure, a common "ceiling variation" is applied regardless of the special pattern type and the number of pending balls. is now selected. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of loss, the ``common ceiling fluctuation'' is selected regardless of the ``special symbol type, number of pending pitches, and loss type.'' The reason for doing this is as follows. First, when reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to display a common ceiling effect regardless of at least the type of special symbol, the number of balls on hold, etc., and to notify the activation of the ceiling (granting a ceiling benefit). Second, preparing multiple types of variable pattern distribution tables and creating effects based on them for one ceiling game (limited to one rotation) increases the control burden, and it is necessary to reduce the control burden. This is because it is undesirable from the viewpoint of Also, in the case of a win, as in the case of a "lose" mentioned above, from the viewpoint of presentation and reducing the control burden, the following configuration is adopted. As already explained, if you happen to win a jackpot in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), instead of appearing in the ceiling effect mode, the normal effect mode (for example, the general mode) will be displayed. It is preferable to display an effect at the time of winning (in the middle or in the omen mode) (see the description in "7-4-1. Regarding the effect in the ceiling mode" above). Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. Among the distribution tables FB1 to FB4, "FB2" is selected. Note that it is not limited to "FB2" and may be any of FB1 to FB4.

(About fluctuation patterns related to precursor mode)
Also, if we pay attention to the "precursor mode" in the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. , the game mode with the fastest average digestion time). This is done in consideration of the player's state of mind. Many players are thought to have a strong desire to ``I want to reach the ceiling as soon as possible'' or ``I want to get the ceiling benefit quickly'' when they get close to the ceiling. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is increased. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, when winning a jackpot in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 24, the same winning fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 as in the general mode are adopted, but the present invention However, a winning variation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a "variation per omen" can be provided as a win variation exclusively during the omen mode (see note 2 "variation per omen" in FIG. 24).

In addition, if the final game in the omen mode is a "lose", a specific fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time) is selected in order to bring out the "pre-launch guidance notification effect" mentioned above. This may be a possible configuration (see Note 2 “Final change of precursor” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification performance is a performance that instructs "how to shoot" in the game before the game in which the electric support condition occurs, and is different from the conventional game in which the electric support condition occurs (probably variable). In other words, firing guidance notifications such as instructing to hit right in a game where there is a time saving, or instructing to hit left in a game where there is no electric support, in other words, the actual presence of electric support. This is different in nature from the notification effect that instructs how to play in the game where there is no hit. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification performance is a performance unique to gaming machines equipped with ceiling benefits.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12 again. When the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413 is finished, the fluctuating flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "fluctuating flag" is a flag that indicates which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to the special symbol 2 are handled as the fluctuating flag. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the current processing target (fluctuation start side), set the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag to ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag to OFF, and the special symbol 2 side is the current processing target (fluctuation start side). start side), set the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag to OFF and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag to ON. This specifies which special symbol is the object of variable display.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is created, and this is sent to the performance control section 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the fluctuation side and the winning type (design lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command is mainly used to control the combination of decorative symbols when forming a ready-to-reach state (symbol types whose constituent elements are ready-to-reach symbols), the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbols), It is used to determine the preview effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the production control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, it starts the current decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in these commands, and performs various productions during the symbol variation display game. Control appearance.

Then, as a fluctuation start setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for judgment (cleared to zero) (step S416 ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is completed, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. Thereby, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

(Regarding the case where a setting abnormality error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the explanation of the determination process in step S409, if the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) in step S409, that is, if a setting abnormality error is occurring (step S409:=5AH), the special electric function in step S410 The random number determination process for object operation determination (winning/losing lottery) is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is executed. That is, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning/losing lottery at the start of the variation is not executed, and the current winning/losing lottery result is always treated as a "loss" (forced losing control). In the case of an abnormal setting error, it is preferable to provide a variation pattern exclusively for errors and select this, but it may be configured such that an existing specific variation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing variation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting abnormal error" has occurred, and select only the normal variation pattern type without selecting a reach variation pattern type that will arouse the expectation of winning. It is preferable to select Note that in a situation of forced loss, the game no longer makes sense, so it is preferable to select the long variation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal variation pattern (in this embodiment, the normal variation is 16 seconds). Select only. Further, in the case of an abnormal setting error, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (symbol variation is not started) as "game continuation is not possible". In this case, the error notification continues until the gaming machine is powered off. Note that in this embodiment, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is canceled.

<A. Special symbol fluctuation processing: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be explained.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (fluctuation time T≠0), the special symbol is fluctuating, so the special symbol fluctuating process is exited without doing anything. When the special symbol variation time T has elapsed (variation time T = 0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the special symbol variation has ended is sent to the production control unit 24 as a production control command. . When the performance control unit 24 receives the fluctuation stop command, it grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, and stops displaying (determined display) the decorative symbol that is being fluctuated. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation stops, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100ms) and confirmation display time (for example, 500ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the in-area RAM, and the special symbol operation status is stored. Switch to "Confirming (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status) and store the OFF state in the special symbol fluctuation flag. Then, after completing the setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the process exits from the special symbol fluctuation processing. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is the margin time to ensure the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal that notifies the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. It is. Moreover, the "confirmed display time" is the time (stop display time) for which the stop display is maintained when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the above-described special symbol fluctuation processing is completed, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management processing is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management processing in step S095 in FIG. 9.

<16. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Figures 16A and 16B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be explained. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory action timer is zero (step S471). The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set with a "determined display time" (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation processing). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process exits from this special symbol confirmation time process without doing anything.

If the special symbol accessory motion timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the current special symbol fluctuation display game is assumed to have ended, and the special symbol motion status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol motion 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and current gaming state information is stored in the gaming state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the determination at step S474 (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the conditional device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot has been won, and the low probability and electric support are set during the jackpot game. Set to no state (clear various flags and counters). Further, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) in step S474 (step S474:≠5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476:≠5AH), that is, if it is a "loss" that is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, the process advances to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, as various setting processes when the small winning symbols are stopped (processing before starting the small winning game), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small winning determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small winning medium flag. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small winning symbol, the process proceeds to step S478.

When the process proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is subtracted by 1 as the amount of the current variation number (step S479), and the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends is reached, and a setting process is performed at the time of ending the time saving (step S481).

(Setting process at time saving end: step S481)
Here, as a setting process at the end of time saving, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) is set to OFF state (general symbol opening extension state flag, normal symbol time saving function). Set the state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag to 00H) to set the transition to the "no electric support state". In addition, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol time-saving function, the special symbol time-saving function is set to the OFF state (the special symbol time-saving state flag is set to 00H), and the gaming status notification LED output number (the status notification of the composite display device 38c 00H, which specifies a non-special symbol time-saving state (data), is stored (in the case of "01H", a special symbol time-saving state is specified).

The case where the "setting process at the end of time saving" in step S481 is executed is the case where the gaming mode shifts from "time saving mode" to normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal gaming state is "time saving state". This is a case of transitioning from the state to the "normal state". Therefore, here, as the next game shifts to the normal state (general mode), the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (999 times) in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games. In this embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (the 999th game), and in the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes and specific details are performed before the ceiling benefit starts. In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for specifying the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15). steps S915 to S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set in various flags and counters related to game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, ceiling benefits are awarded at the start of the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value; in this case, it is monitored whether the ceiling counter reaches zero, that is, whether it is the 1000th game, and if it is zero, For example, the process may be such that the specified data regarding the ceiling benefit is directly set in various flags and counters without going through the status buffer.

(Control processing when granting ceiling benefits upon the end of the game)
Here, if a configuration is adopted in which a ceiling benefit is given at the end of the game (when symbols are stopped), as already explained, the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421)" may be After the final process (step S495, which will be described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process related to the end of the display game, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed. In this case, if the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in this embodiment, a ceiling benefit will be awarded at the end of 999 games, and if 1000 is set, a ceiling benefit will be awarded at the end of 1000 games. In any case, a specific event related to the game (here, the number of losses during the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or ceiling benefit is activated. What is necessary is to configure it so that it can be granted. Note that if the processing method of this embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B) is adopted, in the old model, the start of the game was used as the trigger for ceiling activation, but in the new model, if you want to use the end of the game as the trigger for ceiling activation. This has the advantage of facilitating design changes and increasing compatibility between old and new models.

After completing the setting process at the end of time saving in step S481, a game state update process is then executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" in the time saving mode to "00H" in the general mode. The updated gaming state information is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 by a gaming state designation command in step S495, which will be described later. Therefore, when the time saving end setting process in step S481 is executed, the gaming state designation command transmitted in step S495, which will be described later, includes information designating the "general mode", and this gaming state designation command The performance control unit 24 understands that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in the current game, and understands that the general mode (normal state) will be entered from the next game. As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, the special symbol variation pattern based on the "general mode" will be selected, and the production under the "general production mode" will be displayed.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change count counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 as the number of variations of the current special symbol (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is It is determined whether the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST number of times has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, if the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the ST number has ended, and a setting process at the end of probability variation is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the time of ending the variable probability state, the function related to the variable probability state is set to the OFF state, and the variable probability state is ended. However, the processing content differs depending on the value of the special symbol time reduction counter. The details will be explained below.

(1) "If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero", in this case, the ST number in this game becomes zero and the ST mode ends, This is a case where the game will be shifted to the time saving mode from the next game because the number of time saving times remains. In other words, this is the case when 25 ST times have been completed during ST25 mode, or when 75 ST times have been completed during ST75 mode. reference). Therefore, in this case, set only the special symbol probability variation function to the OFF state (00H) (store 00H in the special symbol probability variation state flag), set the transition from the probability variation state to the time saving state, and set the gaming state determination number YJ to " 02H (time saving state)". Note that when this process is executed in the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in the subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "If the special symbol probability change number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is also zero", in this case, the ST number in this game is zero and the time saving number is also zero. This is a case where the value is zero, that is, a case where the player stayed in the ST100 mode, but the ST100 mode ends in the current game (see "JTTBL-3" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as a process required to end the probability change state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (general electric accessory open extension state flag, 00H is stored in the normal symbol time saving state flag and normal symbol probability changing state flag respectively), and the special symbol time saving function and special symbol probability changing function are set to OFF state (00H is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag and special symbol probability changing state flag respectively) ), stores the gaming state notification LED output number 00H, sets the initial value in the ceiling counter, and updates the gaming state determination number YJ to "00H (normal state)". The same applies to the case where the potential state is ended (when a finite potential jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (variable probability state) is ended, and the next game is shifted to the normal mode (general mode). In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, when the special symbol probability change number counter becomes zero, the special symbol time saving number counter also becomes zero (in this game, if the ST number becomes zero, the time saving number also becomes zero. ), in the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)" which is executed when the special symbol time saving number counter reaches zero, functions related to the time saving state such as the electric chew support function are set to OFF. Therefore, in this process, only the special symbol probability change function is turned off, and all functions related to the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension) function) may be set to OFF. Further, regarding the setting of the ceiling counter, the initial value (999 times) may be set in the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

After completing the setting process at the end of probability variation in step S486, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). The determination process of the special symbol variation counter here is mainly monitoring the switching game (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode.

If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 as the current variation count (step S489), and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is determined that the game is not an update game of variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that an update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and a game state update process is executed (step S491). Here, update processing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) the early ST mode ends, (β) when the middle ST mode ends, (γ) when the late ST mode ends, etc. . To be precise, update processing is performed according to ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of ST25 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, the time saving mode is entered, so the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" of the ST early stage mode to "05H" of the time saving mode.

In the case of ST75 mode, when the ST early mode ends, it will shift to the ST middle mode (first update), so at this time, change the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) from "02H" of the ST early mode to the ST middle mode. Update to "03H". Then, when the ST mid-stage mode ends, it will shift to the time-saving mode (second update), so at this time, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) will be updated from "03H" of the ST mid-stage mode to "05H" of the time-saving mode. do.

In the case of ST100 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, it shifts to the ST middle stage mode (first update), so as in the case of the ST75 mode described above, change the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to "02H" of the ST early stage mode. ” to “03H” in ST mid-stage mode. After that, when the ST mid-stage mode ends, it will shift to the ST-final mode (second update), so at this time, change the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) from "03H" of the ST mid-stage mode to "04H" of the ST final stage mode. Update to. Then, when the ST final stage mode ends, it will be transferred to the ST final stage mode (3rd update), so at this time, change the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) from "04H" of the ST final stage mode to "00H" of the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode updating means that updates (changes) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

Next, when the game state update process in step S491 is finished, the special symbol variation number counter update process is performed (step S492). Here, (1) the process of setting the duration of the ST middle mode (50 times of ST) after the 25 times of ST in the early ST mode has been completed (the process of setting the value of the special symbol variation counter 2) , (2) After the 50 ST times of the ST mid-stage mode are exhausted, the process of setting the duration of the ST final stage mode (25 ST times) (the process of setting the value of the special symbol variation number counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol variation number counter to be updated, refer to the special symbol variation number counter 1 to 3 buffer column of the gaming state transition table in FIG. 22). In this embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processing of steps S488 to S491.

Next, a precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the portent mode shift management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of games that trigger the shift to the portent mode. In the case of this embodiment, the portent mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), so when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in the current game (ceiling counter N = 10), the portent mode is entered. Perform setting processing. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, the next game, the 990th game, is shifted to the omen mode, a special symbol variation pattern based on the omen mode is selected, and the effect under the omen effect mode is displayed.

When the portent mode transition management process in step S493 is finished, a game status information transmission process is then executed (step S495). In this game state information transmission process, a game state designation command is transmitted, similar to the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the gaming state designation command transmitted here is information regarding the gaming state at the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494, etc. described above. Therefore, based on the game state designation command transmitted in this process, the performance control section 24 can grasp whether or not a change in game state will occur, and can control the change in performance mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 990th game has not started after the 989th game ends, the display can be switched from the daytime background in the general effect mode to the nighttime background in the omen mode immediately after the 989th game ends.

After completing the game status information transmission process in step S495, the process exits from the special symbol confirmation time process, performs the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10, and exits from the special symbol management process (step S093). Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

<23. Special electric accessories management processing: Figure 17>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit flag (step S501). When the small winning flag is in the ON state (step S501:=5AH), small winning processing is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management processing is exited. In this small winning process, necessary processing for controlling the small winning gaming operation is executed.

If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S501:≠5AH), then the state of the conditional device activation flag is determined (step S502). If the conditional device activation flag is in the OFF state (step S502:≠5AH), in this case, you are not playing a small win game (step S501:≠5AH), and you are not playing a jackpot game, so do nothing and use this special electric accessory. Exit management processing.

If the conditional device activation flag is in the ON state (step S502:=5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value that indicates the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and is stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM within the area. is stored in The special electric accessory operation status includes "Start processing in progress (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a jackpot game, and "In operation start processing (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a round game. 01H)", "In operation (02H)" to specify that the round game is in progress, and "Continuation judgment in progress (03H)" to specify that the next round game is being determined whether to continue or not. , "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)" which specifies that end processing is in progress at the end of the jackpot game.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "starting processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", "continuing determination" ( 03H)" or "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)", one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is executed. These processes are processes for controlling the execution of jackpot games, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, winning games corresponding to various winnings are realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be explained below.

<Jackpot game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot start process)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be explained. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value "starting process in progress (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "jackpot", this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous actuation device activation flag to the ON state (in operation) as a setting process (setting process at the time of start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, continuous operation of the special electric accessory (round game) is allowed (round game execution allowed state). Then, the special electric accessory operation status is updated to "operation start processing in progress (01H)", and 01H, which designates the first 1R, is set in the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this jackpot is written in the corresponding area of the area RAM, and the "start interval time" is written in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Set. "Start interval time (start INT)" is the period from when the special symbol display time has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and the jackpot is confirmed until the special variable winning device 52 is activated (1R round This is the interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening performance section.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is sent to the production control section 24, and the jackpot start process is exited. In addition to instructing the start of the opening performance, the "jackpot start command" includes information that can specify the type of jackpot this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It is also used to determine a series of winning performances (opening performances, mid-round performances, round end performances, ending performances, etc. corresponding to each type of jackpot) that will be developed during the game. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory activation process)
Next, the "special electric accessory activation process" in step S506 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory actuation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the interval time before the start of the round. As this interval time, in the first round (1Rth), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored, but from the 2nd round onwards, the main process When passing through (step S506), the "pre-release interval time", specifically, the interval time between rounds (R interval INT) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game, is determined. be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the current round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the pre-release interval time (in the case of 1R, start interval time) has passed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current round number (consecutive number counter) The opening/closing operation pattern of the big winning opening 50 is set according to the value (big winning opening opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the big winning opening opening/closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the big winning opening solenoid 52c (the big winning opening executed according to the number of rounds) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. (data for opening/closing operation pattern of the winning opening).

In addition, in conjunction with the operation to start opening the big winning hole, a big winning hole opening command is transmitted to the production control section 24. This "big winning opening opening command" includes current round number information, and is used by the performance control section 24 to display an in-round performance corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)" and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the grand prize opening 50 is opened to the upper limit of the above mentioned grand prize opening opening/closing operation time, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during special electric accessory operation)
Next, the "special electric accessory in operation process" in step S507 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winnings, and if it has reached the maximum number of winnings, the CPU 201 displays the special symbol role. Clear the object movement timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "Special Electric Accessory Activation Start Process (Step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and since the maximum number of prizes has been reached, the large prize opening 50 that is open will be closed. In addition, here, every time there is a prize in the big winning hole 50, a "big winning hole winning command" is transmitted to the performance control section 24. This grand prize opening command includes information on the occurrence of a winning in the grand prize opening and information on the number of prize balls (it may also include setting value information), and is used to notify that a prize has been won in the grand prize opening 50. In addition to being used for production, it is also used to control the appearance of setting suggestion production using winning production. For example, if there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

Please do not do anything until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the big winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) passes or the maximum number of winnings is reached. Exit the special electric accessory operation process.

When the maximum number of winnings is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory movement timer reaches zero, it is assumed that the current round game has ended and the special electric accessory movement status is changed to "Continuing judgment". (03H)" and stores the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) in the special symbol accessory action timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time to eject the remaining balls inside the grand prize opening after the grand prize opening is closed. In addition, with the closing of the big prize opening (end of the round game), an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the performance control section 24. This "interval interval command between rounds" includes round game end information and current number of rounds information, and the performance control unit 24 controls the performance (interval interval performance) during the interval between rounds (R INT) until the next round. Used when making it appear. With the above, this special electric accessory is in operation process is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric accessory operation continuation determination process" in step S508 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) after the closing of the grand prize opening (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball ejection time has elapsed. be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired and it is determined whether the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as a process when continuing the round game, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter, the "interval time before release" is stored in the special symbol accessory movement timer, and the special electric prize is activated. Switch the object operation status to "operation start processing in progress (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as a setting process at the end of the final round, the "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol accessory movement timer, and the special electric accessory Switch the operation status to "termination processing in progress (04H)". The above-mentioned "end interval time" is the interval period from the end of the final round game and the elapse of the remaining ball discharge time until the end of the jackpot game, and refers to the time width that defines the ending performance period. .

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending performance is transmitted to the performance control section 24, and the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is ended. The above-mentioned jackpot end command includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, information that allows identification of the gaming state after the jackpot game. It is also used when deciding the production mode.

(9-5. Jackpot end process: Figure 18)
Next, the "jackpot end process" in step S509 will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot end process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory action timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-mentioned end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory action timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (step S591: NO), this jackpot ending process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (end interval time elapsed) (step S591: YES), a status flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the already explained "gaming state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. This specifies the gaming state after the jackpot game.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game status notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric accessory operation status is Switch to "starting process in progress (00H)".

When the jackpot ending process is finished, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game are finished, and the current jackpot game is ended. In addition, the series of control processing regarding the jackpot game explained above is the same when a "forced win" is given by a ceiling benefit.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: Figures 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the effect control processing on the effect control section 24 side of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (production control side main processing: FIG. 19) and a timer interrupt process activated by a regular interrupt from the CTC (production control side timer interrupt processing: 20).

<19. Production control side main processing: Figure 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the production control section side (production control side main processing). When power is turned on to the gaming machine main body from the outside, the production control unit 24 starts the main processing on the production control side shown in FIG. 19.

In the main processing on the performance control side, the performance control section 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the gaming operation (step S1001). Here, the initial setting processing includes, for example, command reception interrupt setting, processing to return to the starting point of movable objects, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

After the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process during normal operation, and otherwise the production software random number update process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The above-mentioned main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the production control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In this embodiment, main loop processing is performed approximately every 16 ms, and in the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, and the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed; otherwise, various effects are executed until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO). The random numbers for lottery are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update period has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, a performance scenario for error notification during an error is set, and an error cancellation process is executed when the error is canceled. Note that errors related to the presentation means (movable accessory errors, audio IC errors, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, demonstration/power saving mode processing is executed (step S1005). In this demo/power saving mode processing, a demonstration start waiting effect, a customer waiting effect, and a setting process necessary for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, a production switch input process is executed (step S1007). In this production switch input process, the operating state of the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing is executed in accordance with the operation. The input state of the operating means is monitored in button input state update processing (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether a production control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if a production control command is stored, this command is read out, and the production processing corresponding to the read production control command is executed. do. Note that when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. Through this command reception interrupt processing, the production control command is acquired, and its data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

In the command analysis process, for example, when a variation pattern designation command is received, the content of the command is first analyzed, and the variation pattern information of the special symbol, which is the content, is obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. The performance during the symbol variation display game is not determined yet at this point, but is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. In other words, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information included in the decorative symbol designation command (symbol lottery result information), the production scenario (decorative symbol variation display) during the symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) , preview performances, etc.) are now decided. For example, when a fluctuating pattern designation command and a decorative pattern designation command are received, one or more types of performance patterns are selected in the command analysis process based on the information (fluctuation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands. decide. The performance pattern determined here works as a "parts performance" as an element constituting the performance scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined for when and for how long the performance pattern (parts performance) determined above will appear, and based on this, a performance scenario is constructed and its The performance scenario data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. By developing various performance patterns (part performances) incorporated in this performance scenario one after another or simultaneously, a "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized. In this embodiment, the performance scenario during the symbol variation display game is determined based on the information included in the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command, but the present invention is not limited to this. The decision can be made based on the information contained in the The fluctuation pattern designation command includes win/loss information and fluctuation pattern information, so if the winning type (symbol lottery information) itself is not required, the fluctuation pattern designation command can be used to change the pattern during the symbol fluctuation display game. It is also possible to compose a performance scenario.

For example, when a "pending addition command" is received, it is determined whether or not to execute a pre-read notice (pending change notice and/or changing pre-read notice) by a pre-read notice lottery, and when executing a pre-read notice, determines the performance scenario, stores the data of the performance scenario in the corresponding area of the RAM 243, and uses it as appropriate when executing the pre-read notice. Similarly, when other pre-read notices, such as the pending change notice for the ceiling (FIG. 32), are to appear, when executing the pending change notice for the ceiling, the data of the performance scenario is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 243. The information is stored in the storage area and used as appropriate when executing the pending change notice for the ceiling. This realizes the appearance of a normal look-ahead notice (pending change notice, look-ahead notice during fluctuation) and a look-ahead notice exclusively for ceilings (ceiling change notice).

After the command analysis process is finished, scenario update process is executed (step S1009). In this scenario update process, the contents of a timer necessary for executing the performance scenario are updated, and processing is executed to proceed with the performance scenario based on the timer value. A typical example of the timer is a performance scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the timing of production. For example, within a variable period in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (decorative pattern variable period), which is substantially the same period as a variable period in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (special pattern variable period), that time This timer manages the temporal schedule of what kind of performance pattern, time width, and what kind of performance means to appear on the axis. Such a performance scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the performance accessory motion update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this performance scenario timer is monitored, and when the time for occurrence of the first performance arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and liquid crystal commands for controlling the image display are created, and each is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. . The LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory movement update process (step S1053) described later. Ru.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be played, the phrases, volume, etc. are adjusted based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control section (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control section. As a result, sound production is realized in accordance with the production scenario.

Next, an LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for light display devices such as the decorative lamp 13 and various performance LEDs is created based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and Turn on and blink the LED. As a result, a light production in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the production software random number update process of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Performance control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, timer interrupt processing on the production control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the production control side timer interrupt processing. This performance control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the performance control side main process.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 in a predetermined location. Store in area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. 19 when displaying player participation-type effects, menu screens, information regarding menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect single presses, long presses, repeated presses, etc.

Next, performance accessory motion update processing is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory motion update process, processing is performed to create motor control data for the movable accessory based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the performance accessory motion update process is output to the drive control section. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable accessory motor of the movable accessory to be operated, and controls the operation thereof. As a result, a movable performance using movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) in accordance with the performance scenario is realized.

Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command sending process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. Executes display control. As a result, image performance is realized in accordance with the performance scenario.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting effects based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is finished, the saved contents of the register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is ended, and the main process on the effect control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modification example 1 of benefit provision form: Figure 33]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling benefit is given when a predetermined number of games are played without winning a jackpot during the normal mode (at least when the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ).

<Assignment form (α): Figure 33 (a)>
(α) When the number of games executed is counted regardless of the gaming mode or internal gaming state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a jackpot. (See Figure 33 (a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the number of games executed in the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed during the time saving mode (time saving state) or the variable probability mode (variable probability state) is counted. Therefore, ceiling benefits can be given purely depending on how many games the player has become addicted to since winning the jackpot this time.

<Assignment form (β): Figure 33 (b)>
(β) Count the number of games in the "gaming state with low probability state (low probability gaming state)" and ensure that the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning the jackpot. ), a ceiling benefit will be given. In this example, the number of games executed during a gaming state with a high probability state (high probability gaming state) is excluded from the count. Here, the "gaming state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the gaming mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 33 (B) typically shows time saving jackpot 1 (transition destination gaming state is time saving A), probability variable jackpot 3 (transition destination gaming state is ST25 mode (probability variation C)), and probability variation jackpot 2 (transition destination gaming state This shows a case in which the state is ST75 mode (probability variable B)) and the probability variable jackpot 1 (the destination gaming state is ST100 mode (probability variable A)) are applied to this example (granting form (β)). In the illustration, in order to make it easier to compare the three, all three are shown as "a jackpot that grants 100 electric support points." For each jackpot, the required number of games (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) is as follows.

Referring to FIG. 33(b), in the case of time saving A jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the game is transferred to a time saving state where the number of time reductions is 100, and the 100 time reductions are counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time Saving A" in FIG. 33(b)).
On the other hand, in the case of the ST mode transition opportunity jackpot, the number of games from the end of the electric support until the ceiling is reached differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, with reference to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG. 33 (b),
In the case of ST25 mode (25 ST times + 75 time saving times), the 75 time saving times after the end of ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
In the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), the 25 times of time saving after the end of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 STs), the 100 games until the end of the electric support are in the ST mode, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the relatively lower the profit level of the ST mode, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the ceiling number of games.

To summarize the relationships shown in the figure, regarding the above-mentioned "number of required games In other words, the more you move to a gaming mode with a relatively lower profit level (internal gaming gaming state), the more the required number of games from the end of the electric support until reaching the ceiling (the number of required games during normal mode (normal state)). This is a unique relationship in which it decreases. This "reducing the number of games required to be played in normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a relief function that is different from the ceiling benefit.

<Application form (γ): Figure 33 (c)>
(γ) The number of games in a specific variable pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and a ceiling benefit is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning a jackpot. To make this example easier to understand, we will use a virtual gaming machine to create two game modes corresponding to the normal mode, ``Normal A mode'' and ``Normal B mode,'' which have different variable pattern selection modes. The explanation will be given by taking as an example a gaming machine that can control transitions between a plurality of gaming machine modes. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), for example, the number of games to be counted is the number of games executed in the "normal B mode". In this case, games played in "Normal A mode" are not counted, so no matter how many games are played in Normal A mode, ceiling benefits will not be awarded. It may be configured such that a ceiling benefit is awarded when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number. In addition, the transition conditions between "Normal A mode" and "Normal B mode" (transition conditions of variable pattern selection mode) include, for example, "mode transition occurs when winning a small hit" or "number of games executed ( mode transition occurs depending on the number of fluctuations). By using this example, it is possible to create gameplay as shown in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case where the change pattern selection mode shifts due to a small winning win]
A case will be described in which a change in the variable pattern selection mode occurs due to a small winning. As an example of this case, for example, if a small hit (probability of winning 1/50) is set on the special map 1 side and the small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition to the variable pattern selection mode. If you win a small win again (fall lottery) during the "normal B mode", the game will change to "normal A mode". Shift (shift to normal A mode after small winning game). Regarding the granting of ceiling benefits, if you get addicted to a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) without winning a small hit or a jackpot during "normal B mode" (normally if you lose 70 games in a row during normal B mode) case) Grant ceiling benefits.

In this case, no matter how much you are addicted to normal mode A, you will not be given a ceiling benefit, but if you are addicted to 70 games during normal B mode, you will be given a ceiling benefit. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel gaming experience in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege awarding chance period", that is, a "chance zone" that is advantageous to the player. Note that multiple small wins may be provided; for example, if the first small win is won during the normal A mode, the mode will be shifted to the normal B mode, and if the second small win is won during the normal B mode, the normal A mode will be transferred. mode. In this case, the first small win and the second small win may have different winning probabilities or may have the same winning probability. In addition, it is possible to determine the probability of winning a small win according to the set value. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the first small win (the small win that normally triggers the transition to B mode (chance zone)), and the higher the probability of winning the second small win (the trigger that normally triggers the transition to A mode). If the probability of winning (small win) is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. In other words, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of awarding the ceiling benefit. Note that the probability of winning a small win, the variable pattern selection mode for counting, and the number of games with ceiling benefits can be determined as appropriate in consideration of gameplay.

[B: Case where the variation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of variations]
Next, a case will be described in which a change in the variation pattern selection mode occurs due to the number of variations. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition to the variable pattern selection mode, if the first number of games (for example, 50 games) is played during the normal A mode, the transition is made to the "normal B mode"; When a second number of games (for example, 40 games) are played during the playback period, the mode is shifted to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), a ceiling benefit is given. In this example, if the mode is shifted to the normal B mode 10 times, the ceiling number of games can be reached at 400 games. In addition, instead of setting the number of games that reach the ceiling as a fixed number, for example, multiple types of number of games such as 400 games, 600 games, 800 games, etc. can be set, and one of the number of games can be determined by lottery. It's okay. In this case, the number of games reaching the ceiling is randomized, making the game more interesting. In addition, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the setting value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, it is also possible to give the player a setting guess factor based on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, instead of counting the number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode, the count may be based on "the number of times transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode" are made. In this case, a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of times of transition to a specific variation pattern selection mode (in this example, normal B mode) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of the number of transitions described above are provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.), and any one of the number of transitions can be determined by lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, it is also possible to give the player a setting guess factor based on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times the regular symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of fluctuations of the regular symbol)" is counted. Good too. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of normal symbols" during a gaming state with a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the normal pattern fluctuation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
In addition, the number of wins of "small wins" in which the (ε) conditional device does not operate is counted, and a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number without winning a jackpot. For example, if the probability of winning a small winning is set to 1/100, and the winning of a small winning reaches 10 times, a ceiling benefit is given. In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "small winning", the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small winning game is executed) when winning the small winning may be counted. Alternatively, a plurality of types of winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times), and any one of the winning times may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of wins (for example, 7 times), and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of wins (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability for each number of winnings is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the number of games reaching the ceiling, it is possible to give a set guess factor to the player (the same applies to the "giving form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
In addition, (ζ) The number of winnings of "assistance winnings" is counted, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins at least in a gaming state (normal state and/or potential state) with a low probability state (normal symbol probability changing function not activated) in which the lottery probability of winning the assistance is low. In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "assistance win", the number of times the general electricity release game is executed may be counted.

The awarding forms (ε) and (ζ) described above are characterized in that the conditions for awarding the ceiling benefit do not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations).

Note that in the above embodiment, the award form (α) and the award form (β) are explained as giving a ceiling benefit when a predetermined number of games (ceiling number of games) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above-mentioned grant form (γ), the number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (a lottery for the number of ceiling games). Specifically, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of ceiling game numbers (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games), and make it possible to determine one of the ceiling game numbers by lottery. In this case as well, the lottery probability for each number of ceiling games is adjusted according to the setting value, such that the higher the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of games. can be determined.

[Modified example 2 of benefit provision form (divided benefit provision form): Figure 34]
In the above-mentioned embodiment and modification 1 of the benefit provision mode, the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling benefit is awarded in the 1000th game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting multiple (at least two) triggers for triggering benefits (minimum benefit granting triggers), it is possible to grant major benefits (e.g., benefits equivalent to ceiling benefits) through the minor benefits granted by each trigger. (divided benefit provision form). Modified Example 2 utilizes multiple opportunity to activate the benefit, rather than the purpose of ``granting the benefit to save the player from getting addicted'' to a specific gaming state (for example, the normal state). The purpose of "base up" in normal mode)) is strong.

As a representative example of this second modification, for example, an upper limit is set on the number of times saved between jackpots, and the upper limit number of times saved is divided into a plurality of times and provided. Specifically, the "major benefit" (equivalent to a ceiling benefit) of a finite time reduction of 100 times is divided into four "small benefits" of a finite time reduction of 25 times (divided award). It is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of time reductions to be granted (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit number of time reductions") is X times, the number of times of grant is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of time reductions is divided (hereinafter referred to as "number of divided time reductions") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Z"),
"ΣZk=X k=1~Y"...Formula (10)
satisfy. For example, if the upper limit number of time reductions X is 100 times and the number of split grants Y is 4 times, the total number of split time reductions (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) in the case of 4 grants before winning the next jackpot is 100 times of the upper limit number of time savings. The time saving state is applied so that the number of times (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4=100) is obtained. Note that the number of divided time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of time reduction divisions, or may be the number of time reduction divisions at least one of which is different. In other words, a structure may be adopted in which small benefits of the same or substantially the same benefit are provided in installments, or a structure in which different small benefits are provided in installments. As an example of the former, for example, the number of time reductions of 25 times is divided into 4 times and the upper limit of the number of time reductions is 100 times (the same number of divided time savings is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the number of time reductions from the first to the fourth time is given. The number of divided time reductions is set to ``20, 20, 20, and 40'' (partially different number of divided time reduction), and ``15, 35, 20, and 30'' (each with different divided time reduction). number of times), etc. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a relatively large number of addictive games is provided with a small benefit that has a relatively high degree of profit. For example, the number of time reductions for the first to fourth divisions can be set to "10 times, 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times."

It should be noted that the values to be set for the upper limit number of time reductions X, the number of grants Y, and the number of divided time reductions Z can be determined as appropriate in consideration of the gameplay and the like. For example, the upper limit number of time reductions X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship "upper limit number of time reductions X>maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot". However, in order to avoid giving excessive benefits, the upper limit of the number of time savings It is preferable that the relationship satisfies "number of time savings X<maximum number of time savings due to jackpot (100 times)".

In addition, there only need to be multiple triggers for triggering the benefit (number of times Y). It is also possible to appropriately determine the number of games in a state to be awarded, and the number of games played in a specific game state to be awarded.

In addition, after the maximum number of time reductions (big benefit) is granted, no further time savings will be granted, and no benefits will be granted until the next jackpot. After the granting of the big bonus is finished, it is assumed that a sufficient bonus has been granted, in other words, the relief function has been fulfilled, and the bonus will not be granted until the next jackpot. However, ceiling benefits (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be provided separately. For example, after the divisional benefit award ends, if a predetermined number of games is played 1000 games without winning the next jackpot, a ceiling benefit can be awarded. Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation opportunities. In this case, when the opportunity for activating the bonus (a bonus awarding game) arrives, it is possible to obtain setting suggestion information in addition to the bonus award, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, here, a configuration has been described in which a finite time reduction is given as a major benefit, but it goes without saying that it can also be applied to a finite variable or a finite potential. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time saving number" is replaced with "ST number" and "time saving state" is read as "definite variable state" or "potential definite state", the finite variable (large benefit) can be divided and granted (small benefit). It is obvious that the concept is a configuration in which a finite probability variable is granted multiple times) or a configuration in which a finite potential probability (major benefit) is dividedly granted (a small benefit finite potential is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit number of time reductions X may be read as "upper limit number of ST times X", the number of divided time reductions Z may be read as "number of divided ST times", etc. as appropriate. As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be granted (upper limit ST number) is set to (k=1 to Y), it can be interpreted as satisfying "ΣZk=X k=1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: Fig. 34)
This modification (modification 2) can be roughly divided into a "periodic grant form" in which benefits are given periodically (regularly), such as "a small benefit is given every time a predetermined number of games are played." ” and an “aperiodic allocation form” in which allocation is not performed periodically. First, the periodic application mode will be explained using FIG. 34.

[Periodic grant form]
<A. Specific example 1 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34A shows an example of a periodic application form (application form (κ)). FIG. 34(a) shows that every time the symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of electric support due to a jackpot (p0 in the figure), p1, p3, p5, p7) shown in the figure, a small benefit of "limited time savings of 25 times (divided time savings 25 times)" is given. Here, the number of grants will be 4 times, and by granting these four small benefits in total, we will complete the granting of the major benefit, "Limited time reduction with 100 times of time reduction (time reduction state with upper limit of 100 times of time reduction)" This shows a case where

In detail, as shown in Figure 34 (a), the 100 games from the 1st to 100th games (p1) after the end of electric support (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without split grants), and the 101st game is controlled to the normal state. When the first benefit activation opportunity (benefit granting opportunity) arrives, a limited time reduction (25 times of time reduction) as a small benefit is granted, and the 25 games from the 101st to the 125th game (p2) are controlled to be in a time reduction state. (Controlled to shorten working hours due to initial small benefits).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled again to the normal state (period without split grants), and the second benefit activation opportunity arrives in the 226th game, and the limited time reduction of the small benefit ( 25 times) is given, and the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th game (p4) are controlled to be in a time-saving state (controlled to be in a time-saving state due to the second small benefit).
Next, the 100 games from the 251st to the 350th game (p5) are controlled again to the normal state (period without split grants), and the third benefit activation opportunity arrives in the 351st game, and the limited time reduction of the small benefit ( 25 time saving times) is given, and the time saving state is controlled from the 351st to the 375th game (p6) (the time saving state is controlled by the third small bonus).
Then, from the 376th to the 475th game (p7), it is controlled again to the normal state, and in the 476th game, the opportunity to activate the final (4th) benefit comes, and the limited time reduction of the small benefit (25 times of time reduction) is activated. It is granted, and the time saving state is controlled from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (the time saving state is controlled by the 4th small benefit), and with this, the granting of the major benefit "Limited time saving with 100 time saving times" is completed. do. In other words, a small benefit (25 time reductions) will be given periodically (every 100 games) divided into 4 times, and if you get addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, you will receive all of the upper limit of 100 time reductions. Become. In other words, such a grant form is the same as granting a maximum of 4 sets, where 1 set is the playing period of "100 games executed during normal state + 25 times of time saving", and the limiter function is not activated. It can also be said to be a special benefit granting function. Although the production mode is not shown, as in the above embodiments (FIGS. 6 and 7), if it is in the normal state (normal mode), it will be in the normal production mode, and if it is in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), it will be in the normal production mode. For example, it may be configured to be able to control transition to a performance mode according to the game state, such as a time-saving performance mode (air battle mode).

(In case of granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, a configuration has been described in which a finite time saving is given in installments as a major benefit, but it is also possible to have an arrangement in which the upper limit of the number of working hours is infinite, that is, an "infinite time saving" is given in installments. If the major benefit is "infinite time saving," for example, a predetermined number of times of divided time saving (minor benefit) may be permanently granted every 100 games until the next jackpot is won. Further, as in FIG. 34(a), 25 division time reductions are given every 100 games, but an infinite number of division time reductions may be given to the 476th game (p7 of the last assignment). In this case, the time saving state can continue even after the 501st game. Of course, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which infinite probability changes and infinite potentials with an infinite upper limit ST number are divided and provided. In this case, as described above, the above-mentioned "time saving number" may be read as "ST number", and "time saving state" may be read as "probable variable state" or "potential state" as appropriate.

<B. Specific example 2 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 34 (b)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), a periodic grant form in which "ceiling benefits are given in installments" has been explained. Next, as other periodic grant forms, the profit status granted by winning a jackpot is "infinite time shortening", "finite time shortening", "infinite definite variable", "finite definite variable", "infinite potential", or "finite A configuration (awarding form (λ)) in which a benefit such as "Positive Determined" is dividedly provided based on multiple privilege activation triggers will be explained.

In this example, the benefits of time saving states (infinite time saving, finite time saving), variable probability states (infinite probability variation, finite probability variation), and potential states (infinite potential probability, finite potential probability), etc., which are granted by winning the jackpot, can be obtained multiple times. The structure is such that the benefits are awarded in installments depending on the trigger for the benefit activation. In other words, instead of immediately giving the total time saving number and the total ST number after the jackpot game as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), the total time saving number and the total ST number are given in small amounts over a long gaming period. This is a good configuration. In this example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the number of time-savings granted due to the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit number of time-savings" (major benefit), and the number of time-savings granted in installments corresponds to the above-mentioned "number of divided time-savings" (small benefit). do. In addition, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or a potential definite jackpot, the number of STs awarded due to the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit number of STs" (major benefit), and the number of STs awarded in installments corresponds to the "divided number of STs" (small benefit). corresponds to A specific example is shown in FIG. 34(b).

FIG. 34(b) shows, as a representative example of this example (granting form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ with different number of time-savings (finite time-saving jackpot with 50 time-savings, finite time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings, The following is an example of a case where you won an infinite time-saving jackpot. Figure (A) shows the case of normal granting in which the number of time savings is awarded without dividing it if the number of time savings is won 50 times (corresponding to time saving jackpot 2 in Figure 4). A case where if you win the time-saving jackpot of 100 time-savers (corresponding to time-saver jackpot 1 in Figure 4), the 100 time-savers are divided into 2 parts (the 50 time-savers are divided into 2 parts). Figure (C) shows a case in which 50 time savings are awarded for the first time, and 50 time savings are awarded for the first time, and 50 time savings are given for the second time. This shows a case where an infinite number of times is given to .

Referring to FIG. 34 (B), as shown in FIGS. (A) to (C), if you win any of the time-saving jackpots α to γ, no matter which jackpot you win, you will first receive the number of time-saving jackpots. 50 times are awarded, and after that, different game transitions are followed depending on the type of jackpot won. Here, as shown in the figure, if the production mode is set to be common, the following gameplay can be created.

(Time-saving number of hidden games)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the type of jackpot won in the performance during the symbol variation display game (such as a preview performance including decorative stop symbols) and the performance during the win is kept secret. The production mode after the jackpot game is also a common time-saving production mode (air battle mode: see Figures 29 to 31) up to the initial time-saving number of 50 times (between 1 and 50 games) (the area from a0 to p0 shown in the figure). ), and the subsequent 51st to 150th games are in a common normal performance mode (for example, general performance mode) (section p0 to p1 in the figure). Therefore, the winning type of jackpot is hidden from the performance until the 150th game has passed, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode will continue from the 151st game (after p1), so at this point, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. That will become clear. However, if the winning jackpot is Time-saving jackpot β or Time-saving jackpot γ, the time-saving state will occur in the 151st game and the time-saving production mode will be entered again, so at this stage, the time-saving jackpot β or Time-saving jackpot Which of γ won is kept secret. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that the time-saving state does not end after 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while hoping to win the time-saving jackpot γ). If the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is confirmed that the winning jackpot is a time-saving jackpot γ, that is, an infinite time-saving, and the player can continue playing under a high base state with peace of mind until the next jackpot. Can be done. In this way, by gradually disclosing the number of time reductions in the concealed state, we can stimulate players' expectations for the continuation of the electric support, a sense of nervousness when the electric support ends, and a sense of elation when it becomes clear that the electric support will continue. It is possible to create such gameplay (time-saving number of hidden games). In addition, under the time-saving state after the 201 game in which infinite time-saving is revealed, the normal time-saving effect mode (air battle mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time-saving effect mode different from the normal time-saving effect mode (for example, , a background display (not shown) different from that in the air battle mode may be displayed to definitively notify that the time is infinitely shortened.

In the above, we have explained the relationship between three time-saving jackpots α to γ with different number of time-savings (finite time-saving jackpot with 50 time-savings, finite time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings, and infinite time-saving jackpot), but at least the number of time-savings If there are two time-saving jackpots with different numbers, it is possible to realize the time-saving number secret game as described above. In addition, in the example of FIG. 34 (b), time-saving jackpots α to γ with different number of time-savings have been explained, but there are multiple probability variable jackpots with different number of STs (for example, finite probability variable jackpot α with 50 times of ST, finite probability variable jackpot with 100 times of ST). The same phenomenon applies to the finite variable jackpot β and the infinite variable jackpot γ), and in this case, it is possible to realize a "ST number secret game" in which the ST number in the hidden state is disclosed in stages.

[Aperiodic grant form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-mentioned granting form (κ) (λ), we explained a form in which small benefits are given periodically, but it is also possible to give small benefits aperiodically (aperiodic granting). form). For example, the privilege activation opportunities are the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of non-periodic awarding, it may be configured such that multiple benefit activation triggers can be determined by lottery, or multiple benefit activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of multiple benefit activation trigger games is predetermined) may be configured. A configuration may also be adopted in which one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by a lottery. Other points (matters related to major benefits, minor benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-mentioned grant form (κ) (λ), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned divided benefit provision mode, a mode has been described in which small benefits are dividedly granted with the profit of the large benefit being the upper limit. However, a structure may be adopted in which the upper limit is not the profit of the large benefit.
For example, a configuration is such that a "specific benefit" is granted periodically or aperiodically, but there is no upper limit to the benefit that can be granted. To put it simply, the major benefit is an infinite benefit (infinite time saving, infinite definite variation, or infinite potential), and the small benefit is a finite benefit (a time saving state of a predetermined number of times, a finite variable of a predetermined number of STs, or a predetermined ST This is a configuration in which small benefits are given periodically or aperiodically until the next jackpot, without any limit to the number of times Y of giving.
However, this example differs from "divided grant" in that there is no limit to the number of grants Y (the number of grants is infinite). To explain this example using, for example, FIG. 34(a), the small benefit "Limited time reduction of 25 times" is periodically granted (awarded every 100 games in the normal state). This is a grant form in which the grant does not end at p8 (4th time), but is permanently granted until the next jackpot is won.
Also, for example, if we explain using Figures 34 (B) and (C), at the point of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be granted to "Infinite Time Saving", we will change the small privilege "Limited Time Saving with 50 Time Savings". , and after p2, the bonus is given periodically (granted every 100 games in the normal state).
Note that when the number of grants reaches a predetermined prescribed number of times or a prescribed prescribed number of games, the advantageous degree (profit state) of the small benefit may be increased. For example, to explain using Figure 34 (a), if the number of grants reaches 10, then the "Number of time reductions" which is relatively more advantageous than the current small benefit "Limited time reduction of 25 times". 50 limited working hours” (medium benefit). The condition for switching from a small benefit to a medium benefit may be when a predetermined number of grants and/or a predetermined number of games are reached.

<Grant form (ξ)>
When the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number, a ceiling benefit can be given. For example, a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number after the power is turned on.
Furthermore, a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number without winning the jackpot. In this case, a ceiling benefit is granted if the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number without winning a jackpot during a specific game mode (for example, normal mode) or a specific internal game state (for example, normal state). You may.

The embodiment described above can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Note that although the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A launching means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 15) that performs a lottery for a plurality of types of winnings, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means (starting ports 34, 35);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, a winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) that controls the execution of the winning game;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that displays symbols in a variable manner and displays the lottery results by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbols,
Game state control means capable of controlling a low probability game state with a low probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability, and a high probability game state with a high probability state in which the probability of winning is higher than the normal probability. (S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22),
After the predetermined start condition is established, the winning game execution control means does not generate the winning game, and the number of symbol variations executed in the low probability gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). Privilege game state control means (FIG. 7 (ceiling mode, heaven mode column), FIG. S420 to S421, S412, FIGS. 13 to 15, FIG. 23, FIG. 33, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, a time-saving state) that controls the ball entering the starting means into an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) accompanied by an advantageous ball entering state (for example, a state with electric support) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state; 6 (time saving mode column), S412 of FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIGS. 16A to 16B, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, etc.),
The advantageous gaming state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous gaming state after the winning game.
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) The above-mentioned bonus gaming state and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, a case where the number of time savings due to a ceiling benefit is different from the number of time savings due to a jackpot),
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(4) The above advantageous gaming state control means is
Depending on the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, Time Saving B) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, Time Saving A) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state. configured to be at least controllable,
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(5) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Controlling the bonus game state to be the first advantageous game state (for example, a case where a time-saving state is granted where the number of time-savings due to the ceiling benefit is the same as time-saving B, 50 times);
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Controlling the bonus game state to be the second advantageous game state (for example, a case where a time-saving state is granted where the number of time-savings due to the ceiling benefit is the same as time-saving A, 100 times);
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(7) Further comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 24) capable of controlling a plurality of types of performance modes related to the gaming state, the performance mode related to the bonus gaming state and the performance mode related to the advantageous gaming state are different. is a production mode (for example, time-saving production mode (Fig. 6, Fig. 29), heaven production mode (Fig. 7)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized in that:

Furthermore, the application forms (application forms (α) to (μ): FIGS. 33 to 34) relating to the above-described embodiments and their modifications can be the following (configurations A) to (configurations G).
(Configuration A)
a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winnings in response to the detection of a game ball by the starting means;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and displays a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol;
A gaming machine comprising a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on predetermined generation conditions,
The above means of generating profit status are:
A winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when a lottery is won by the lottery means;
a first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the winning game ends;
a second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific occurrence condition is satisfied without the winning game being executed after a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
A gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that:
(Configuration C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The gaming machine according to configuration A above.
(Configuration D)
The profit state is lower in the second profit state than in the first profit state,
The gaming machine according to configuration A above.
(Configuration E)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when a predetermined gaming period has elapsed,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is met, and then ends once a predetermined gaming period has elapsed, and the second profit state is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is met again. ,
The gaming machine according to configuration A or configuration B above.
(Configuration F)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed,
The second profit state starts after the specific occurrence condition is met and continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to configuration A or configuration C above.
(Configuration G)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when the first gaming period has elapsed,
The second profit state starts after the specific occurrence condition is met, ends when a second gaming period shorter than the first gaming period has elapsed, and ends when the specific occurrence condition is met again. 2 The profit state is resumed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D.

<Ball output performance with electric support>
Incidentally, in recent years, due to legal requirements, it has been required to moderately suppress the excitement of gambling. In the time saving state or variable probability state, the electric support is present, and the base state is controlled to be higher than the normal state (low base state without electric support). This electric support state (high base state) is a gaming state advantageous to the player in that he can aim for the next jackpot win without reducing the number of balls he has compared to the normal state. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "number of safe pitches/number of out pitches" x 100) is excessively lowered in order to suppress the desire for gambling, players may The speed at which the number of balls decreases becomes faster, which not only reduces the player's desire to play, but also results in an increase in the amount of money spent by the player (amount spent). This reduces the player's desire to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability variation is given as a ceiling benefit, most players will continue playing until the next jackpot is won, so the more games it takes until the next jackpot, the more The number of balls you have will also decrease. In other words, the players are faced with a situation where they become addicted to the game and the investment amount increases even during the ceiling bonus, which significantly reduces their desire to play. In this way, even if you continue playing in order to benefit from the ceiling bonus, the amount of money spent increases, the significance of the ceiling function as a relief function is lost, and it ends up fueling the desire for gambling. The problem is that this cannot happen either.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to prevent the ball possession from decreasing drastically. For example, it can be said that it is appropriate for the ball payout rate (base value) in the high base state to be at least "100%≦ball payout rate" from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's desire to play and gambling spirit. Preferably, "100%≦ball release rate≦120% to 130%". A specific configuration for realizing such a high base state ball payout rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of this embodiment, as already explained, depending on the game state, the game is divided into either "left-handed" or "right-handed" which is more advantageous, so if there is no electric support, it is "advantageous to hit left-handed". Therefore, there is a possibility of winning in the general winning openings 43a to 43d (first general winning means) that belong to the left downstream route 3b and the upper starting opening 34 (first starting means), but the winnings belong to the right downstream route 3c. No prizes are won in the general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means). On the other hand, if there is an electric support, it will be "advantageous to hit right", so there is a possibility of winning in the general prize opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special drawing 2 starting opening) that belong to the right downstream route 3c. , there will be no winnings in the general winning openings 43a to 43d and the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) that belong to the left downstream route 3b. In addition, in general gaming machines, the ball payout rate (ball payout rate at low base) without electric support (normal state or potential state) is approximately 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably (less than 50%), the ball payout rate (ball payout rate during high base) with electric support (time saving state or variable probability state) is approximately 80% to 95%, and the ball payout rate is less than 100% in both cases ( ). If we explain this using the gaming machine 1, the expected design value of the ball output rate is, for example, the average number of winning balls per minute in the state without electric support, and the general winning slots 43a to 43d (number of prize balls: 3). are 2, 0.6, 0.4, and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting opening 34 (number of prize balls 4) is "5.52", the ball output rate at low base is 34.2%, and on the other hand, regarding the average number of prizes per minute without electric support, the general prize opening 43e (number of prize balls 3) was 12.5, the lower starting hole 35 (number of prize balls 1) ) is 58.2, the ball payout rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which requires the ball to be hit either "left-handed" or "right-handed" depending on the gaming state, the above-mentioned high base ball output rate is In order not to reduce the number extremely, the layout and configuration of the general winning openings 43a to 43e (number of prize balls: 3), upper starting opening 34 (number of winning balls: 4), and lower starting opening 35 (number of winning balls: 1) and the award This can be achieved by adjusting the number of pitches. Specifically, this can be achieved by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and/or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the normal variable winning device 41 side (starting opening with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls in the general winning hole that belongs to the right downstream path 3c is determined to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning hole that belongs to the left downstream path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting opening 35 is determined to be greater than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the left downstream route 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the general winning hole and the lower starting hole 35 that belong to the right downstream path 3c is determined to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning hole that belongs to the left downstream path 3b. For example, the number of general winning openings 43e may be four, the number of lower starting openings 35 may be two, and so on.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning holes 43e (increase the number of general winning holes belonging to the right downstream path 3c from 1 to 2, and increase the number of winnings (number of winnings/minute) for the general winning holes when hitting right-handed. raise the bottom). Specifically, the configuration is such that the number of general winning holes belonging to the right downstream path 3c (number of installations) is greater than the number of general winning holes (number of installations) belonging to the left downstream path 3b. In this embodiment, four general winning holes (general winning holes 43a to 43d) belonging to the left downstream route 3b are arranged, but for example, one general winning opening 43e belonging to the right downstream route 3c is arranged. For example, the number may be 2 to 4, which is more than that.

(C) Increase the winning rate (entering rate) of at least the general winning hole 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 balls/minute to 20 balls/minute). When providing a plurality of general winning holes 43e, the winning rate of at least one is increased. Specifically, the ball entry rate M of the general winning hole belonging to the right downstream path 3c is set to be higher than the ball entering rate N of the general winning hole belonging to the left downstream path 3b.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since a plurality of general winning holes 43a to 43d are arranged, it may be configured as follows. If the lowest ball entry rate among the general winning slots 43a to 43d is set as "Nmin" and the highest ball entry rate is set as "Nmax", the structure is configured to satisfy the following relational expression (Formula 1) or (Formula 2). can do.
(Formula 1) “Nmin<M”
(Formula 2) “Nmax<M”
Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, there is one general winning a prize opening 43e, but when a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following configuration may be adopted. Among the plurality of general winning holes 43e, when the ball entering rate of the lowest general winning hole 43e is "Mmin" and the highest ball entering rate is "Mmax", the following relational expressions (Formula 3) to (Formula 6) ) can be configured to satisfy any of the following.
(Formula 3) "N<Mmin" (when there is one general prize opening belonging to the left downstream route 3b)
(Formula 4) “Nmin<Mmin”
(Formula 5) “Nmax<Mmin”
(Formula 6) “Nmax<Mmax”

(D) Start INT (interval time until the start of opening of the movable blade 47) and/or end INT (interval time from the end of the opening operation of the movable wing 47 until the end of the general power release game) of the general power release game ) (e.g., start INT and/or end INT from 500ms to 700ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand (increase the ball output rate) by so-called "stop hitting" which avoids wasted balls (dead balls) when the ball is hit. For example, when the ball is hit all the way, the ball payout rate (BA) is about 95%, and when the ball is stopped and hit, the ball payout rate (BA) can be about 120%. This stopping is particularly effective when the number of prize balls in the lower starting hole 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4 balls).

(E) Provide one or more small hits that cause a small winning game operation in which the number of balls that come out during a small winning game does not increase or the number of balls that come out decreases. ). For example, the opening time of the grand prize opening is set to a short time (about 0.1 seconds to 1 second), and the "start INT and/or end INT (the total time of each INT)", which is the closing period of the grand prize opening, is set to a second time. This is a small winning game operation in which the order is for a long time (for example, about 1 to 5 seconds). In such small winning games, the ball output performance is low, and if you leave the game ball unattended, the number of balls that come out may not increase (the ball output rate during the small winning game is 100%), or the number of balls that come out may decrease. (The ball payout rate during small winning games is less than 100%). In this case, as in the above-mentioned (D), if you make full use of "stop hitting" during the start INT and end INT, you can increase the number of balls you have, contrary to the ball output performance during the small winning game. Therefore, the ball payout rate can be improved. In particular, the effect will be further enhanced if the probability of winning a small win is high (increasing the frequency of occurrence of small winning games), for example, if the probability of winning is at least 1/5 to 1/20.

(F) The number of prize balls in the lower starting hole 35 is determined to be smaller than the number of prize balls in the upper starting hole 34. If the number of prize balls on the starting hole side, which can frequently win during electric support, is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of creating a sense of inequality among players. . Therefore, it is preferable to set the winning opening that greatly affects the ball output rate as a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly the general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c).

(G) The number of prize balls for the lower starting opening 35 is determined to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the general winning opening belonging to the right downstream route 3c. Compared to the number of winning balls in the "lower start opening 35" where there is a difference in the winning rate due to stopping, the number of winning balls in the "general winning opening (general winning opening 43e) belonging to the right downstream route 3c" where there is no difference in winning rate due to stopping. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the element of strategy by stopping the ball.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting hole 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning hole belonging to the right downstream path 3c is at least two. If the number of prize balls for the lower starting hole 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase in number of balls will be 0, so let's aim for the opening operation of the lower starting hole 35 and make full use of the stop shot. In either case, the number of balls held by the player does not increase. Therefore, by setting the number of prize balls in the lower starting hole 35 to one and the number of prize balls in the general winning hole belonging to the right downstream path 3c to at least two, the element of winning by stopping the ball is completely eliminated, and the winning ball number is at least two. It is possible to improve the ball rate.

In addition, in the case of (D) or (E) above, there is a possibility that a sense of inequality in the profits obtained may be caused between those who make full use of tsume-uchi and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt the above-mentioned configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) regarding the general winning opening without the stopping effect. In particular, the configurations (B), (C), (F) to (H) described above are effective in reducing the stopping effect and improving the ball delivery rate. In addition, the number of the general winning openings belonging to the left downstream route 3c or the general winning openings belonging to the right downstream route 3c can be one or more.

<Variations regarding model type>
In this embodiment, an ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, but may also be a model in which the transition form of the gaming state is determined as follows, for example, the following models (machine 1) to (machine 3).

(Machine 1) "V fixed type"
A specific area through which the game ball can pass is set up inside the grand prize opening, and if one or more specific jackpots (for example, probability-variable jackpots 1 to 7) are won, the game ball can easily pass through that specific area (passable). ), on the other hand, if another jackpot (for example, time-saving jackpot 1 or 2) is won, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through the specific area, and if the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called " It is also possible to use a so-called "V probability variable type" machine in which a special symbol probability variation function is activated and the machine shifts to a probability variation state or a potential probability state only for "V winnings").

(Machine 2) “Falling Lottery Type”
If you are in a gaming state with a high probability state (potential state or variable state), a so-called "falling lottery" is held to transition from a high probability state to a low probability state (falling lottery) with a predetermined probability of falling every game. It may also be a "lottery type" model. In this falling lottery type, if you win the falling lottery, the winning game (falling game) will be shifted to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability change function is set to OFF), and the jackpot lottery in the winning game will also be in a low probability state. The lottery will be held. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition form when winning the falling lottery. (A) Definite variable state (ST mode) → Time saving state (Time saving mode), (B) Definite variable state → Normal state (Normal mode), (C) Potential definite state (Positive definite mode) → Normal state (Normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, the falling game is shifted to a game state with at least a low probability state. Therefore, when a game executed in a normal state or a time-saving state is to be counted as a ceiling game, it is preferable to count a falling game as the first game. Note that, excluding the falling game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type machine described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) mainly refer to "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the fall lottery result". The only difference is the presence or absence of a fall transition control means. Therefore, the matters related to the gameplay described in this embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) can be applied to the embodiment related to the ST mode before winning the falling lottery (in the case of a gaming state with a high probability state). After winning the falling lottery (if you win the falling lottery and moving to a gaming state with a low probability state), the embodiment regarding the normal state and time-saving state (the gaming state to which the falling will transition) Applicable.

By the way, in the conventional falling lottery type, there is only one type of falling probability regardless of the type of jackpot (type of winning symbol), and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, multiple types of fall probabilities are provided depending on the type of jackpot. In this case, each jackpot may have a different falling probability, or some of the falling probabilities may be the same or different. If it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is of the "fall lottery type", the probability of falling is, for example, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 (special figure 1 side), Jackpots 4 to 7 (special chart 2 side) are 1/240, so if you win a jackpot that belongs to the special chart 1 side, there are different falling probabilities, and if you win a jackpot on the special chart 2 side, the falling probability is the same. It can be done. Moreover, as means for providing multiple types of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine fall probabilities according to set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the fall probability can be configured to be different between at least the first set value and the second set value. For example, it can be determined that the lower the set value is, the higher the probability of falling is.

Further, regarding the number of STs, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different, or the number of STs may be partially different. Further, the number of ST times can include not only a finite number of times but also an infinite number of times. For example, like the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be set to 25, 75, or 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be set to 100 or an infinite number of times. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if you win the falling lottery before the ST number is exhausted, you will be forcibly shifted to a low probability state (the ST number will be forcibly reduced to zero). Furthermore, when the player wins the fall lottery, the presentation means may be configured to be able to perform a setting suggestion presentation (a setting suggestion presentation at the time of a fall). In this case, the execution probability of the fall setting suggestion effect can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned falling lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be adopted.
(T1)
Acquisition means (for example, FIG. 11 S314: In the case of this example, it is configured to be able to obtain a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for special symbol determination, a random number for fluctuation pattern, and a random number for fall determination),
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding multiple types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol fluctuation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to a symbol stop display mode;
A winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) that controls the execution of a winning game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win);
After the winning game is completed, probability fluctuation control means (S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. , Fig. 21, Fig. 22) and
When in the high probability state, a fall lottery means (main control unit 20);
A gaming machine T comprising a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) that controls the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won,
The plurality of types of wins include at least a first win and a second win,
In the case where the above first win is won (when the winning game based on the first winning is executed) and when the above second winning is won (when the winning game due to the second winning is executed), the above The falling lottery probability by the falling lottery means can be configured to be different.

(T2)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result is different depending on a setting value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value, and the first setting value and the second setting value are configured to have different falling probabilities. be able to.

(T3)
The gaming machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result is different depending on a set value that can be changed in multiple stages,
The plurality of types of wins include at least a first win and a second win,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The falling lottery probability by the falling lottery means is configured to be different depending on when the first winning is won and when the second winning is winning,
When the set value is the first set value, the lottery result by the lottery means may not include at least a second win.

The gaming machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including a variable probability state and/or a probability state among a variable probability state, a probability state, a time saving state, and a normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3)), it is possible to further include a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance that suggests the current setting value when winning the fall lottery by the fall lottery means. .

(Machine 3) “Limiter equipped type”
When a jackpot is won (or even when a specific jackpot is won), the probability fluctuation control means has a limiter function that limits the number of times the state is shifted to a high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number of times (limit number). It may also be a "limiter equipped type" model. This limiter-equipped type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter-equipped type, until the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined limit (until the number of consecutive activations of the conditional device reaches a predetermined upper limit), the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to a gaming state with a high probability state ( (definite state or potential state). For example, if the limit number of times is 5, the gaming state after the jackpot game from the first jackpot to the fourth jackpot will be controlled to a high probability state, and the benefit of the jackpot lottery under the high probability state until the maximum of 4 jackpots. It is now possible to receive. However, when you win the fifth jackpot, the "limiter function" starts operating as the limit has been reached (limiter function ON), and the gaming state after the jackpot game is a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state). or normal state). If you win a jackpot while this limiter function is active, the active limiter function will be canceled (limiter function OFF), and the gaming state after the jackpot game will change to a gaming state with a high probability state until the limit number is reached again. be done. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit of 5 times is also called a "5 times pack machine".

By the way, conventional limiter machines have only one type of limit number, and the game tends to be monotonous, lacking the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided depending on the type of jackpot. In this case, the number of limits may be different for each jackpot, or the number of limits may be partially different.

For example, jackpots A to D can be provided, and the limit number of jackpots A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, or 5. Further, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be determined as appropriate. Further, depending on which jackpot has been won, it can be determined as appropriate whether to shift to the variable probability state or to the potential state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the variable probability state or the probability state, or only one or more specific jackpots may be shifted to the variable probability state (for example, if jackpot A is won, (If the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, the state will be shifted to a probable state.) Further, the number of STs is preferably an infinite number of times, but the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different for each jackpot, or the number of STs may be partially different. In addition, if the number of STs is limited, even if the ST number ends and the state is changed to the normal state or time saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be changed to the high probability state again until the limit number is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state with In addition, when winning a specific jackpot among jackpots A to D, it is possible to shift to a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to a high probability state, or to change to a time saving state. It can be determined as appropriate whether to transition or to the normal state.

In the case of the above-mentioned limiter machine, the matters related to the gameplay described in this embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) are applied to the embodiment regarding the ST mode regarding the gaming state with a high probability state before the limiter number is reached. This is possible, and with respect to a gaming state involving a low probability state after reaching the limit number of times, it is applicable to embodiments related to the normal state and the time saving state (gaming state after reaching the limit number of times).

(30. Modification example when applying a time-saving state: modification example Ω)
In the embodiments described above, a configuration having a ceiling function as a stuck relief function has been described. Specifically, it was explained that if the ceiling number of games is reached without winning a jackpot, the ceiling function will be activated and, for example, "finite time savings" or "infinite time savings" (ceiling benefits) will be granted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows.

In this example, as one of the addictive relief functions, or in order to expand the degree of freedom in the game and improve the fun of the game, we will introduce the following function without using the jackpot win (time-saving jackpot win) or reaching the ceiling game as an opportunity: The idea is to give them a chance to transition to a ``time-saving state''. In addition, the point that a time-saving state is given by a time-saving jackpot is as already explained using several cases. This example has a major feature not found in the past in that a time-saving state is granted without going through a jackpot win or a ceiling.

In this example, it is possible to configure the time saving state to be granted based on the following triggers (conditions), for example.

(A) A time-saving state is granted based on the jackpot lottery. This includes the following (A-1) "Normal lottery format", (A-2) "Win type lottery format", and (A-3) "Loss type lottery format", but any lottery The format can also be adopted. Here, in order to make this example easier to understand, the hit types shown in Figure 4 (probable variable jackpots 1 to 7, time-saving jackpots 1 to 2) and the loss types (loss type) shown in Figure 26 are used as jackpot lottery targets. A configuration in which A and B) are provided will be explained as a representative example. These lottery formats will be explained below.

(A-1: Normal lottery format)
"Normal lottery format" refers to a time-saving state that is applied to a target of a "win/loss lottery" that uses random numbers for determining a jackpot (see the random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410) shown in FIG. 12). Alternatively, multiple types of "time-saving awarding symbols" are provided, and the above-mentioned symbol lottery uses the winning/losing lottery results and the random number value for special symbol determination (see the special stop symbol creation process (step S411) shown in FIG. 12). This is a form in which the first "time saving award" is drawn by lottery. Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area for each time-saving award is provided in the winning random number determination table, and a "symbol table for time-saving award" is provided as the symbol table. The basic configuration of the "symbol table for time saving grants" is the same as the symbol table for jackpots, losses, etc. already explained, and for example, "per time saving grants 1" and "per time saving grants 2" are used as per time saving grants. If provided, either 1 per time saving award or 2 per time saving award is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate.

In the normal lottery format, first, one of "big hit", "small win (if a small win is provided)", "time saving grant", and "loss" is drawn by lottery. If the "time-saving grant" is won in the lottery, the "time-saving grant" is determined by the symbol lottery. As a result, from the next game onwards, the game enters a time saving state due to the time saving grant. In addition, when a plurality of time saving award winnings are provided, one of the time saving award winnings is determined by a symbol lottery (see (A-2) and (A-3) below).

What should not be confused with this is that even if you win the "time saving prize", the special electric accessories will not be activated (the winning game will not be executed), but the "time saving state" will simply be granted (at least the electric support function will not be activated). state). To put it simply, "support benefits" are granted. In this respect, it is different from a case where the time-saving state is transferred to the time-saving state via a jackpot game, such as when a time-saving jackpot is won.

(A-2: Lottery format for winning type)
"Lottery format for winning types" means that a time-saving prize is set for the winning type (a winning type that belongs to jackpot or small win), and the time-saving prize can be determined by the jackpot lottery (in this example, the winning lottery and the symbol lottery). It is a lottery format. Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area for time saving is provided in the jackpot symbol table or the small prize symbol table. In addition, one or more types of time-saving grants can be provided for the winning type on the special figure 1 side and/or the special figure 2 side. Here, as an example, a case will be described in which a plurality of types of time saving grants (time saving grants 1 and 2) are provided in the winning type (jackpot type) on the special drawing 1 side shown in FIG.

In the lottery format for winning types, first, one of "big hit", "small hit (if a small win is provided)", and "loss" is determined by a lottery. In the case of a lottery, the winning type that belongs to the jackpot is determined by the symbol lottery, or in this case, one of the winning types (symbol type) from among "probable variable jackpot 1 to 3, time saving jackpot 1 to 2, time saving bonus 1 to 2". is determined. In this case, if 1 per time saving award or 2 per time saving award is determined by this symbol lottery, the time saving state will be given.

(A-3: Lottery format for losing type)
"Lottery format for loss type" is a lottery format in which "time-saving award winning" is set for the winning type that belongs to the losing, and the time-saving award winning is determined by the jackpot lottery (in this example, the winning lottery and the symbol lottery). . Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area for time saving is provided in the losing symbol table. This lottery format for loss types includes "time-saving bonus" as one of the loss types, and like the aforementioned lottery format for winning types, "time-saving bonus" is included as one of the win types. Although it is different, the lottery processing contents are substantially the same. In addition, one or more types can be provided for the loss type on the special figure 1 side and/or the special figure 2 side for the time saving grant. Here, as an example, a case will be described in which a plurality of types of time saving grants (1 and 2 per time saving grants) are provided as the loss type on the special drawing 1 side.

In the lottery format for loss types, first, one of "big hit", "small hit (if a small win is provided)", and "loss" is determined by a lottery. In the case of a lottery, the winning type (symbol type) belonging to the loss is determined by the symbol lottery, in this case, one of the winning types (symbol types) among "loss A, loss B, 1 to 2 per time saving award". In this case, if 1 per time saving award or 2 per time saving award is determined by this symbol lottery, the time saving state will be given.

Among the lottery formats (A-1) to (A-3) above, it is preferable to adopt (A-1), and more preferably (A-3). The reason for this is that in (A-2) the lottery format for winning types, the time-saving grant belongs to the winning type, and especially when it belongs to the jackpot type, it is not possible to "win a jackpot by winning or losing". , it becomes a condition for winning the time-saving award, giving the player a feeling of loss (such as ``Even though I won the jackpot, I won the time-saving award with a low profit level''). This is because Note that if there is only one type of time saving award, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery. Further, the random number value for special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery may be a soft random number or a hard random number. Further, a plurality of random numbers may be used. Further, the numerical range (size of the random number) that can be taken by the special symbol determination random number used for the symbol lottery and the size of the jackpot determination random number used for the winning/losing lottery random number may be the same or approximately the same size. Further, when drawing the time saving award, another random number for symbol drawing (another random number for special symbol determination) may be used.

(B) Also, based on the jackpot lottery related to a specific special pattern (either special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) among the jackpot drawings related to multiple special patterns (special pattern 1, 2), the time saving state is It may also be configured to provide this information. For example, of the special drawings 1 and 2, a "time saving award" can be provided only for the lottery target of the jackpot drawing on the special drawing 1 side.

(C) In addition, a special jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery during a specific state) for time-saving winnings can be executed only during a specific internal gaming state, a specific gaming mode, or a specific Tcode. It's okay. For example, at least when the internal gaming state is in a variable probability state (or may be in a game mode or Tcode related to a variable probability state), a "normal jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery that does not target short winnings)" is performed. , In the case of other gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.), it is possible to perform a ``special state jackpot drawing'' without conducting a normal jackpot drawing. In this case, a situation similar to a "falling transition" may occur, where the state shifts to a time-saving state while in a variable probability state, or in other words, shifts to a gaming state where the degree of profit is relatively lower than the current gaming state. can be prevented.

(D) Alternatively, a jackpot lottery may be performed as a ceiling function, and a time-saving state may be granted based on the jackpot lottery result.

(time saving grant lottery)
(E) Alternatively, it may be configured such that a time-saving state can be granted by determining whether or not the time-saving grant is a win (loss) through a predetermined lottery other than the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving grant lottery"). . If multiple types of time-saving grants are provided, one of the time-saving grants is determined. Incidentally, in the time-saving award lottery, in the same way as the jackpot lottery, first a "time-saving award" or "loss" is determined by a winning/losing lottery, and then the type of time-saving award may be determined by a symbol lottery. If only one "time saving award" is provided, the symbol lottery can be omitted.

(F) Moreover, the above-mentioned "time saving award lottery" may be performed only on a specific special symbol (for example, either special symbol 1 or 2).

(G) Furthermore, the above-mentioned time-saving lottery can be configured to be executable during a specific internal gaming state, a specific gaming mode, a specific time-saving state, or a specific Tcode. For example, at least when the internal gaming state is in a variable probability state (including during a game mode related to a variable probability state or during Tcode), the time saving lottery is not performed, but during other gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) It can be configured to perform a time saving lottery. In this case, it is possible to prevent a "falling transition" situation from occurring, such as shifting to a time-saving state during a variable probability state (transferring to a gaming state with a relatively lower profit level than the current gaming state). can do. Further, it can be configured such that the time saving award lottery is not performed during the infinite time reduction, but the time saving award lottery is performed during the finite time reduction. In this case as well, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a "falling transition" situation where the time is changed from infinite time saving to finite time saving.

(H) Also, "triggered by transition from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state", "triggered by transition from one gaming mode to another gaming mode", or "triggered by transition from one Tcode It may be configured such that a time-saving lottery can be executed upon transition from one Tcode to another Tcode. For example, if the time saving state ends in the current game and the next game returns to the normal state, at the end of the current game (at the end of the symbol fluctuation time) or at the start of the next game (at the beginning of the symbol fluctuation). , run a time-saving lottery. Therefore, if you win the time-saving award lottery again when the time-saving is over, you can create a novel game feature called "time-saving consecutive games" in which the time-saving state can be awarded continuously without going through a winning game. .

(J) Furthermore, the "regular jackpot lottery" and the "time-saving lottery" can be performed overlappingly during one game. "Doing the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery repeatedly in one game" means, for example, when starting a certain symbol variation display game, first, a normal jackpot lottery is performed, and if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, then In this case, a time-saving award lottery can be held for the time-saving award winnings. Further, instead of first holding a jackpot lottery, a time-saving lottery can be performed first, and if the time-saving lottery result is a loss, then a jackpot lottery can be performed. Note that it is free to decide which of the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery to be executed first. Moreover, as a ceiling function, the jackpot lottery and the time-saving grant lottery can be performed redundantly. For example, in a ceiling game, a jackpot lottery and a time-saving lottery can be performed redundantly.

(K) After winning the time-saving award lottery and being granted a time-saving state, the time-saving award lottery may be prohibited from being held again until the time-saving state ends (time-saving award lottery prohibition control). In this case, only the normal jackpot lottery is performed.

(L) Also, it is possible to configure a time saving lottery to be executed as a ceiling function.

The various lottery formats have been explained above, but when a time-saving state is granted by the above-mentioned "time-saving grant", the number of times of time-saving is not particularly limited, and an appropriate value can be determined, but specifically, the following It is possible to provide a time-saving award winning lottery such as the following, and to make it possible to execute a jackpot lottery and a time-saving award lottery.

(Structure A) Provide at least one time saving grant that grants a finite time saving (time saving number X). In this case, if a time saving jackpot is provided, the number of time saving jackpots may be the same as this or a different number of time saving jackpots. In this case, it is preferable that "100 times<Number of time saving times X" per time saving grant is included.
(Structure B) Provide at least one time saving grant that grants infinite time saving.
(Structure C) Provide a plurality of time-saving grants each with a different number of time-saving grants. Among the plurality of time saving grants, it is preferable to provide at least one time saving grant where "100 times<Number of working hours X" (including infinite time saving).
(Structure D) Among the plurality of time saving grants, at least one time saving grant has a different number of working time savings. It is preferable that each time saving is given as "100 times<Number of time saving times X" or "infinite time saving".
(Structure E) Determine the probability of winning per time saving grant according to the set value. For example, the lower the set value is, the higher the probability of winning can be. In this case, the lower the setting, the more benefits can be obtained per time saving, which can contribute to avoiding getting stuck (an aspect of the relief function). Furthermore, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning can be. In this case, even if there is no difference in the probability of winning the jackpot depending on the setting value, the higher the setting, the higher the ball payout rate can be.
(Structure F) The probability of winning per time-saving grant (if there are multiple time-saving grants, the total winning probability may be used) is the same (almost the same) as the winning probability of the jackpot when the probability is low, preferably lower than that. Let it be a probability. This is because the "time saving award" is a support benefit, so it is preferable not to blindly make it possible to win with a high probability. If settings are included, the probability of winning per time saving award can be determined according to each setting value. In this case, each setting value may have a different winning probability, at least some setting values may have a different winning probability, or all settings may have the same winning probability. Note that it is preferable to set the jackpot winning probability to be less than or equal to the set value. For example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/240 (see Figure 4), so either set the probability of winning per time-saving award to be the same or approximately the same as 1/240, or set the probability of winning the jackpot to be the same or approximately the same as 1/240, or set the probability of winning the jackpot to be 1/240 (see Figure 4). For example, it is preferable to set it to 1/300). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot winning probability may be set to be less than or equal to a certain set value. For example, the probability of winning the jackpot at the lowest setting (setting 1) may be less than or equal to 1/240, or the probability of winning the jackpot at the highest setting (setting 6) may be less than or equal to (1/189, for example).

(Specific example of granting finite time reduction related to modification Ω)
Here, when granting a finite time saving per time saving grant, the following grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form Ω1)
If there are multiple types of time saving times due to jackpots (number of types A), the types of time saving times due to time saving grants (time saving states) are determined to be smaller types (type number B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A". In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of the number of time savings due to the jackpot: 100 times (time saving A) and 50 times (time saving B). It is configured to provide only one type (for example, 100 time savings). In addition, as long as the relationship of "number of types B<number of types A" is satisfied, the number of time reductions (for example, 150 times) that is different from the number of time reductions due to the jackpot may be provided for each time reduction award. Further, two or more types of time saving times (time saving states) may be provided per time saving application (in this case, the relationship is "2≦number of types B<number of types A").

(Limited time saving form Ω2)
When the average number of time savings due to the time saving jackpot is N, and the average number of time savings due to the time saving grant is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 1) to (Formula 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". In the case of this embodiment, the average number of time savings N due to a jackpot is 75, so the average number M of time savings due to each time saving grant is set to be a greater number of time savings (for example, 100 times or more). In this case, the time-saving state due to the time-saving grant has a higher profit level than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it can be a nice support benefit for the addicted player. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time-saving state due to the jackpot and the time-saving state due to the time-saving award will have the same profit level. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in both the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot and the time saving state due to the time saving award. In this case as well, "average number of time reductions N (infinite number of times)=average number of time reductions M (infinite number of times)", which satisfies (Formula 2).
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit in the time-saving state due to each time-saving grant is relatively lower than that in the time-saving state due to a jackpot, so the position of the time-saving grant as a "support benefit" should be maintained so that it does not become an excessive benefit. Can be done. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot, and in this case, "infinite time saving" is not included in the time saving state due to the time saving award winning.

(Limited time saving form Ω3)
(4) Similar to (Formula 3) above, focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of time reductions that satisfies at least the relationship "number of time reductions per time reduction grant ≦ maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot" Establish. In this example, the number of times of time saving per time saving grant is equal to or less than the number of time saving times of "time saving A" (100 times) due to time saving jackpot 1, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. In addition, when multiple time-saving awards are provided, focusing on the minimum number of time-savings due to a jackpot, the number of time-savings that satisfies the relationship "minimum number of time-savings due to a jackpot ≦ number of time-savings due to a time-saving award < maximum number of time-savings due to a jackpot" is determined. It's okay. In this embodiment, the number of time savings due to each time saving grant is greater than or equal to the number of time savings (50 times) of "time saving B" due to time saving jackpot 2 and less than the number of time saving times of "time saving A" (100 times) due to time saving jackpot 1, for example. , 50 times, 60 times, etc. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in the time saving state due to the time saving jackpot, and in this case, "infinite time saving" is not included in the time saving state due to the time saving granting hit. Further, the minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot may be 100 times or more, and as long as the above (Formula 3) is satisfied, the number of time savings due to a time saving award may be 100 times or more.

(About the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, production mode, various productions, etc. related to the time saving state due to time saving grant)
When a time-saving state is granted due to time-saving granting, “Tcode” may be set to the Tcode corresponding to the time-saving state, for example, “05H” for time-saving mode or “07H” for heaven mode (see the column of time-saving state in Figure 28). ). In addition, the production mode may be "time-saving production mode (compatible with time-saving mode)" corresponding to the time-saving state or "heaven production mode (corresponding to heaven mode)" corresponding to the heaven mode (in the column of "time-saving mode" in Fig. 6 reference). In this case, the time-saving state due to time-saving grants (hereinafter referred to as "special time-saving state" as the case may be) and the time-saving state due to jackpots, ceiling benefits, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "normal time-saving state" as the case may be) are common. It is possible to bring out the performance of

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special time saving state and the normal time saving state can be treated as different gaming states. For example, the time saving state due to the time saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the "special time saving state" in some cases) is treated as the "special time saving state", and YJ (gaming state determination number indicating the internal gaming state) is different from other internal gaming states. may be configured to be set to a different value (for example, YJ="04H") (see the time saving state column in FIG. 28). In this case, the Tcode for the special time-saving state may be a Tcode corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, "05H" for time-saving mode or "07H" for heaven mode), but it may also be a Tcode dedicated to the special time-saving state (for example, Tcode= "09H") (provides a "special time saving mode" as a gaming mode), and when selecting a variable pattern distribution table, the "variable pattern distribution table for special time saving state" is selected. You may. In addition, when providing a Tcode dedicated to the special time-saving state, it is preferable to also provide a "special time-saving performance mode" corresponding to the special time-saving state (special time-saving mode). Thereby, under the special time-saving performance mode, it is possible to display a performance related to the special time-saving mode (special time-saving state).

In this way, during the normal time saving state and during the special time saving state, background effects, decorative patterns, pending icons, various notice effects, and pre-read notices (pre-read notice during fluctuation and/or pending change notice), etc. At least one of the performances can have a different performance mode. Furthermore, at least one of the various preview performances, the look-ahead preview during future changes, and the pending change notice can be made in a different performance mode. This makes it possible to visually distinguish and notify whether it is a normal time saving state (particularly a time saving state due to a jackpot) or a special time saving state.

(Regarding the winning performance related to the starting gate)
When configured to be able to execute a "winning performance" when a prize is won in the upper starting port 34 and/or the lower starting port 35, it is configured to be able to execute different winning effects in the normal time-saving state and the special time-saving state. can do. Specifically, at least one of the sound effects, light effects, and image display effects can be made different. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the winning effect is not performed during the normal time saving state, and the winning effect is executed during the special time saving state. Even in this case, it is possible to visually distinguish and notify whether it is a normal time saving state or a special time saving state.

(About the display of the number of remaining time reductions)
In addition, during the special time reduction, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number display effect" can be displayed. Also, as already explained, in the case of a display effect that displays the number of remaining time reductions related to infinite time saving, it is not necessary to display the display effect of the number of remaining time reduction times, but it is not necessary to display a display effect that shows the number of remaining time reduction times, but it is possible to display effects such as "∞ times remaining" or "continue until the next jackpot". , it is preferable to have an effect that indicates that the remaining number of times is infinite.

In addition, if multiple types of time-saving grants with different numbers of time-savings are provided (for example, 50, 100, 150, 300, etc.), the remaining number of time-savings will be displayed differently depending on each time-saving grant. You can also use it as

Furthermore, it is also possible to hide the fact that any of the time saving prizes has been won. For example, a common effect will appear in the winning game (notice effect, etc.) for each time saving award, and the remaining time saving number display effect will also have a common effect, for example, "Remaining number of times??? times" or "Remaining number of times 〇〇 times (no matter which time saving award is won, the same initial value will be displayed and a countdown will be displayed)" or "0 times (the initial value will start from zero and a count up will be displayed)" It can be done. This can give the player a sense of tension as they do not know how many times the special time-saving state (number of time-savings) will continue (or when it will end). Further, the remaining time saving number display performance may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device) or may be displayed on a sub liquid crystal display device (not shown) to be described later.

In addition, when displaying the above-mentioned "remaining number of times" and performing a countdown display, it is preferable to display the remaining time reduction number as described below.
For example, if any of the time saving prizes is won, "50 times", which is the smallest number of time saving times, is displayed. When the count reaches zero, if you have won a time-saving grant that has more time-savings than 50 times, for example, if you have won a time-saving grant with 100 time-savings, an additional display effect such as "+50 times!" will be displayed. and notify that the time saving condition will continue. On the other hand, in the case of count-up display, no matter which time-saving award is won, the count-up display starts from zero, and each time a predetermined number of times is reached (for example, 50 times, 100 times, 150 times: (other than the maximum number of time savings), additional display effects such as ``It's still going on!'' and ``50 left!'' are performed to notify that the time saving state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display performance after performing a performance to incite whether or not the time-saving ends, in order to arouse the player's sense of tension.

In addition, in the case of a special time-saving state, the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number display effect" is not executed, and in the case of a time-saving state due to a jackpot or a variable probability state (ST), the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number display effect" is not executed. Remaining ST count display effect)" may be executed.

(About the performance related to the winning game (winning fluctuation pattern) for time saving grant)
In addition, if you win the time saving award in this game, there will be a winning effect that will notify you of the winning time saving award in the game, and the above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification" will be given in consideration of the fact that the "electricity support state" will occur from the next game. to bring out the performance. The reason for displaying the pre-launch guidance notification effect is that when this game ends (the variable time ends), the time saving state (special time saving state) will be entered after the extremely short fixed display time (500ms) has elapsed. (Refer to the special symbol change processing (step S307) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10), the player is notified early that right-handed hitting will be advantageous, and the player is encouraged to This is to prevent the players from continuing to play the game (putting themselves at a disadvantage).

In addition, in a winning game for time saving award, the fixed display time can be different from the normal fixed display time (500 ms). For example, it is preferable to set it to a longer time (for example, about 1 second to several seconds) than the normal final display time (500 ms). In this case, there is an advantage that a margin performance time width for executing the above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification performance" can be secured by using the long confirmed display time. In addition, after the execution time (win fluctuation time) of the winning game ends, there is a longer than usual confirmation display time, so players can switch from "left-handed" to "right-handed" with a certain amount of leeway. There is also the advantage that the firing operation handle 15 can be operated. In addition, only for the winning game for the time saving award, the "right-handed hitting notification" (for example, the right-handed hitting instruction image such as the right-handed hitting notification image 779) can be sent in advance during a predetermined period during the winning game, or at least by using the confirmed display time. may be executed.

In addition, if it is possible to sufficiently notify that the above-mentioned time saving state (special time saving state) will be entered during the winning game for time saving award (for example, the fluctuation time is a relatively long fluctuation of 1 minute or more) , the final display time of the game may be set to be shorter than the normal final display time (for example, 200 ms). In this case, after the winning game ends, the special time saving state can be entered smoothly.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Modification 1 of benefit granting form (FIG. 33, granting form (α) to granting form (ζ)): see the description in paragraph [0545] to paragraph [0560])" described in the above embodiment, "Modification 2 of benefit granting form (divided benefit granting form) (see the description in FIG. 34, granting form (κ) to (μ): paragraphs [0561] to paragraph [0578])", the above "Other granting forms ( Grant form (ν) (ξ): see descriptions in paragraphs [0579] to [0580])", "ceiling benefit" is defined as "a time-saving state based on a predetermined lottery" or "a time-saving state based on a predetermined lottery result." It can be applied by replacing (reading) it as appropriate. Note that the "predetermined lottery" herein means the above-mentioned jackpot lottery and/or time-saving lottery.

(Regarding the display of the number of fluctuations on the display device)
Incidentally, in recent years, accessories have become increasingly gigantic in order to make the presentation flashy or to emphasize the gaming machine itself. For example, in a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161328, a huge accessory such as an upper decoration part 200 is formed on the upper part of the gaming machine main body. Although such a huge ornament is suitable for producing a dramatic effect, it also has disadvantages such as making the display of the data counter DT very difficult to see. Therefore, gaming machines have been put into practical use that are provided with a sub-liquid crystal display device in addition to the main liquid crystal display device installed within the gaming area. The sub liquid crystal display device can display a menu screen related to game settings, game information displayed on the data counter DT, for example, information about the number of symbol changes since the previous jackpot (hereinafter abbreviated as "number of changes"), etc. It becomes. Thereby, the player can check the number of hooks and the like without checking the display on the data counter DT. Normally, when winning a jackpot, the variable number is reset after the jackpot game ends, and the display of the variable number starts from "0".

Here, since the time saving award is given only a time saving state without a winning game, it is preferable to continue displaying the variable number without resetting it. For example, at the 700th spin, you win the time saving award and are transferred to the time saving state from the next game, but the number of games continues to be counted without resetting the variable number display (for example, "700th spin" " → "701st rotation → "702nd rotation..." The number of fluctuations is updated and displayed). This is because if the current number of fluctuations is reset due to the winning of the time saving award, the remaining number of ceiling games, number of addictive games, remaining number of STs, remaining number of time saving times, etc. will become unclear, causing players to feel dissatisfied and distrustful. This is because you end up embracing.

Note that a "special time saving variation number display" that displays the number of changes in the time saving state (special time saving state) due to each time saving grant may be configured to be executable. In this case, the normal variation number display (display of the number of stuck times) and the special time-saving variation number display may be displayed in parallel. Furthermore, when the normal variable number display is reset (displayed starting from 0), the special time saving variable number display may also be reset at the same time. In addition, apart from the reset timing of the normal variable number display, the special time saving variable number display is reset (from 0 to start display). In this case, in order to display the previous special time saving variation number, it is preferable to reset it at the time of winning the time saving award or at the start of the special time saving. Further, the system may be configured to be able to display a "special time saving history display" that displays the number of time saving times in special time saving states that have been executed in the past.

In addition, there is a normal electricity release game that is executed during a normal time reduction state (hereinafter referred to as a "normal electricity release game"), and a normal electricity release game that is executed during a special time reduction state (hereinafter referred to as a ``special electricity release game''). ) may have the same opening/closing operation pattern for the movable wing pieces 47. In this case, the "opening/closing operation pattern table (not shown)" can also be used.

Further, it may be configured such that the profit status is higher in the special power release game than in the normal power release game. For example, the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable blades 47 can be determined so that it is easier to win a prize in the lower starting port 35 in the special power release game than in the normal power release game.
In this case, the special time-saving state is preferable because it strengthens the meaning of the special time-saving state as a support benefit as a function to help users get addicted. If the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable blade 47 is to be different between the normal power release game and the special power release game, an interval time (normal power start INT), the interval time until switching from "starting door closed state → starting door open state" (INT before normal power opening), interval time at the end of the normal power opening game (normal power end INT), The number of times the starting port 35 is opened may be varied. In addition, even if the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable blade 47 is different between the normal power release game and the special power release game, the data that can be shared is , it is preferable that the same control table be used for both.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, one normal fluctuating winning device 41 is provided and used for both the normal power open game and the special power open game, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of normal variable winning devices 41 may be provided, and different normal variable winning devices 41 may be operated in the normal general power opening game and the special general power opening game. For example, a first normal variable winning device 41 belonging to the left downstream path 3b and a second normal variable winning device 41 belonging to the right downstream path 3c are provided, and in the case of a normal power open game, the first normal variable winning device 41 is provided. In the case of a special general power open game, the second normal variable prize winning device 41 is activated. It should be noted that which starting opening (the special drawing 1 side starting opening or the special drawing 2 side starting opening) the first and second normal variable prize winning devices 41 are made to correspond to can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

In addition, in the normal time-saving state and the special time-saving state, the time-saving start program used to start the time-saving state and/or the time-saving end program used when ending the time-saving state are configured with a common processing program. can do. This makes it possible to reduce program capacity and control burden.

Further, if the normal time saving state and the special time saving state are time saving states with the same content, a common game state transition table (FIG. 22) may be used. This makes it possible to reduce program capacity and control burden.

Further, the normal time saving state and the special time saving state may be different internal game states. The "normal time saving state" according to this embodiment includes the "general electric utility open extended state flag", "normal symbol time saving state flag", "normal symbol probability change state flag" and "special symbol" for specifying the time saving state. The four flags "time saving state flag" are set to the ON state (see "JTTBL-1" in the gaming state transition table in FIG. 22).

Therefore, when giving a special time-saving state, one of the four flags that specify the time-saving state: the normal electric accessory opening extension state flag, the normal symbol time-saving state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-saving state flag. , at least one is set to the OFF state. Thereby, the contents of the special time saving state and the contents of the normal time saving state can be made different from each other.

However, if you place emphasis on "time saving", that is, special symbol time saving state or normal symbol time saving state, at least one flag among the normal symbol time saving state flag and special symbol time saving state flag should be set to ON state. is preferred. Furthermore, if emphasis is placed on "extension of opening", it is preferable to set at least the utility utility opening extension state flag to the ON state. In addition, even if the special time saving state and the normal time saving state are set to different internal game states, when ending the special time saving state, the same "time saving end time saving state" as when ending the normal time saving state is used. Setting processing (see step S481 of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 16B)" can be executed. This makes it possible to reduce program capacity and control burden.

Further, different outer end signals may be output in the normal time saving state and the special time saving state. This makes it possible to display separately the number of fluctuations during the normal time-saving state (the number of game executions) and the number of fluctuations during the special time-saving state on the data counter DT. It can be used as reference data when playing. Note that if there is no particular need to distinguish between the normal time saving state and the special time saving state, a common outer end signal may be output. When outputting a common outer end signal, the program for outputting the outer end signal can be shared (commonly used) in the normal time saving state and the special time saving state. This makes it possible to reduce program capacity and control burden.

Also, regarding the display mode of special stop symbols that are stopped and displayed on a separate symbol display device (display of special pattern segments), the display mode of special stop symbols related to time saving is not included in the display mode of special stop symbols related to jackpots. It can be configured as follows. In addition, if there are multiple types of time-saving jackpots and jackpots (for example, time-saving jackpots and/or variable probability jackpots), the number of types of display modes of the special stop symbol for each time-saving jackpot is set to "X", and the type of jackpot is set to "X". When the number is "Y", the number of types of display modes of the special stop symbol must be set so that either "X≠Y", "X≠Y", "X<Y" or "X>Y" is satisfied. may be determined.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, a general pinball game machine has been described. In this second embodiment, a game machine of a type in which games are played by cyclically using game balls sealed inside, a type of game called a so-called "enclosed type game machine" or a "managed type game machine" is used. It's about machines. Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described as a "managed gaming machine" or a "gaming machine 1a".

As conventionally known, a managed gaming machine is a machine that circulates a plurality (predetermined number) of game balls (gaming media) inside the gaming machine and directly pays out the game balls used in the game or to the player. This is a gaming machine that does not require this. For example, by enclosing a plurality (predetermined number) of game balls inside, collecting the game balls fired by the firing device 32, and supplying them to the firing device 32 again to circulate the game balls, the game balls can be circulated from the outside. It is a gaming machine that allows games to be played without supplying game balls (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2002-272914, 2006-81599, 2010-142475, and 2013-106760).

As mentioned above, the managed gaming machine is a "circulation type" gaming machine in which games are played using game balls sealed inside the gaming machine, and unlike the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the managed gaming machine is This is different from a "non-circulating" gaming machine, which plays games using gaming media supplied from the outside without enclosing gaming balls inside. Therefore, the upper tray 9, the ball extraction button 14, etc. are not provided. Instead, the number of balls held (difference balls) is recorded and managed using an electromagnetic method, and the result (current number of balls held) is displayed on a predetermined display (LED display). There is. In this embodiment, a game ball number display device 77 (see FIG. 35) capable of displaying the number of balls held is provided, and the game ball number display device 77 (see FIG. 35) is provided at an appropriate position of the gaming machine 1a, for example, in FIG. It is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray unit 8 (see FIGS. 1 and 35(a)).

The number of balls held by the player (number of game balls after addition and subtraction) is basically "X" game balls fired from the firing device 32 (out balls: number of hits), number of prize balls (safe balls: winning balls). If the number of game balls (prize ball) provided by the ball rental device is "Y" and the number of rental game balls supplied by the ball rental device is "Z," then the number is calculated as "(Y+Z)-X". For example, if the number of out balls is 4,000, the number of safe balls is 3,000, and the number of rental game balls is 2,000, the number will be +1,000, and the number of balls held by the player will be in a positive state of 1,000, and this number of balls will be the number of game balls. It is displayed on a number display device 77.

The gaming machine 1a of the present embodiment includes counting means (out ball counting means, safe ball counting means) capable of counting the number of out pitches and the number of safe pitches, and a number-of-balls calculation means capable of calculating the number of balls held. It is equipped with Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine 1a is configured to include a foul ball number counting means for counting foul balls, a shot ball number counting means for counting the number of shot balls, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, since the firing operation is stopped when the number of balls held is zero, the number of balls held does not actually become negative, and when the number of balls held becomes zero, game balls are supplied from the ball lending device. There is a need.

Note that although this embodiment is directed to a "managed gaming machine," the same as described in the first embodiment can be applied to the gaming experience. That is, various play features (for example, FIGS. 4 to 7, FIGS. 21 to 34, etc.) including the symbol change display game, production, and ceiling function are not particularly limited in this embodiment.

<2A. Control device: Figure 35>
With reference to FIG. 35, a control device that controls gaming operations of a gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device. Note that in FIG. 35, elements having basically the same functions as those shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

As shown in the figure, the control device of the managed gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a main control section 20, a performance control section 24, and information commands from the main control section 20 (gaming machine installation information notification message, which will be described later), It mainly consists of a frame control board 22 (hereinafter referred to as the "frame control unit 22") that comprehensively controls performance information and management of the number of balls held in response to information notification telegrams) and a power supply board (not shown). be done. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG. 35. Moreover, FIG. 35(A) is provided for explanation of the managed gaming machine 1a according to this embodiment, and shows a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1a. In this embodiment, the main control section 20 is arranged on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 36 of the game board 3, and the frame control section 22 is arranged on the back side of the front operation panel 7.

(2A-3. Frame control unit 22)
Although not shown, the frame control unit 22 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU (frame control CPU), and also runs a control program that describes control procedures for counting the number of game balls and calculating performance information. In addition, it is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a ROM (frame control ROM) that stores various data necessary for control, and a RAM (frame control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory. An acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the output means, a light display control unit for the light emitting means (including LED indicators such as the game number display device 77 and the performance display 99), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and an interrupt controller circuit. It is equipped with necessary functions such as , reset circuit, and WDT circuit. The main roles of the frame control unit 22 are calculation of performance information, display control of indicators (number of games display device 77, performance display 99, etc.), communication control with external units (ball lending device, hall computer HC, data counter DT, etc.), control of circulation and discharge functions of game balls, firing control for the firing device 32, communication control of telegrams (details will be described later) with the main control unit 20, management of balls (calculation regarding the number of balls held) functions (addition function and subtraction function), memory function), etc. Also, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function for backing up necessary data.

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 and a launch device 32 are connected to the frame control unit 22 via the launch control board 28 . It's launcher 32. As shown in Figure (A), it is arranged at the upper right corner of the gaming machine 1a.

Further, a circulation unit 73 and a polishing unit 74 are connected to the frame control section 22 to control them. The circulation unit 73 functions as a circulation means for collecting game balls (out balls) fired from the firing device 32 toward the gaming area 3a and supplying the collected game balls to the firing device 32, and functions as a circulation mechanism (lifting ball). (including the upper mechanism, etc.) and a drive motor that drives the circulation mechanism. The polishing unit 74 functions as a polishing means for polishing (removing dirt) the circulating game balls, and is mainly composed of a polishing mechanism for the game balls and a drive motor that drives the polishing mechanism.

The movement process of the game ball fired from the firing device 32 is as follows. As shown in Figure (A), the game ball fired from the firing device 32 moves within the gaming area 3a and enters the winning opening (here, the upper starting opening 34 and the big winning opening 50 are illustrated) or The ball enters the out port 49 and is ejected from the game area 3a. The game balls discharged from the game area 3a are collected through the circulation path R, polished by the polishing unit 74, and supplied to the firing device 32 again by the circulation unit 74. Note that the firing device 32 for firing game balls, the circulation unit 73, the polishing unit 74, etc. may be configured using any known appropriate structure (for example, the firing means 53, circulation means 54, polishing means 55, and 1 to FIG. 11) can be adopted. Incidentally, if the number of balls held is zero, naturally the game ball will not be fired from the firing device 32. In addition, as already explained in the first embodiment, if the touch state is not detected, the firing stop switch is operated, or the firing stop signal is output, the firing operation is stopped and the game ball is controlled so that it does not fire.

Further, a ball removing unit 72 and a ball removing switch 62 for operating the ball removing unit 72 are connected to the frame control section 22. The ball extraction unit 72 includes a discharge means for discharging the game balls sealed therein from the game machine main body to the outside of the game machine. As the ejection means, for example, a passage switching mechanism that can switch between the circulation passage R supplied to the firing device 32 and the discharge passage (not shown) for discharging the enclosed game balls to the outside using an electromagnetic solenoid or the like. etc. In addition, the ball removal unit 72 has a "ball removal state" that detects whether the passage switching mechanism is switched to the "ball removal state" on the discharge passage side or the "non-ball removal state" on the circulation path R side. It also includes a detection switch (not shown). The ball removing switch 62 is a push-button switch that can be operated by a hall clerk or the like, and when the frame control unit 22 detects the ON operation of the ball removing switch 62, it changes from the "ball removing state" to the "non-ball removing state" or Switch from "non-ball removal state" to "ball removal state".

Further, the frame control unit 22 includes a functional unit (double removal state monitoring means) that monitors whether or not the ball is removed based on the detection information from the ball removal state detection switch (see FIG. 37 described later). . Note that the switching between the "ball-pulling state ⇔ non-ball-pulling state" is not limited to software-based switching according to the ON/OFF operation of the ball-pulling switch 62, and may be switched manually. However, in either case, it is preferable to provide a ball removal state detection switch so as to be able to monitor whether or not the ball is removed.

A performance display 99 is also connected to the frame control section 22 . In the case of this embodiment, performance information is calculated on the frame control section 22 side, and display control of the performance display 99 is performed.

Further, a game ball number display device 77 that can display information regarding the number of balls held is connected to the frame control section 22, and the frame control section 22 can control the display of the game ball number display device 77. The game ball count display device 77 can also display an error code that can identify the type of error in addition to the balls that the player has.

Also connected to the frame control unit 22 are a ball entry path count sensor 66, a ball non-entry path count sensor 67, and a subtraction mechanism count sensor 68. This incoming ball path count sensor 66 is a detection means for detecting out balls, and its function is the same as the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The non-entering ball path count sensor 67 is a detection means for detecting a so-called "foul ball (return ball)", and in this embodiment, the game ball fired from the firing device 32 does not reach the game area 3a. In this case, the ball is re-supplied to the firing device 32 through a non-ball passage (not shown), and the non-ball passage count sensor 67 is capable of detecting game balls passing through the non-ball passage. There is. The subtraction machine count sensor 68 detects the game balls fired from the firing device 32 (detects the actual number of balls fired without considering foul balls). The frame control unit 22 has a subtraction function unit that grasps that one game ball has been fired based on the detection signal from the subtraction mechanism sensor count 68 and subtracts one game ball from the number of balls held. ing.

The frame control unit 22 generates a gaming machine information notification message (Fig. 52 , see FIGS. 53A to 53C), performs addition/subtraction processing on the number of balls held, calculates the current number of balls held in real time, and displays the result on the game ball number display device 77. The frame control unit 22 includes a functional unit (out pitch counting means, safe pitch counting means, etc.) that calculates the number of out pitches, the number of safe pitches, and the number of balls fired from the firing device 32 (the actual number of balls fired considering foul balls). means, means for counting the number of fired balls). Note that since the foul ball has not reached the game area 3a, the number of balls held is treated as not counted. Further, when the ball lending request switch 87 is operated and a predetermined number of game balls are supplied from the lending device (external unit SC), this number of lending balls is also reflected in the number of balls held.

The frame control unit 22 also includes a door open sensor 61 and a predetermined area of the frame control RAM (for example, excluding a storage area related to performance information (outside area RAM)), which is used for calculating the current number of balls held and the number of balls held. A frame RAM clear switch 63 for initializing the storage area (RAM in the area), an error release switch 64 for releasing a predetermined error, and a game ball clear switch 65 for clearing the number of balls held to zero. The frame control section 22 can receive detection signals from these devices.

Further, an external connection terminal board 85 is connected to the frame control section 22, and an external unit SC is connected to the external connection terminal board 85. The frame control unit 22 sends predetermined information (for example, counting notification, gaming machine installation information, performance information, specific information (information required by the data counter DT and hall computer HC) to the external unit SC via the external connection terminal board 85). , game ball rental receipt results, etc.) can be sent.

In managed gaming machines, the functions of each control section are restricted due to legal requirements. Specifically, the main control unit 20 is in overall control of the game operations, but the frame control unit 22 is responsible for managing the balls held, displaying performance information, and controlling transmission and reception to external devices. It has come to be responsible for In addition, the main control unit 20 controls the symbol fluctuation display game and monitors the winnings in each winning hole, so the main control section 20 controls the game progress, such as the number of prize balls, the occurrence of jackpots, the start/stop of symbol fluctuations, and changes in the game state. It is necessary to transmit important information generated along with this to the frame control unit 22 in real time. Therefore, it is necessary to devise ways to smoothly exchange information between the main control section 20 side and the frame control section 22 side without increasing the control burden. The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a managed gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figures 36A to 46B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36A to 46B, gaming operation processing on the main control unit 20 side according to the second embodiment will be described. Like the first embodiment, this second embodiment also includes an infinite loop main process (main process on the main control side: FIGS. 36A to 36B) and a timer interrupt process (2 The main control side timer interrupt process is mainly composed of two main control side timer interrupt processes: the 4 ms interrupt process in FIG. 39 and the 108 ms interrupt process in FIG. 43). However, since the "managed gaming machine" according to the second embodiment has a "circulating type" configuration, the processing is partially different from the gaming machine having the "non-circulating type" configuration described in the first embodiment. (In particular, the processing at power-on and the processing regarding prize balls are different) are executed. Note that in FIGS. 36A to 46B, the same step numbers are given to processes that are substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and descriptions of the process contents are omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

<12A. Main control side main processing: Figure 36A and Figure 36B>
The main control side main processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. 36A and 36B are flowcharts showing details of main control side main processing.

In FIG. 36A, steps S011, S014 to S016, S020, S023, S025 to S028, and S031 to S032 are substantially the same as those in FIG. 8, as shown. Therefore, of the main control-side main processes shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the description of the process shown in FIG. 36A will be omitted here to avoid redundant description, and the description will focus on the process shown in FIG. 36B.

36A and 36B, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process (step S023), the area RAM clear process (step S031), the setting confirmation process (step S027), and the backup recovery process (step S023) shown in FIG. 36A. After completing any of the processes in step S028), various processes (steps S051 to S063 shown in FIG. 36B) necessary for performing transmission and reception with the frame control unit 22 when the power is turned on are executed.

In this embodiment, communication is performed between the main control section 20 and the frame control section 22 using an asynchronous serial port using a telegram method. Therefore, the CPU 201 first activates the serial transmission circuit (step S051).

Next, a "gaming machine installation information notification message" shown in FIG. It is written and transmitted to the frame control unit 22 (step S053). The CPU 201 sequentially transfers the data stored in the transmission serial port buffer one byte at a time to the transmission shift register, and outputs the data as serial data to the peripheral control board (here, the frame control unit 22). . In this embodiment, the transmission serial port buffer has a storage capacity of 16 bytes.

(Game machine installation information notification message: Figure 51 (A))
With reference to FIG. 51, the above-mentioned "gaming machine installation information notification message" will be explained. FIG. 51(A) shows details of the gaming machine installation information notification message.

As shown in the figure, the gaming machine installation information notification message includes the message length (message length information: 1 byte), the command code of the message (command information: 1 byte), the communication serial number (sequence number: 1 byte), and the game related to the gaming machine. It consists of a total of 25 bytes including machine information (21 bytes) and checksum (1 byte). The message length indicates the data length of the message, and here is set a value (0x19) indicating "25 bytes" which is the data length from the message length to the checksum. Furthermore, fixed values (0x01, 0x00) are set for the command code and communication serial number, respectively. In addition, the gaming machine information includes type information (1 byte) of gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines, reel-type gaming machines, arranged ball gaming machines, and mahjong ball gaming machines, as well as the chip ID of the CPU on the main control unit side. A number (9 bytes), a chip manufacturer code (3 bytes), and a chip product code (8 bytes) are set.

This gaming machine installation information notification telegram is transmitted to external devices such as the hall computer HC and the gaming machine information center (not shown) via the external unit SC. As a result, the legitimacy of the gaming machines installed in the pachinko hall (whether they meet legal requirements, etc.) is checked.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36B, after transmitting the gaming machine installation information notification message to the frame control unit 22, the power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S054). In the power supply abnormality check process, the WDT is cleared, and then, based on input information of a power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal) indicating a power failure, the presence or absence of a power failure is checked, and a standby process for a predetermined time T is performed. The predetermined time T is a sufficient time required for the main control unit 20 side to receive a "gaming machine installation information response message" described later, for example, the execution interval time ( 108ms or 54ms) is ensured. If the power supply abnormality signal is in the ON state, the processing state is shifted to the initial setting processing in step S011, and the process waits for the power to be cut off.

On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is in the OFF state, it is assumed that the operation is normal, and this power supply abnormality check process is exited, and it is determined whether or not a gaming machine installation information response message has been received (step S055). Simply put, this gaming machine installation information response message is reception result information that is sent to the main control section 20 when the frame control section 22 receives the gaming machine installation information notification message.

(Game machine installation information response message: Figure 51 (B))
With reference to FIG. 51, the above-mentioned "gaming machine installation information response message" will be explained. FIG. 51(B) shows details of the gaming machine installation information response message.

As shown in the figure, the gaming machine installation information response message includes message length (1 byte), command code (1 byte), communication serial number (1 byte), gaming machine installation information reception result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte). ) consists of a total of 5 bytes. The message length is the data length from the message length to the checksum, and here the above-mentioned total of 5 bytes (0x05) is set. Furthermore, fixed values (0x11, 0x00) are set for the command code and communication serial number, respectively. Further, in the reception result, a message indicating that the gaming machine installation information has been received (0x00=reception OK) is set. The checksum is the last data received, and is set to a value that is the sum of the length of the message and the receipt result of the gaming machine. Therefore, the checksum value when the gaming machine installation information response message is normally received is "0x05 (message length) + 0x11 (command code) + 0x00 (communication serial number) + 0x00 (gaming machine installation information reception result) = 0x16 (Checksum = 16H)”. When the frame control unit 22 responds with the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification message, it simply responds with the communication serial number (fixed at 0) of the gaming machine installation information notification message, and if a communication serial number other than 0 is received, It is assumed that there is a communication error and is not responded to (denoted as no response).

In addition, in the case of the "ball removal state", "0x01" is set as the reception result (see the "reception result" column in Figure 51 (B)), but for details, see Figures 37 and 38. This will be described later using this method, and here, first, a case will be described in which the "ball removal state" is not taken into account.

Whether or not the above-mentioned "gaming machine installation information response message" has been received is determined by the "reception serial port buffer status register (hereinafter referred to as " This is done by checking the "Receive Buffer Status"). This reception buffer status includes information regarding the reception data length; for example, 00H indicates "no reception data", and 01H to 10H indicates "1 byte of reception data to 16 bytes of reception data".

The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the power supply abnormality check process in step S054 until it confirms that the gaming machine installation information response message has been received, that is, until it confirms that the reception buffer status value is a value other than 00H (step S055: NO processing). root). Note that in this embodiment, as described above, sufficient time (for example, 108 ms) required for the main control unit 20 side to receive the gaming machine installation information response message is secured, so normally, step S055 is The determination result is YES, but if the frame control unit 22 has the above-mentioned "no response", the main control unit 20 cannot receive the gaming machine installation information response message, so the determination result in step S055 is NO. In this case, the processes of steps S054 to S055 will be repeatedly executed until a power outage occurs (until a power abnormality signal ON is detected).

If the gaming machine installation information response message is received (step S055: YES), the number of received data (value of reception buffer status) is acquired and set as the loop count (step S056). This loop count is used in step S058, which will be described later. Here, the gaming machine installation information response message is fixed to 5 bytes as described above, but if data of 6 bytes or more is received multiple times, a bug may occur. Therefore, here, the number of received data is obtained and set as the loop number. In addition, if the gaming machine installation information response message from the frame control unit 22 is normally received, the value of the reception buffer status is "05H" indicating "5 bytes of received data", so the number of loops is 5 times will be set. In addition, the above-mentioned "number of received data (number of data stored in the receive serial port buffer)" can be confirmed in the above-mentioned receive buffer status, and when the data stored in the receive serial port buffer is read, the data will be displayed accordingly. , the number of received data in the receive buffer status is subtracted. If the receive serial port buffer is read when the number of received data is 0, the value of the receive buffer status becomes 00H.

Next, the 1-byte information received from the frame control unit 22 from the reception serial port buffer is sequentially loaded into a predetermined register (for example, A register) until the number of loops becomes zero (if the determination result in step S058 is NO). processing route). As already explained, when the gaming machine installation information response message from the frame control unit 22 is normally received, the data finally loaded into the A register is the checksum related to the gaming machine installation information response message. , its value is "16H" which is a normal value.

If the number of loops becomes zero (step S058: YES), it is determined whether the value finally taken into the A register matches the normal value of the checksum "16H" (step S059). If the gaming machine installation information response message is normally received, the value of the A register should be "16H". Therefore, here, it is determined whether the value finally written to the A register is the normal value "16H".

If the checksum is not a normal value (if the checksum is abnormal) (step S059: NO), the process returns to the power supply abnormality check process of step S054. In this case, the processes of steps S054 to S055 will be repeated until a power outage occurs (an infinite loop state will occur in which the power abnormality check process is repeatedly executed). In addition, if the determination process of step S055 is passed again, it will be determined that the gaming machine installation information response message has not been correctly received.

If the gaming machine installation information response message cannot be received normally (including the above-mentioned case of "no response"), the main control section 20 sends a "gaming machine information notification message (FIG. 52) to the frame control section 22. )" will not be sent. Therefore, on the frame control section 22 side, if this gaming machine information notification message is not sent from the main control section 20 even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a timeout (reception failure) occurs and a predetermined error such as a timeout error notification is issued. Processing (checksum error processing) is now executed. In addition, in the case of a checksum abnormality (step S059: NO), the main control unit 20 side sends a dedicated error command related to the checksum abnormality (the above-mentioned "power restart command" may also be used) to the production control unit 24. After transmitting, for example, the performance control unit 24 is made to execute a checksum abnormality error notification (RAM error notification), and the process returns to the power abnormality check process in step S054, and the power abnormality check process is repeatedly executed (infinite loop). ) configuration. If a checksum error occurs, turn the power of the gaming machine OFF/ON to execute the power-on process (Figures 36A and 36B) again, and correctly receive the gaming machine installation information response message (check). If Sam is normal), it can be returned to normal.

On the other hand, if the checksum is a normal value (step S059: YES), a predetermined RAM area in the transmission/reception relationship between the main control unit and the frame control unit 22 is cleared in preparation for the start of normal gaming (step S060). . Specifically, these include a storage area related to communication serial numbers (communication serial number RAM area), a reception error counter that counts the number of reception errors of response messages from the frame control unit 22, a reception check start flag, a reception checksum RXSUM, etc., which will be described later. Clear. Note that the transmission ring buffer, the final address RAM area indicating the final address of the ring buffer, the load pointer, the save pointer, etc. are not described here considering the case that they have been restored in the backup restoration process (step S028 in FIG. 36A). Not cleared.

Next, a CTC setting process for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms and every 108 ms is executed (step S061). Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and two main control side timer interrupt processes (4ms interrupt process and 108ms interrupt process) shown in FIGS. 39 and 43 are executed.

Next, assuming that the game is ready to start, the firing control signal (firing permission signal ES) that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state), and the game is started. A start command is sent to the production control section 24 (step S037). As a result, the firing permission signal ES is output to the frame control section 22, and the firing device can fire the game ball.

Next, the game permission flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S063). This game permission flag is a flag that specifies whether or not normal game processing is permitted. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that it is permitted, and when the flag is OFF (00H ), it indicates a "prohibited state". The game permission flag is used, for example, in the 4ms interrupt process in FIG. 39 and the 108ms interrupt process in FIG. 43, which will be described later (see step S81A in FIG. 39 and step S111 in FIG. 43).

After completing a series of power-on processing (steps S011 to S063: pre-game start processing), an infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 of game processing related to normal game progress is executed. As a result, from then on, the game is controlled to a state where the game can proceed (game startable state). In this embodiment, step S041 (performance display monitor aggregation division processing) shown in FIG. 8 does not exist, but this is because the processing related to calculation of performance information (base value) and its display is performed on the frame control unit 22 side. (The same applies to the third embodiment described later).

In this embodiment, after various random number update processes in step S041, the reception buffer status value is checked to determine whether there is data received from the frame control unit 22 (step S042). The received data here is a "gaming machine information response message" shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and which is sent from the frame control unit 22 during normal gaming. Although the details will be described later, when a normal game is started, the main control unit 20 side inputs "game information" as predetermined game information at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 108 ms interrupt process execution in FIG. 43). The frame control unit 22 sends a “gaming machine information response message” to the main control unit 20 as a receipt notification for the gaming machine information notification message (FIG. 52). Send to. In the case of this embodiment, the transmission and reception of the above-mentioned "gaming machine information response message" and "gaming machine information notification message" are completed within 108 ms. By transmitting and receiving such telegrams, it is possible to manage gaming operations such as performance information, the number of prize balls, the number of balls held by the player, and whether there is any fraudulent activity.

(Game machine information response message: Figure 54)
For convenience of explanation, first, the above-mentioned "gaming information notification response message" will be explained with reference to FIG.

As shown in Figure 54, the "gaming information notification response message" includes the message length (1 byte), command code (1 byte), communication sequence number (1 byte), gaming information reception result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte). This message contains information on ``gaming machine installation information response message'' shown in FIG. 51(B), and consists of a total of 5 bytes. The message length of the game information notification response message is information on the length of the message up to the checksum, and is set to 5 bytes (0x05) here. Furthermore, fixed values (0x12, 0x00=reception OK) are set for the command code and the reception result (gaming machine information reception result), respectively. In addition, the communication serial number (any value from 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)) received in the "gaming machine information notification message (see Figure 52)" described later is set as the communication serial number (received communication serial number ). The checksum is the last data to be received, and here the value is set as the sum of the message length and the reception result. Therefore, when the gaming information notification response message is received normally, the checksum value is 0x05 (message length) + 0x12 (command code) + 0x00 (gaming machine installation information reception result) + communication serial number (from 0 to 255). Any value) = fixed value (0x17() + communication serial number (any value from 0 to 255).

In steps S042 and S043, the presence or absence of received data of the "gaming machine information response message" shown in FIG. ).

In this frame reception data storage process, the reception data of the gaming machine information response message is stored in a predetermined area (reception checksum RXSUM) of the RAM 203. That is, when the main control unit 20 receives the received data related to the gaming machine information response message (if there is received data) by using the fact that "the last received data (5th byte) is the checksum" , the "telegram length (1 byte), command code (1 byte), communication sequence number (1 byte), gaming information reception result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte)" related to the gaming machine information response message, The received checksum continues to be stored in RXSUM in sequence. As a result, the data finally stored in the reception checksum RXSUM becomes the checksum data of the gaming machine information response message received this time. The checksum data of the gaming machine information response message received this time is held until the next gaming machine information response message is received. Note that the checksum value stored in the reception checksum RXSUM is used in the 108 ms interrupt process (such as step S114 in FIG. 43) shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, as described above, the exchange of "gaming information notification response message ⇔ gaming machine information response message" is executed every 108 ms interrupt, so the gaming machine information response message is sent to the frame control unit 22 at intervals of about 108 ms. It is sent from. Therefore, the main control unit 20 has enough time to receive the current gaming machine information response message and store the received data in the reception checksum RXSUM before receiving the next gaming machine information response message. It is secured.

The presence or absence of the received data of the gaming machine information response message can be confirmed by the above-mentioned reception buffer status, and after the checksum of the current gaming machine information response message has been stored, After that), the value of the reception buffer status becomes 00H, and the determination result in step S042 becomes "NO" until the next gaming machine information response message is received. As shown in the figure, the storage process of the received data related to the gaming machine information response message can be performed by executing the loop process of S040 to S045 while storing the received data one byte at a time in the frame reception data storage process of step S043. Alternatively, if there is received data, the process of steps S042 and S043 may be repeatedly executed until the receive serial port buffer becomes empty (until the receive buffer status becomes 00H). In any case, no particular problem arises because sufficient time is secured after the checksum of the current gaming machine information response message is stored until the next gaming machine information response message is received.

(When checking including the ball removal state during power-on processing: Figure 37)
Next, a description will be given of the processing when the power is turned on, including monitoring of the above-mentioned "ball removal state". FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the processing contents when the power is turned on, including monitoring of the "ball removal state". Note that in FIG. 37, the same step numbers are given to processes that are substantially the same as those in FIG. 36B, and descriptions of the process contents are omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

In a configuration in which checks are performed including whether or not the ball is in the ball-pulling state (hereinafter referred to as “ball-pulling state monitoring configuration”), the frame control unit 22 controls the timing when transmitting the gaming machine installation information response message to the main control unit 20. The ON/OFF state of the ball-pulling state detection switch (not shown) is checked (the ball-pulling state monitoring means), and data that can identify whether the ball is in a ball-pulling state or a non-ball-pulling state is included. Sends a gaming machine installation information response message. Specifically, as shown in the "reception result" column of FIG. 51(B), the reception result is "0x01" when the "ball-picking state" is selected, and the reception result is "0x01" when the "ball-picking state" is "non-ball-picking state". Sends a gaming machine installation information response message of "0x00".

The checksum related to the gaming machine installation information response message is "0x16 (16H)" if the ball is not in the ball-picking state, and the checksum when the ball is in the ball-picking state is "0x01" and "0x17 (17H)" as the reception result. ”. By utilizing this difference in checksum values, the process shown in FIG. 37 is adopted in the ball removal state monitoring configuration.

Referring to FIG. 37, in the case of the ball removal state monitoring configuration, as shown in the figure, it is determined whether the checksum value is the normal value "16H" (step S059), and the checksum value is normal. If it is not a value (step S059: NO), then it is determined whether or not the ball is being removed (step S065).

If the ball is not removed (step S065: OFF), that is, if the checksum value is neither "016H" nor "017H", it is assumed that some problem has occurred, and the process moves to step S054. In this case, the process route (infinite loop process) is to repeatedly execute the power supply abnormality check process (step S054), as in the case where the determination result in step S059 of FIG. 36B, which has already been described, is NO. In addition, if the ball is not in this state, the main control unit 20 sends a dedicated error command related to the abnormality (the above-mentioned "power restart command" may also be used) to the production control unit 24, and then the production control unit 24, for example, to execute a checksum abnormality error notification (RAM error notification), and then return to the power abnormality check process in step S054, and it may be configured to repeatedly execute the power abnormality check process. In this case, as in the case where a checksum abnormality has occurred as described above, by turning the power of the gaming machine OFF/ON, the processing at power-on (FIGS. 36A and 36B) is executed again, and the gaming machine installation information is returned. By correctly receiving the message (if the checksum is normal), it can be restored normally.

On the other hand, when the ball is in the unloading state (step S065: ON), that is, when the checksum value is "017H", the firing control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is turned OFF ( After setting the firing state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state) (step S037), and executing ball removal error state processing (step S038), the process moves to step S054. In the ball-pulling error state processing, an error command (ball-pulling error command) indicating that a ball-pulling error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control section 24. When the production control section 24 receives the ball-pulling error command, it executes ball-pulling state error notification. Ball removal status error notification can be performed using a sound effect (for example, audible output of ``Ball removal error''), a predetermined light effect (for example, all white frame LEDs are lit), and an image display effect (for example, displaying a ``Ball removal error'' on the LCD screen). The notification can be made by one or more effects such as "Drawing error has occurred" (display).

If the ball is in the unloaded state (step S065: ON), at least the firing operation is permitted before proceeding to the power supply abnormality check process (step S054). This is because waiting game balls may remain, and in order to take out the remaining balls from within the firing device 32, it is preferable to allow the firing operation.

(Resolution of ball removal status error)
In this embodiment, once it is determined that the ball has been removed, the ball removal switch 62 and the error release switch 64 are operated to enter an infinite loop process in which the power supply abnormality check process (step S054) is repeatedly executed. However, the ball removal state error cannot be resolved. In order to return to normal from the ball-removal state error, it is necessary to turn the power OFF/ON (re-energize) after the ball-removal state has been resolved.

In addition, when determining whether or not the ball is in the unballed state, it is preferable to employ a processing program as shown in FIG. 38(a).

FIG. 38(a) shows an example of source code focusing on the determination processing in steps S059 and S065. Regarding FIG. 38 (a) "Specific example" and (b) "Comparative example", in order to make the explanation of the difference between the two easier to understand, the ball removal state error notification process (step S038) is omitted. .

Referring to FIG. 38(a), in the determination process of step S059, the result of subtracting the normal value of the checksum "16H" from the A register (the register that has taken in the checksum data of the gaming machine installation information response message) is set in the A register (SPm1). If the result of the A register is zero, that is, the checksum value is a normal value (=016H) (step S059: YES), it is assumed that the reception has been properly completed, and the process jumps to the process of step S060 (SYSTEM_129) (SPm2). .

If the result of the A register is not zero, that is, the checksum value is not a normal value (=016H) (step S059: NO), the value of the A register is decremented (SPm3). Here, if the ball is removed, the checksum value is "17H", and the difference between the checksum value and the normal value "16H" is "01H", and the value of the A register is subtracted by 1. Processing is being carried out.

If the above subtraction result is not zero (step S065: OFF), it is assumed that some kind of malfunction has occurred, and the process jumps to power supply abnormality check processing (SYSTEM_126, step S054) (SPm4).

If the above subtraction result is zero (step S065: ON), it is assumed that the ball has been removed, the firing operation is permitted (SPm5, step S037), and the process jumps to the power supply abnormality check process (SYSTEM_126, step S054) (SPm6) ).

As described above, in the specific example of Figure (A), as shown in SPm1 to SPm3 above, the checksum value is the normal value "16H", and the checksum value in the case of the ball being removed is "017H". Taking advantage of this fact, depending on whether the calculation result of "A register value - normal value (016H) - ball release state (01H)" is zero (00H), it is determined whether the ball is removed or not. The processing content is to determine.

In this way, the program capacity can be reduced, compared to using a processing program that determines the checksum value (ball removal state) in stages, as shown in FIG. 38(b) "Comparative Example", for example. This will be explained in detail below.

In FIG. 38(b), as the determination process in step S059, it is determined whether the value of the A register is a normal value (016H) (SPm7), and according to the determination result, the power supply abnormality check process (SYSTEM_126, It is determined whether to jump to step S054) or to the determination process of step S065 (SPm8). Here, if the value of the A register is a normal value, it is assumed that the reception has been properly completed, and the process jumps to step S060 (SYSTEM_129). If the value of the A register is not a normal value, the judgment process of step S065 ( The process moves on to a process for determining whether or not the ball is in the ball removal state.

If the process moves to the determination process of step S065, then it is compared and determined whether or not the value of the A register is the checksum value (017H) in the unballed state (SPm9), and the power supply abnormality check is performed according to the determination result. It is determined whether to jump to the process (SYSTEM_126, step S054) or to the process of permitting the firing operation in step S037 (SPm10). Here, if the value of the A register and "017H (ball removal state)" do not match, that is, it is not the "ball removal state", it is assumed that there is some kind of malfunction, and the process jumps to power supply abnormality check processing (SYSTEM_126, step S054). . On the other hand, if the value of the A register and "017H (ball release state)" match, that is, "ball release state", firing operation is permitted (SPm11, step S037), and power supply abnormality check processing (SYSTEM_126, step S054) ) (SPm12).

As shown in the diagram, 13 bytes are required for the "comparative example" in FIG. 38 (B), but 12 bytes are required for the "specific example" in FIG. is connected to. For gaming machines installed in pachinko parlors that are intended for Category 7 businesses under the Act on the Regulation of Entertainment Businesses, etc. and Business Appropriation, etc., the Because the program capacity of the ROM installed on the main board (in this embodiment, the main control unit 20 corresponds) that controls the overall operation is limited (Appended Table 3 of the same regulation, preventing unauthorized modification and other changes) (Article 6 related)) Reducing the program capacity, even if it is just one byte, has an important meaning.

In addition, when the ball is being drawn, the firing operation of the firing device 32 is permitted, but the game permission flag is not set to the ON state, and the process proceeds to the infinite loop process from step S040, which is the same as the normal game process. It's okay. Specifically, when the ball is out (step S065: ON), steps S060, S061, and S037 are sequentially executed as in the case when the checksum is normal, but the game permission flag ON state setting process in step S063 is It may be configured to skip (the game permission flag remains in the OFF state) and proceed to the processing from step S040 onwards. In any case, if the ball is being drawn, there is a risk that the circulating game balls may leak out of the game machine, so the processing required for normal game progress (for example, the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 39) It is preferable to perform control so that the 4ms interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 and the 108ms interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 are not executed.

<70. Main control side timer interrupt processing (second embodiment): Fig. 39, Fig. 43>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 43. FIG. 39 shows a 4ms interrupt process among the main control side timer interrupt processes, and FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a 108ms interrupt process. These main control side timer interrupt processes are activated by an interrupt from the CTC at fixed time intervals (about 4 ms, about 108 ms), and are executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of interrupt processes including 4ms interrupt process and 108ms interrupt process are handled. The 4ms interrupt processing shown in FIG. 39 has basically the same processing content as the above-mentioned "main control side timer interrupt processing" explained in FIG. , winning games, etc.) are executed. On the other hand, the 108 ms interrupt process shown in FIG. Display processing for the display device 77, display processing for the performance display device 99, etc.) and information required to perform control processing for generating and outputting necessary information for external devices (ball lending device, hall computer HC)) Processing related to the creation and output of gaming machine information notification messages (see FIG. 52) is mainly executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the interrupt priority level (priority order) of the 4ms interrupt process is set higher than that of the 108ms interrupt process. This is because no particular problem occurs even if processing related to the number of balls held, performance information, etc. is performed at relatively long time intervals (about 100ms to 110ms), but processing related to production and symbol change display games is This is because in order to proceed smoothly, time constraints are severe and processing must be performed at extremely short intervals (about 2ms to 4ms). Note that a configuration may be adopted in which multiple interrupts in which a 4 ms interrupt process with a high priority level is executed while a 108 ms interrupt process with a low priority level is being executed are permitted. Further, when executing the 108ms interrupt processing, the interrupt disable state may be set, and after the processing is finished, the interrupt enable state may be set. In this case, if an interrupt request for 4ms interrupt processing is received during 108ms interrupt processing, the configuration may be such that the 4ms interrupt processing can be executed immediately after finishing the 08ms interrupt processing.

<4ms interrupt processing: Figure 39>
First, the 4ms interrupt processing will be explained with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 39, the same step numbers are assigned to processes that are substantially the same as those in the first embodiment (main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 9), and descriptions of the process contents are given as appropriate to avoid duplication. Omitted.

In FIG. 39, when a 4ms timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes a power abnormality check process (step S081).

Next, it is determined whether the game permission flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S81A). If the game permission flag is not in the ON state (step S81A:≠5AH), it is assumed that the game processing is prohibited, and the process of steps S082 to S105 shown in the figure is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S104, where the count value of the WDT is cleared, After completing the 4ms interrupt processing, the main control side main processing is executed until the next 4ms interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the game permission flag is in the ON state (step S81A: = 5AH), it is assumed that the game processing is allowed, and the processing required for normal game progress (symbol change display game, general power release game, winning game (jackpot game) , small winning games, etc.), timer management processing (step S082) to WDT clearing processing (step S104) are sequentially executed. However, since the gaming machine according to this embodiment is a "managed gaming machine", compared to the main control side timer interrupt processing of the "non-managed gaming machine" type shown in FIG. There is no prize ball management process (step S090) for paying out the performance information, and since the processing related to the performance information is performed on the frame control unit 22 side, the performance display monitor process (FIG. 9 Step S102) is also not provided.

The information necessary for game progress is created by creating a "gaming machine information notification message" described later, and transmitting it to the frame control unit 22 at the necessary timing (during the 108ms interrupt processing shown in FIG. 43 described later). The frame control unit 22 receives this gaming machine information notification message, and based on the information contained therein, calculates and displays the number of balls held, performance information, and transmits information to the external device (hall computer HC). The system is configured to perform management processing of specific game information (for example, information on the number of prize balls, number of symbol changes, number of hits, detection of fraudulent activities, etc.).

(Game machine information notification message: Figure 52, Figure 53A to Figure 53F)
The above-mentioned "gaming machine information notification message" will be explained with reference to FIG. 52 and FIGS. 53A to 53F.

FIG. 52 shows details of the gaming machine information notification message. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine information notification message includes message length (1 byte), command code (1 byte), communication serial number (1 byte), main control status 1 (1 byte), main control status 2 (1 byte), Game machine error status (1 byte), fraud detection status (1 byte), number of game information (1 byte), game information n (n = 0 to 5: type information (1 byte) + count information for each piece of game information) It consists of 2 bytes (1 byte), 0 bytes to 10 bytes), and a checksum (1 byte), totaling 9 to 19 bytes.

Regarding the communication serial number of the gaming machine information notification message, a value obtained by adding 1 to the previous communication serial number is transmitted when transmitting the gaming machine information notification message. Specifically, the communication serial number takes a value from 0 to 255 (0x00 to 0xFF), and returns to 0 after 255, thus cycling through the range from 0 to 255.

The main control state 1, main control state 2, gaming machine error state, and fraud detection state are mainly information related to the outer end signal output from the external connection terminal board 85 connected to the frame control section 22. The "advantageous state" in the "Contents" column related to main control state 1 and main control state 2 means a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal game, and includes, for example, a time saving state, a variable probability state, a potential state, etc. . Further, "during a jackpot + in an advantageous state" in the "contents" column of main control state 2 means a period during a jackpot and a period in an advantageous state after the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, the gaming machine error state specifies information on the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine. Fraud detection status 1 is fraud monitoring information (fraud detection information) detected by radio sensors, vibration sensors, magnetic sensors, etc. installed to detect fraudulent acts on gaming machines. "Fraud 1 to 6" specifies the type of fraud detected by the sensor. For example, the fraud detection information includes bits 0 to 3 (board fraud 1 to 3), a detection state by a radio wave sensor formed near the big winning opening 50, a detection state by a magnetic sensor formed near the big winning opening 50, The state of the radio wave sensor formed near the lower starting port 35 is assigned, and when fraud is detected (if normal, the corresponding bit is set to "0", and if fraud is detected (abnormal), the corresponding bit is set to "0"). 1), the detection of fraudulent activity is notified to external devices such as the hall computer HC and the data counter DT via the external connection terminal board 85.

(Game information: Figures 53A to 53F)
The above game information will be explained using FIGS. 53A to 53F. Note that FIGS. 53B to 53F representatively show game information (type information + count information) that is closely related to the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 53A, the gaming state is composed of a total of 2 bytes: "type information (upper 1 byte)" and "count information (lower 1 byte)." As shown in FIG. 53A(A), in the above "type information", the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) indicate the data type (types 1 to 15), and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) indicate the data content. For example, winning a prize in a certain winning slot, the number of confirmed symbols (notifies the number of changes in special symbols and regular symbols), special symbol hits (notifies the occurrence of jackpots and small hits), and regular symbols (notifies the occurrence of jackpots and small wins). Notification of the occurrence of a hit (auxiliary hit)), number of accessory objects (notification of the opening of the big prize opening when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated), passing through a specific area (notification of the passage of a game ball in a specific area), external Specifies terminal board pulse output (instructs pulse output from the dedicated unit), performance information status notification (notifies status required for performance information calculation), etc.

As shown in Figures 53B to 53F, the above "count information" includes the information required to calculate the number of balls held (number of prize balls information: Figures 53B and 53C), the number of confirmed symbols (Figure 53D), and the number of hits. (FIG. 53E) and information that can specify changes in gaming status (FIG. 53F) as information necessary for calculating performance information.

<(B) Count information related to the number of prize balls (data type = 1 to 8): Figures 53B to 53C>
FIG. 53B(B) shows "count information related to the number of prize balls". As shown in the diagram, the count information related to the number of prize balls, the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are the number of prize balls (1 to 15), and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) are the number of prize balls (1 piece). is to be specified. In this embodiment, as an example of game information (type information + count information) related to the number of prize balls, data as shown in (Example 1) to (Example 6) in FIGS. 53B to 53C are created. It has become.

(Data type 1: Starting entrance prize)
FIG. 53B (Example 1) shows game information when two winnings occur in the upper start opening 34 of three prize balls. This (Example 1) is an example of "starting entrance prize" of "data type 1" shown in FIG. 53A. In the case of this embodiment, there are two starting ports, the "upper starting port 34" and the "lower starting port 35", so here, the starting port number (see the "Data number" column in FIG. 53A) is used as the upper starting port. The port 34 is assigned "starting port 1", the lower starting port is assigned "starting port 2", and the others are left unused. Note that one game information is created for each winning number (the same applies to other cases). In this example, since the number of prizes won is two, two pieces of data of "0x1131" are created as game information.

(Data type 2: Big prize winning with special electric accessories)
FIG. 53B (Example 2) shows game information when three wins occur in the big winning hole 50 of 15 prize balls. This (Example 2) is an example of ``Winning a big prize opening with a special electric accessory'' of ``Data type 2'' shown in Figure 53A, and here, when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the We mainly deal with winnings in the big prize opening by "small wins". In the case of this embodiment, only the "big winning hole 50" is provided as the big winning hole, so the big winning hole 50 is set to "1" as the big winning hole number (see the "Data number" column in FIG. 53A). , and the rest are unused. In this example, since the number of prizes won is three, three pieces of data of "0x21F1" are created as game information.

(Data type 3: Winning opening prize)
FIG. 53B (Example 3) shows game information when one prize is won in the general prize opening 43b of three prize balls. This (Example 3) is an example of the "winning opening prize" of "data type 3" shown in FIG. 53A. In the case of this embodiment, the general winning holes 43a to 43e are provided, so the general winning holes 43a to 43e are set as the winning hole number (see the column ``Data number'' in FIG. 53A). 1" to "5", and the others are left unused. In this example, since the number of prizes won is one, one piece of data "0x3231" is created as game information. In addition, among the general winning holes 43, those having the same number of prize balls may be assigned a common winning hole number.

(Data type 4: Passing through the gate/Putting in the gate)
FIG. 53C (Example 4) shows game information when a game ball passes once through the normal symbol starting port 37 (0 prize balls) consisting of a passing gate. This (Example 4) is an example of "gate passage/ordinary figure actuation entrance prize" of "data type 4" shown in FIG. 53A. In the case of this embodiment, since the passing gate is provided with only the "normal symbol starting port 37", the passing gate number or the normal symbol operating port number (see the "Data number" column in FIG. 53A) is used as the normal symbol starting port. Port 37 is assigned to "1", and the others are left unused. In this example, since the number of prizes won is one, one piece of data "0x4101" is created as game information.

(Data type 5: Start-up prize due to normal electric accessory operation)
FIG. 53C (Example 5) shows game information when one prize ball is won in the lower prize opening 35 by normal electric accessory operation. This (Example 5) is an example of "starting entrance winning by normal electric accessory operation" of "data type 5" shown in FIG. 53A. Here, we will deal with winnings in the lower starting port 35 (starting port 2) during the normal electricity open game. In this example, since the number of prizes won is one, one piece of data "0x5201" is created as game information.

(Data type 6: Big prize opening won by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device)
FIG. 53C (Example 6) shows game information when one prize ball is won in the big winning hole 50 of 15 prize balls by the accessory continuous operation device. This (Example 6) is an example of the "big winning opening prize due to the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device" of "data type 6" shown in FIG. 53A. Here, we will deal with winning in the big winning opening due to the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device, that is, winning in the big winning opening due to a "jackpot". In this example, since the number of prizes won is one, one piece of data "0x61F1" is created as game information.

<(B) Count information related to the number of confirmed symbols (data type = 9): Figure 53D>
FIG. 53D shows an example of "count information related to the number of confirmed symbols." In the count information related to the number of confirmed symbols, the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are unused, and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) specify the number of confirmed symbols (1 time).

As an example of count information related to the number of confirmed symbols, Figure 53D (Example 7) shows the game information when the special symbol 1 stops once, and Figure 53D (Example 8) shows the game information when the normal symbol stops once. Indicates game information. In the case of this embodiment, since three types of symbols are handled: special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol 1, as the special symbol number or ordinary symbol number (see the "Data number" column in FIG. 53A), Special symbol 1 is assigned to "1", special symbol 2 is assigned to "2", normal symbol 1 is assigned to "3", and the others are not used. (Example 7) is a case where the special symbol 1 stops once, so data of "0x9101" is created as game information. Moreover, since (Example 8) is a case where the normal symbol stops once, data of "0x9301" is created as game information.

<(C) Count information related to winning (data type = 10 (per special symbol), data type = 11 (per normal symbol)): Figure 53E>
FIG. 53E shows an example of "count information related to winnings." In the count information related to winnings, the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are unused (fixed to 0), and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) specify the number of wins (1 time).

As examples of count information related to special symbol hits, FIG. 53E (Example 9) shows gaming information when a jackpot occurs once, and FIG. 53E (Example 10) shows gaming information when a small hit occurs once. shows. In the case of this embodiment, since two types of special symbol hits, jackpot and small win, are handled, the special symbol win type (see the "Data number" column in Figure 53A) is "1" for jackpot, and "1" for small hit. is assigned to "2", and the others are left unused. In the same figure (Example 9), since a jackpot (jackpot game) occurs once, data "0xA101" is created as game information. Further, in the same figure (Example 10), since a small win (small win game) occurs once, data "0xA201" is created as game information.

Further, as an example of count information related to a normal symbol hit, FIG. 53E (Example 11) shows game information when an auxiliary hit (normal power open game) occurs once. In the case of this embodiment, since one type per support is handled as the type per normal symbol, the per support is set to "1" as the type per normal symbol (per support) (see the "Data number" column in Fig. 53A). , and the rest are unused. In the same figure (Example 11), since the assist win occurs once, data of "0xB101" is created as game information. Note that the number of types of supplementary winnings is not limited to one, and a plurality of types of supplemental winnings with different supplemental winning games may be provided.

<(d) Count information related to the number of accessory items (number of times the big prize opening is opened) (data type = 12): Figure 53F>
FIG. 53F shows an example of “count information (data type=12) related to the number of accessory items (number of times the big winning hole is opened)”. In the count information related to the number of accessory items, the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are unused (fixed to 0), and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) specify the number of times the big prize opening is opened (1 time). It has become. Note that the accessory number related to data type 12 (see the "Data Number" column in FIG. 53A) is fixed at 1 (0, 2 to 15 are unused).

As an example of count information related to the number of times the accessory is opened (the number of times the big winning hole is opened), FIG. 53F (Example 12) shows game information when the big winning hole 50 is opened once. When the big prize opening 50 is opened once, as shown in the figure, data "0xC101" is created as game information.

<(E) Count information related to performance information status notification (data type = 15): Figure 53F>
FIG. 53F illustrates "count information related to performance information status notification". In the count information related to performance information status notification, the upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are unused (fixed to 0), and the lower 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) are as shown in the figure. Bit 1 specifies whether or not there is a jackpot (low base medium, high base medium), bit 2 specifies the lottery status type (high probability medium, low probability medium), bit 3 is unused. There is.

As an example of count information related to performance information status notification, FIG. 53F (Example 13) shows gaming information when the status changes to high base (time saving, probability change). In this case, as shown in the figure, the type information is "data type '15', data number '1 (fixed)' (see Figure 53A)", and the count information is: upper 4 bits (bits 4 to 7) are fixed at 0, and lower 4 bits are fixed at 0. The bits (bits 0 to 3) are respectively high base "1", normal "1", low probability medium "0", and unused "0". In this case, data "0xF101" is created as game information.

The game information is created during a predetermined process within the 4ms interrupt process and is stored in a predetermined RAM area. For example, game information regarding winnings (prize balls) (data types=1 to 8: FIGS. 53B to 53C) is created in the input management process (step S083). In addition, game information (data type = 9: Fig. 53D) regarding the number of confirmed symbols for ordinary symbols is created in the ordinary symbol management process (step S091). You can create it later). Furthermore, game information regarding the number of confirmed symbols for special symbols (data type 9: Figure 53D) is created in the special symbol management process (step S093), for example, in the step of the special symbol confirmation time process (Figures 16A to 16B). It may be created before S472, that is, after the special symbol final display time has elapsed.

In addition, the game information (data type 10: Figure 53E) regarding the special symbol hit (big hit/small hit occurrence) and the game information (data type 12: Figure 53F) regarding the number of access points (number of times the big winning opening is opened) are It is created in the accessory management process (step S095), and game information (data type 11: FIG. 53F) regarding the normal symbol (normal power open game occurrence) is created in the normal electric accessory management process (step S092). In addition, count information (data type 15) related to performance information status notification needs to be created when the gaming status changes (low base ⇔ high base). Processes such as step S475 (at the time of jackpot) of the confirmation time process (FIGS. 16A to 16B), time saving end of steps S482 and S486, jackpot end process (step S509) during the special electric accessory management process (step S095), etc. In this case, the performance information may be created when a situation (change in gaming state) required for calculation occurs. In any case, the gaming information may be created during appropriate processing.

Note that the gaming information regarding the main control state 1, main control state 2, gaming machine error state, and fraud detection state is mainly information output from the external connection terminal board 85 connected to the frame control unit 22, and these pieces of information is created, for example, in the external terminal management process (step S099) and output to the external device.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 39. In the input management process (step S083) of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned input data creation process, unauthorized winning monitoring process (winning invalidating process), etc. are performed, but as described above, the gaming machine information Among the gaming information related to the notification message, processing related to creation and setting of gaming information (FIGS. 53B to 53C) regarding winnings (prize balls) is also performed.

<Input management processing: Figure 40>
The input management process of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the input management process.

In FIG. 57A, the CPU 201 first executes input data creation processing (step S191). In the input data creation process, first, the ON/OFF state of the input port is acquired, the presence or absence of a win in the winning opening is checked, and winning detection data (switch input data) is created. Specifically, it is possible to specify whether or not there is a winning prize for each winning opening such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, and the general winning opening sensor 43h. Winning detection data is created and stored in a predetermined area (switch input data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, switch information creation processing is executed based on the winning detection data (step S193). In the switch information creation process, "switch information" used in the "winning event storage process" shown in FIG. ). In order to simplify the explanation, the general winning holes 43a to 43e have the same number of prize balls, and the general winning holes 43a to 43e are treated as one type of winning hole (the winning hole number is "1"). (see the corresponding column for type 3 in FIG. 53A).

As already described using FIGS. 53A to 53C, game information related to prize winnings is created by creating game information such as starting opening winnings (data type 1) to large winning opening winnings due to the operation of the accessory continuous actuation device (data type 6). Is required. Therefore, in this switch information creation process, the following switch information is acquired and stored for each winning opening. Note that if there is no winning, the winning detection data is not updated, so bit data "00000000B" with all bits 0 indicating no winning is stored.

(a) Switch information related to the upper starting port 34 When there is a winning in the upper starting port 34, "00000001B" is stored in "W_SWEDG1" as bit data indicating the winning.
(B) Switch information related to the normal symbol starting hole 37 If there is a winning result from the normal symbol starting hole 37, "00000100B" is stored in "W_SWEDG3" as bit data indicating the winning.
(C) Switch information related to the general winning hole 43 When there is a winning in the general winning hole 43, "00100000B" is stored in "W_SWEDG5" as bit data indicating the winning.

In the case of the lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 42 and the big winning opening 50 of the special variable winning device 52, as shown in FIG. 53B (Example 2) and FIG. 53C (Example 5), In order to create game information related to electric accessories (electric accessories, special electric accessories), switch information is created using the following procedure.

(d) Switch information related to the lower starting port 35)
When there is a prize in the lower starting port 35, it is determined whether the normal electric accessory is not in operation (during a non-universal electricity release game) or the normal electric accessory is in operation (during a normal electricity release game). , if the winning is while the normal electric accessory is in operation, the bit data “00000010B” indicating the winning is stored in “W_SWEDG2”, and if the normal electric accessory is not in operation, the bit data “00000000B” indicating the winning is stored in “W_SWEDG2”. (treated as invalid)" is stored. That is, different switch information is stored depending on whether the normal electric accessory is in operation or not.
The operation/non-operation (ON/OFF state) of the normal electric accessory can be determined based on the ON/OFF state of the "normal electric utility flag". This "general power operating flag" is a flag for determining whether or not the general power release game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the general power release game is in progress. , and when the flag is in the OFF state (≠5AH), it indicates that the general electricity open game is not in progress. In this embodiment, if there is a winning while the general electricity open game is not in progress, this is treated as invalid, and "00000000B" is stored, which is the same as when there is no winning. However, regarding the game ball (remaining ball remaining in the lower starting port 35) that was won just before the end of the normal electricity open game (just before the closing of the lower starting port 35), it is necessary to treat this as a valid winning, so the remaining A margin time (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 1 second) is provided for ejecting the ball, and even if the movable blade 47 is in the closed state, the normal power operation flag is not immediately turned off, and the margin time is The normal power operation flag is controlled to be in the ON state until the time period has elapsed. Although not shown, the state of the normal electric power operating flag is managed in the normal electric accessory management process (step S092).
Therefore, a game ball that has won a prize beyond this margin time will be treated as an illegal prize, and an error process will be performed to indicate that the prize has been won illegally. , 30 seconds), a dedicated error notification is performed (bottom start opening fraudulent prize winning monitoring process). However, a configuration may be adopted in which only an error notification is performed without invalidating the winning prize. In addition, in game states with electricity support (such as during time reduction or variable probability), since power supply open games frequently occur, all winnings may be treated as valid without determining whether each winning is fraudulent. Whether electricity support is in progress or not can be determined by checking the ON/OFF state of the extension state flag for opening of utility facilities.

(e) Switch information related to the big winning opening 50 When there is a prize in the big winning opening 50, it is determined whether it is "during a jackpot game" or "during a small winning game", and if a prize is won during a jackpot game. If so, bit data "00001000B" indicating the winning is stored in "W_SWEDG4", and if it is a winning during a small winning game, bit data "00010000B" indicating the winning is stored in "W_SWEDG4". To determine whether or not you are playing a jackpot game, check the ON/OFF state (in operation/non-operation) of the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device activation flag (the ON/OFF state of the above-mentioned conditional device activation flag may be determined). All you have to do is judge. Further, whether or not a small winning game is in progress can be determined by determining the ON/OFF state of the small winning flag. In addition, winnings when the accessory continuous activation device activation flag (or conditional device activation flag) and small winning flag are in the OFF state are treated as illegal winnings, and error processing indicating that the winnings are illegal, e.g. The winning is invalidated (all bits are set to 0), and a dedicated error notification is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (big winning opening illegal winning monitoring process). However, a configuration may be adopted in which only an error notification is performed without invalidating the winning prize.

After completing the switch information creation process (step S192), the winning event storage process shown in FIG. 41A is then executed (step S193).

<Winning event storage processing: Figure 41A (Figure 41B), Figure 42>
FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing details of the above entered award event storage process.

In FIG. 41A, the CPU 201 first obtains the switch count table (D_SWCNT) shown in FIG. 56 (step S201).

<Switch count table: Figure 56>
FIG. 56 shows an example of a switch count table. Note that this switch count table actually defines a group of data related to all switches (sensors) required when creating game information, but here we will focus on data related to switches (sensors) that are closely related to the present invention. are shown representatively.

Referring to FIG. 56, in the switch count table, winning determination bit data and event number data are defined corresponding to the switch edge storage areas (W_SWEDG1 to W_SWEDG6). "Winning determination bit data" is data that can determine whether or not a prize has been won and the state at the time of winning with respect to a winning opening. The details of the determination method will be explained later, but the latter "state at the time of winning" means, for example, when there is a winning in the big winning opening 50, whether the winning is during a jackpot game or whether it is a winning during a small winning game. This is to identify whether the prize is among the winners. "Event number data" is used as an identifier to specify the gaming information (type information + count information) related to the gaming machine information notification message, and is used in the ring buffer transmission process (described later in FIG. 44B). It is used in step S155 (FIGS. 46A to 46B) showing details thereof.

Next, the number of loops (the number of switch information to be determined set in the switch count table) is set (step S202). Switch information corresponding to the number of loops is acquired (step S203). For example, if it is the first loop, the switch information stored in W_SWEDG1 corresponding to EVENT1 in the switch count table shown in FIG. 56 is acquired.

Next, the acquired switch information and the corresponding winning determination bit are compared (step S204). For example, in the first loop, the bit data stored in "W_SWEDG1 (switch information corresponding to the upper starting port 34)" of the switch count table shown in FIG. (bit pattern corresponding to event number 1 (@EVENT1))" and masks the bits other than the 0th bit. In this example, when the switch information of W_SWEDG1 is "present (ON state)", the logical operation result is "00000001B" (judgment result = YES), and the corresponding switch information is "absent (OFF state)". In this case, the logical operation result becomes "00000000B" (determination result=NO).

If there is a winning determination (step S204: YES), the corresponding event number is acquired (step S205). For example, if it is the first loop, event number 1 (EVENT1) of the switch count table shown in FIG. 56 is acquired. Then, the event number is stored in a predetermined RAM area (ring buffer) (step S206: ring buffer storage process), and the number of loops is decremented (step S207). Note that details of the ring buffer storage process in step S206 will be described later using FIG. 42.

Here, in the fourth and fifth loops, the bit data of "W_SWEDG4", that is, the switch information of the big winning hole 50, is successively determined, and in the fourth loop, the bit data of "W_SWEDG4", that is, the switch information of the big winning opening 50, is determined, and in the fourth loop, the winning determination bit "00001000B ( In the fifth loop, it is compared with the winning determination bit "00010000B (bit pattern corresponding to event number 5 (@EVENT5))". In the second loop, it is specified whether or not it is a "big winning opening prize during a jackpot game", and in the fifth loop, it is specified whether or not it is a "big winning opening prize winning during a small winning game". It has become. If there is a winning determination, "event number 4" will be acquired if it is the fourth loop, and "event number 5" will be acquired if it is the fifth loop.

On the other hand, if there is no winning determination (step S204: NO), the loop count is decremented (step S207) without executing the processing of steps S205 to S206 (event number storage processing). Therefore, if there is no winning determination, that is, if there is no game information to be transmitted (if no event to memorize the event number occurs), the event number storage process (ring buffer storage process) is skipped. Therefore, event numbers are stored in the order of occurrence.

Next, it is determined whether the number of loops is zero (step S208), and the processes of steps S203 to S208 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero (until all switch information in the switch count table is determined). Step S208: NO processing route). If the number of loops becomes zero (step S208: NO), the winning event storage process ends.

(Ring buffer storage process (step S206): Figure 42)
The ring buffer storage process (step S206) in FIG. 41A will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the ring buffer storage process.

(About ring buffer: Figure 55)
In this embodiment, a "ring buffer" is used as a means for storing data related to gaming information in a gaming machine information notification message, and data is stored in the order in which events occur. Let me briefly explain this "ring buffer". FIG. 55 shows a conceptual diagram of a shift buffer and a ring buffer. As is well known, a ring buffer is a "circular buffer" that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it is stored at the beginning. This is a buffer that has the function of returning and storing data (see FIG. 55(2)). In the case of the ring buffer shown in (2) of the same figure, data is written to the ring buffer address indicated by the "save pointer (pointer to specify the address (storage destination address) for writing data to the ring buffer)". The data is read from the ring buffer address indicated by the "load pointer (pointer for specifying the address for reading data from the ring buffer (read destination address)").

Therefore, the length of readable data, that is, the amount of stored data is the length of "Save pointer" - "Load pointer". The address is 8 bytes. In addition, in the illustrated case, for example, if 5 pieces of data are sent without new data being written (see after sending in the figure), the load pointer is incremented and updated to address 05 each time one piece of data is read. On the other hand, since no new data has been written to the save data, it remains at address 08 before data transmission. Therefore, in this case, the number of remaining data is 3 bytes.

Note that when no data is held in the ring buffer (for example, when the power is turned on for the first time or when the RAM is cleared), the save pointer and load pointer point to the same address (for example, the start address of the ring buffer (address 0) ) is stored). In light of the above, the ring buffer reads the data at the first address, clears the buffer at the first address, shifts the data at the next address to the buffer at the first address, creates free space, and stores new data. This is different from a "shift type buffer" (see FIG. 55(1)). In the case of this embodiment, the shift buffer is used, for example, in pending storage (steps S406 to S407 in FIG. 12). Further, the ring buffer does not require shift processing unlike the shift buffer, and has the advantage that the processing time is relatively short.

Referring to FIG. 42, CPU 201 first obtains the value of the save pointer (step S231). Specifically, the address of the ring buffer indicated by the save pointer is obtained.

Next, it is determined whether there is free space in the ring buffer (step S232).

(If there is no free space: Step S232 → Steps S239 to S242)
If there is no free space (step S232: NO), it is assumed that there is an overflow state (full state), and predetermined error processing (steps S239 to S242) is executed. The reason for executing error handling when an overflow condition occurs is as follows.

The data (event number) stored in the ring buffer is used to create gaming information (type information and count information) related to the gaming machine information notification message every time the 108ms interrupt process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed. When this game information is transmitted to the slot control unit 22, the data is cleared (see step S175 in FIG. 46A and FIG. 55(2), which will be described later). Therefore, even if data is stored, free space is secured each time 108ms interrupt processing is executed, and the next 108ms interrupt is Theoretically, by the time the process is executed, an area sufficient to prevent the ring buffer from overflowing is secured. Since it generally takes about 20 ms to detect a winning prize, it is theoretically possible to detect a maximum of about 5 winning prizes within 108 ms.

However, if excessive winnings occur due to some kind of malfunction, the above-mentioned overflow state may occur. For example, the above-mentioned overflow state may occur when a fraudulent act such as a so-called "big ball" is carried out. "Otama Goto" is a game ball that is larger than a normal (regular) game ball and is jammed into the sensor (detection switch) part of the winning opening, causing the sensor to detect the game ball and transmitting unauthorized radio waves. This is a fraudulent act in which the sensor is erroneously activated by skipping and generating excessive winning signals.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned overflow state occurs, it is assumed that excessive winnings have occurred due to fraudulent activity, and a predetermined error process is executed to discard new data without accumulating it in the buffer. (During the overflow state, new data is not updated and stored). Specifically, when an overflow state occurs, as an error process, the game permission flag is cleared (step S239), and a firing stop signal NS is output to the frame control unit 22 to disable the firing device 32 from firing game balls. (Step S240), and sends an error command to the production control section 24 (Steps S241 to S242). As a result, the game progress process is forcibly controlled to a stopped state. The error command sent here includes information indicating that an overflow state has occurred or an illegal winning error (excessive winning error) has occurred, and when the production control unit 24 receives the error command, the error information is Provides dedicated error notifications. An overflow condition is a serious error that has a serious impact on the gaming machine in that it is likely to be caused by fraudulent activity (an error with a relatively high error notification priority), and the error notification is It is preferable to perform the notification in a flashy manner using at least two of light effects, sound effects, image display effects, and movable body effects, rather than using effects.

Additionally, since errors caused by overflow conditions are considered "serious errors," the error should be resolved at least when "RAM clear processing" is executed, rather than simply being recovered by turning the gaming machine's power off and on. is preferred. Specifically, when the internal RAM clearing process (processing route from step S025 to step S031 in FIG. 36A) is executed by turning on the RAM clear switch, or when the setting change process is executed (step S025 in FIG. 36A), (Processing route from S023 to step S031), it is preferable to configure the system so that this error can be resolved.

Additionally, when monitoring overflow conditions, there are advantages as described below. For example, when monitoring excessive winnings, it is necessary to compare and judge the number of winnings within a predetermined time (winning count) with a threshold (number of winnings considered as excessive winnings), but it is necessary to monitor the buffer overflow state. In some cases, the task is simply to monitor the free space of the storage area, so such processing is not necessary, leading to a reduction in control burden. In addition, when monitoring excessive winnings, it is usually necessary to install a "fraud monitoring radio wave sensor" near the winning opening as a countermeasure against large winnings, but when monitoring buffer overflow status, it is necessary to install a Since there is no need to monitor radio waves, there is no need to install a radio wave sensor, leading to cost reduction and easier design.

(Modified example α: Modified example related to error handling when an overflow condition occurs)
Note that the error processing related to the above-mentioned overflow state may be configured as follows. For example, if it is an overflow state (step S232: NO), an error flag (hereinafter referred to as "OF error flag") specifying the occurrence of an overflow state is set (ON state), and the ON/OFF state of the OF error flag is set. This is monitored in the subsequent error management process (step S089). It may be configured such that when the ON state of the OF error flag is confirmed in the error management process (step S089), the processes of steps S239 to S242 are performed.

Note that although a ring buffer is used in this embodiment, a shift buffer may be used. In this case as well, when the shift buffer storage area overflows, predetermined error processing (processing in steps S239 to S242) may be executed.

(If there is free space: Step S232 → Steps S233 to S238)
On the other hand, if there is free space in the ring buffer, it is assumed that the gaming operation is a normal operation, and the processing from step S233 onwards is sequentially executed.

If there is free space in the ring buffer (step S232: YES), the acquired event number (data acquired in step S205 of FIG. 41A) is stored in the ring buffer area at the address indicated by the save pointer (step S234).

Next, the save pointer (storage destination address) is incremented, the storage destination address of the ring buffer is updated, and the next storage destination address is specified (step S235).

Next, it is determined whether the updated save pointer exceeds the final address of the ring buffer (step S235). If the final address has been exceeded (step S235: YES), the start address of the ring buffer is acquired (step S236), and this is stored in the save pointer (step S237). However, if it does not exceed the final address (step S235: NO), it is assumed that the data storage space has not reached the end of the ring buffer, and the updated address is stored in the save pointer (step S237).

Then, the information stock number is incremented (step S238). The information stock number is the number of currently stored game information ("type information/count information": see FIG. 52), and is incremented by 1 each time data is stored. The current number of game information can be specified from this information stock number. Thereby, the process exits from the ring buffer storage process and proceeds to the process of step S207 in FIG. 41A.

(Specific example of creating other game information: Figure 41B)
As mentioned above, when setting game information (event number) related to winnings (prize balls), check whether there is a winning or not, and if there is a winning (event occurs), game information according to the game progress status is set. Get it and store it in the ring buffer. Similarly for other game states, when an event occurs, the corresponding event number may be acquired and stored in the ring buffer. An example is shown in FIG. 41B.

For example, in the case of "gaming information related to the number of confirmed symbols" of data type 9 shown in FIG. 53D, as shown in FIG. 41B (A), after the confirmed display time elapses (step S471: YES), the special The event number corresponding to the symbol is acquired (step S205A). In addition, which special symbol has stopped can be specified by checking the status of the special symbol fluctuating flag (check the ON/OFF status of the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag and special symbol 2 fluctuating flag mentioned above). judge). In this event number acquisition process, the special symbol fluctuation flag is determined, and if the current event acquisition target is special symbol 1, "event number 7 (special symbol 1 stop once)" is acquired, and if it is special symbol 2, then "event number 7" is obtained. For example, "event number 8 (special symbol 2 stop once)" is acquired (see the notes column of FIG. 53D and FIG. 57 for the specification of the event number). Then, the acquired event number is stored in the ring buffer (step S206), and the processes from step S472 onward are then executed.

For example, in the case of data type 10 "gaming information related to winning" shown in FIG. 53E, the corresponding event number may be acquired in the special electric accessory management process (step S095).

Specifically, if the small win is won, as shown in FIG. 41B(B), at the start of the small win game, "event number 11 (small win occurred)" is acquired (step S205B), and the event number is Store it in the ring buffer (step S206). Then, the necessary setting process may be performed when starting the small winning game. If the jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 41B(C), in the jackpot start process (step S505), event number 12 (jackpot occurrence) is acquired at the start of the jackpot game (step S205C). The event number is stored in the ring buffer (step S206). Then, necessary setting processing may be performed when starting the jackpot game.

Note that the ring buffer storage process (step S206) for storing the event number is a common process to reduce the control burden.

<108ms interrupt processing: Figure 43>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the 108ms interrupt process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing details of the 108ms interrupt process.

In FIG. 43, when a 108ms timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first determines whether the game permission flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S111). If the game permission flag is not in the ON state (step S111:≠5AH), the timer interrupt process is ended without doing anything, and the main control side main process is executed until the next 108 ms interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the game permission flag is in the ON state (step S111:=5AH), then it is determined whether the reception check start flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S112). This reception check start flag is a flag that specifies whether or not to execute a check process (processing of steps S113 to S118 to be described later) as to whether or not the gaming machine information response message has been correctly received from the frame control unit 22. If the flag is ON (5AH), execution of the check process is designated, and if the flag is OFF (00H), non-execution of the check process (skipping steps S113 to S122) is designated. The reception check start flag is set to the ON state in step S133 (see FIG. 44A) during the message transmission process in step S123, which will be described later. Therefore, when this determination process is executed during the first 108ms interrupt process, the reception check start flag is in the OFF state (step S112:≠5AH), and the above check process (steps S113 to S122) is skipped, which will be described later. The process then proceeds to the message transmission process (step S123). In this way, the reason why the reception check start flag is set to OFF state when the first 108ms interrupt processing is executed is because the checksum of the gaming machine information response message is not received when the first 108ms interrupt processing is executed. This is because it is necessary to skip the processing (steps S113 to S122 in the figure). In this respect, the "reception check start flag" functions as a flag for specifying whether or not it is the first interruption.

If the reception check start flag is in the ON state (step S112:=5AH). Next, the communication serial number is acquired in a register (for example, A register) (step S113). This communication serial number is the communication serial number at the time of sending the previous gaming machine information notification message. In addition, at the time of the current transmission, the communication serial number in which "+1" is added is transmitted (see step S142 in FIG. 44A, which will be described later).

Next, "017H", which is the checksum value of the gaming machine information response message when excluding the communication serial number, is added to the acquired communication serial number (step S113), and the added value (A register ← communication serial number + 017H) is checked. It is determined whether the sum value (value of reception checksum RXSUM) matches (step S115, step S116). The reason why "communication serial number +017H" and the reception checksum RXSUM value are compared in this way is as described below.

The process may be such that only the reception of the gaming machine information response message (reply from the frame control unit 22) is confirmed, and the contents are not confirmed at all, but in this case, the content of the gaming machine information response message It is not possible to confirm whether the message is actually correct or not, resulting in a lack of accuracy from the perspective of sending and receiving messages. Here, as already explained, the checksum value when the gaming information notification response message is normally received is "0x05 (message length) + 0x12 (command code) + 0x00 (gaming machine installation information reception result) + communication Serial number (any value from 0 to 255) = communication serial number (0 to 255) + 0x17 (fixed value: 017H)", that is, the checksum value excluding the communication serial number is "017H (hereinafter referred to as "communication serial number excluded normal check"). It should be a fixed value of "sum value"). Therefore, in this embodiment, in the processing of steps S113 to S116, the communication serial number is first acquired (step S113), and the above-mentioned fixed value "017H" during normal operation is added (step S114). Then, this added value is compared with the value stored in the reception checksum RXSUM (step S115) to determine whether the gaming information notification response message has been correctly received (whether the message has been correctly sent and received). By this simple method, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the message has been correctly received (step S116).

If the added value (communication serial number + communication serial number excluded normal checksum value (017H)) acquired in step S114 matches the reception checksum RXSUM value (step S116: YES), normal operation is performed (step S116: YES). Assuming that the message has been correctly transmitted and received, the process proceeds to message transmission processing (step S123), which will be described later. However, if the added value and the checksum value do not match (step S116: NO), it is determined that the operation is not normal and the reception miss counter is incremented by 1 (step S117). This reception error counter functions as a counter that counts the number of times (number of reception errors) when the main control unit 20 cannot correctly receive the gaming machine information response message.

Next, it is determined whether the reception miss counter value is less than a predetermined value (here, 10 times) (step S118). In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, when the cumulative number of reception errors reaches 10, it is assumed that an abnormality (telegram communication error) has occurred in the transmission and reception of the game information notification and the game information response (step S118: n≧10 ), performs predetermined error handling. Specifically, the game permission flag is cleared (step S119), and a firing stop signal NS is output to the frame control unit 22 to disable the firing device 32 from firing game balls (step S120). Then, an error command is set (step S121), and the error command is transmitted to the production control section 24 (step S122). The error command transmitted here includes information indicating that a reception error has occurred, for example, error information indicating a communication line disconnection (communication disconnection error command), and upon receiving the error command, the production control unit 24 Provides error notification of line disconnection. In this case, recovery can be achieved by turning the power of the gaming machine OFF/ON and executing the power-on processing (FIGS. 36A and 36B) again. However, like the above-mentioned fraudulent winning error (error related to buffer overflow state: see steps S232, S239 to S242 in FIG. 42), the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 36A The configuration may be such that the error can be resolved when step S031) is executed.

(Modified example β: Modified example related to error processing when a reception error occurs)
In addition, as a modification, when executing error processing related to a reception error (when the determination result in step S118 is YES), the following configuration may be adopted. For example, when the reception error counter value reaches a predetermined value, at least an error flag related to the occurrence of a reception error (hereinafter referred to as a "communication disconnection error flag") is set (ON state). In this case, in a predetermined process (for example, error management process) during the 4ms interrupt process shown in FIG. If it is determined that the error flag is set, the configuration may be such that steps S119 to S122 are performed. Also, during the 108ms interrupt processing, at least the communication interruption error flag is set and the game permission flag is cleared (step S119), and the function of the 108ms interrupt processing is substantially disabled. The transmission process of commands (steps S120 to S122) may be entrusted to the 4ms interrupt process shown in FIG. 39. Note that this modification is similarly applicable to the third embodiment described later (see steps S739 to S741 in FIG. 50 and S119 to S122 in the same figure).

If the cumulative number of reception errors has not reached 10 (step S118: n<10), it is assumed that the transmission and reception of the previous game information notification and game information response was normal, and the current game machine information notification message is created and received. The message transmission process (step S123) related to the output process is executed, the 108 ms interrupt process is ended, and the main control side main process is executed until the next 108 ms interrupt occurs.

(Modified example γ; modified example of reception miscount)
In this embodiment, the cumulative number of reception misses (threshold value) that result in an error is set to 10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an appropriate cumulative number can be determined. Alternatively, instead of setting the number of reception errors to be considered as an error as a predetermined cumulative number, it may be determined that an error occurs when the number of consecutive reception errors reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). If the number of consecutive reception errors is used as a determining factor for error determination, if a reception error happens to occur due to some kind of malfunction, and the reception is successfully performed afterwards, it will not be counted as a reception error, so excessive error processing will be required. can be avoided from being executed. In the case of this modification, if reception is successfully performed before the reception error counter reaches a predetermined number of times, a reception error counter process for clearing the reception error counter (for example, the process of step S123A indicated by the broken line shown in FIG. 43 is added) (Refer to modification γ in the remarks column in the figure) may be provided. Note that, regarding this modification, the same processing contents can be applied to the third embodiment described later (for example, after the processing of step SS741 in FIG. 50 described later, the processing of step S123A indicated by the broken line in FIG. ).

(Message transmission process: Figure 44A to Figure 44B)
The message transmission process (step S123) will be described with reference to FIGS. 44A and 44B. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing details of the message sending process, with FIG. 44A being a flowchart showing the first half of the message sending process, and FIG. 44B being a flowchart showing the second half of the message sending process. This message transmission process is mainly composed of processing for transmitting a gaming machine information notification message to the frame control unit 22.

44A and 44B, the CPU 201 first clears the reception checksum register (for example, the C register) (step S131), and clears the reception checksum RXSUM (step S132). The value of the reception checksum register is mainly used when transmitting the checksum related to the gaming machine information notification message to the frame control unit 22 in steps S156 to S157, which will be described later.

Note that the purpose of clearing the reception checksum RXSUM is to prevent the possibility that if the transmission of the gaming machine information response message from the frame control unit 22 is interrupted, the reception checksum RXSUM will remain unchanged and be judged as normal. This is because there is. However, in this embodiment, the value of the reception checksum RXSUM is updated to a different value each time a gaming machine information notification message is transmitted (because the communication serial number takes a value from 0 to 255 (the previous checksum value is +1 )), it is not necessary to clear the reception checksum RXSUM.

Next, the reception check start flag is set to ON state (5AH) (step S133).

(Transmission of message length: steps S134 to S139)
Next, processing for outputting information on the message length (1 byte) related to the gaming machine information notification message is executed (steps S134 to S139). Here, first, the "information stock number" stored in a predetermined area (information stock number storage area) of the RAM 203 is acquired into a predetermined register (here, the W register) (step S134). This number of information stocks specifies the number of gaming information to be transmitted this time.

Next, it is determined whether the acquired number of information stocks is greater than the maximum number of transmissions (step S135). In this embodiment, the number of gaming information that can be transmitted at one time is "maximum 5", so in the determination process of step S135, it is determined whether the acquired information stock number is less than 6 (5 or less). is being determined.

If the number of information stocks is greater than the maximum number of transmissions (5) (step S135: number of information stocks≧6), the number of acquired information stocks is is corrected to five (step S136). Specifically, "05H" is set (updated to 5) in the register (W register in this example) that holds the number of information stocks. On the other hand, if the number of information stocks is less than 6, that is, the maximum number of transmissions (5) or less (step S135: number of information stocks < 6), the correction process of step S136 is skipped (step S136), and step S137 Proceed to processing.

In the process of step S137, the number of information stocks is doubled (step S137). Specifically, the value of the W register is transferred to the A register, and the value of the A register is doubled. The reason for "doubling the number of information stocks" is that 2 bytes are required for one piece of game information (type information/count information) (see Figure 52), and if there are n pieces of game information, "number of information stocks This is because the message length increases by 2 bytes.

Next, "09H" is added as a predetermined value to the information stock number (A register) doubled in step S137 (step S138). The reason for adding this "09H" is that the length of the gaming machine information notification message needs to be at least 9 bytes, regardless of the number of gaming information. To be more specific, the data length of each data related to the gaming machine information notification message, excluding gaming information (type information/count information), is ``message length (1 byte) + command code (1 byte) + communication serial number. (1 byte) + gaming status information (2 bytes) + error status information (1 byte) + fraud detection status information (1 byte) + number of gaming information (1 byte) + checksum (1 byte) = 9 bytes” . Therefore, the actual data length of the gaming machine information notification message is the sum of these 9 bytes and the data length of the gaming information (number of information stocks x 2 bytes), and this total value is the value of the current gaming machine information notification message. This is because it is necessary to transmit the message length information to the frame control unit 22.

Next, serial output processing (step S139) is executed. As a result, the message length information of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Serial output processing: Figure 45)
FIG. 45 shows details of the above "serial output processing". As shown in FIG. 45, the serial output process includes an output process (step S161) that outputs the information (here, the value of the A register) acquired from the transmission serial port buffer for serial transmission, and checksum addition processing (step S162) of adding the value) to the reception checksum register (C register).

The above serial output process is a common process in step S139, S141, S144, S146, S148, S150, S152, S154, S155 (S183, S185 in FIG. 46B), and S157, which will be described later.

In addition, in the serial output processing described above, each time the checksum addition processing is executed, the transmission data information (value of the A register) is added to the reception checksum register, and the ring buffer transmission processing in step S155, which will be described later, is performed. When the serial output process (steps S183 and S185 in FIG. 46B described later) is executed, the value of the reception checksum register is changed to the checksum (from message length to gaming information) related to the current gaming machine information notification message. (value added). The calculated checksum value is transmitted to the frame control unit 22 as "checksum information" by serial output processing (checksum transmission processing) in step S157 of FIG. 44B, which will be described later.

(Command code transmission: Steps S140 to S141)
Next, processing for outputting information on the command code (1 byte) is executed (steps S140 to S141). Here, first, a fixed value (0x02 (02H)) of the command code (command information) related to the gaming machine information notification message is set in the A register (step S140), and then the serial output process shown in FIG. 45 (step S141 ). As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the command information of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Communication serial number transmission: Steps S142 to S144)
Next, processing for outputting communication serial number (1 byte) information is executed (steps S142 to S144). Here, first, the communication serial number is incremented (value of the communication serial number RAM area + 1) (step S142), and the communication serial number is set in the A register (step S143). Then, the serial output process (step S144) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the communication serial number (sequence number) of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Main control state 1 transmission: Steps S145 to S146)
Next, processing for outputting information of main control state 1 (1 byte) is executed (steps S145 to S146). Here, first, main control state 1 is set in the A register (step S145). Then, the serial output process (step S146) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the main control state 1 of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Main control state 2 transmission: steps S147 to S148)
Next, processing for outputting information on main control state 2 (1 byte) is executed (steps S147 to S148). Here, first, main control state 2 is set in the A register (step S147). Then, the serial output process (step S148) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the main control state 2 of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Game machine error status transmission: Steps S149 to S150)
Next, processing for outputting information on the gaming machine error state (1 byte) is executed (steps S149 to S150). Here, first, the gaming machine error state is set in the A register (step S149). Then, serial output processing (step S150) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the gaming machine error status of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Transmission of fraud detection status: steps S151 to S152)
Next, processing for outputting information on the fraud detection state (1 byte) is executed (steps S151 to S152). Here, first, a fraud detection state is set in the A register (step S151). Then, the serial output process (step S152) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the fraud detection state of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Transmission of information stock number (game information number): Steps S153 to S154)
Next, processing for outputting information on the number of game information (1 byte) is executed (steps S153 to S154). Here, first, the number of information stocks is set in the A register (step S153). Then, the serial output process (step S154) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the reception checksum register is updated, and the number of gaming information in the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22. Note that the information stock number is obtained from the value of the W register (see steps S134 to S137 in FIG. 44A).

Next, ring buffer transmission processing is executed (step S155). In the ring buffer transmission process, a process for transmitting game information (type information and count information) stored in the ring buffer to the frame control unit 22 is performed. Details of the ring buffer transmission process will be described later using FIGS. 46A and 46B.

(Checksum transmission: steps S156 to S157)
Next, processing for outputting checksum (1 byte) information is executed (steps S156 to S157). Here, first, the value of the checksum register (C register) is set in the A register (step S156). Then, the serial output process (step S157) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the checksum of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22. Note that the value of the checksum register obtained when the serial output process in step S157 is executed is cleared at the start of the next 108 ms interrupt process (step S131 in FIG. 44A). .

(Ring buffer transmission processing: FIGS. 45A and 45B).
The ring buffer transmission process (step S155) in FIG. 44B will be described with reference to FIGS. 45A and 45B. 45A and 45B are flowcharts showing details of the ring buffer transmission process, with FIG. 45A being a flowchart showing the first half of the ring buffer transmission process, and FIG. 45B being a flowchart showing the second half of the ring buffer transmission process.

Referring to FIGS. 45A and 45B, CPU 201 first sets "5 times" as the number of loops (step S171). The number of loops "5 times" is a value that specifies the maximum number of transmissions, which is 5.

Next, the value of the load pointer is acquired (step S172). Specifically, the address of the ring buffer indicated by the load pointer is obtained.

Next, the value of the ring buffer indicated by the address obtained in step S172 is obtained (step 173). The content acquired here is the above-mentioned "event number."

Next, it is determined whether the obtained value of the ring buffer is not zero (step S174). If the value of the ring buffer is zero (step S174: NO), there is no data, so the ring buffer transmission process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the obtained ring buffer value is not zero (step S174: YES), the corresponding area of the read ring buffer is cleared (step S175), the load point (read destination address) is incremented, and the ring buffer is The read destination address is updated and the next read destination address is specified (step S176).

Next, it is determined whether the updated load pointer exceeds the final address of the ring buffer (step S177). If the final address has been exceeded (step S177: YES), the start address of the ring buffer is acquired (step S178), and this is stored in the load pointer (step S179). However, if it does not exceed the final address (step S177: NO), it is assumed that the data storage space has not reached the end of the ring buffer, and the updated address is directly stored in the load pointer (step S179).

Next, the "gaming information table (type information + count information table)" shown in FIG. 57 is acquired (step S180), and the value of the ring buffer acquired in step S173, that is, the "event number", is obtained by referring to the gaming information table. The command data of "type information" and "count information" corresponding to is acquired (step S181).

<Game information table (type information + count information table): Figure 57>
FIG. 57 shows an example of the game information table. Note that the gaming information table shown in FIG. 57 actually defines a command data group related to gaming information (FIGS. 53A to 53F) to be transmitted to the frame control unit 22, but here, the command data group related to the present invention is explained. In-depth game information is representatively shown.

Referring to FIG. 57, game information corresponding to event numbers is defined in the game information table. Specifically, as shown in the figure, game information (2 bytes) data consisting of type information in the upper 1 byte and count information in the lower 1 byte is defined corresponding to event numbers 1 to 18. For example, the command data corresponding to event number 1 is "1131H", and this command data "1131H" specifies "1 prize in the upper starting hole 34 of 3 prize balls". For example, in the case of "two winning balls entered into the upper starting hole 34 of three winning balls" in FIG. 53B (Example 1), event number 1 is stored in the ring buffer in the order of event occurrence, either continuously or intermittently. By transmitting this command data "1131H" one by one, the slot control unit 22 side can grasp that three prize balls have entered the upper start opening 34 twice. can. Details regarding other event numbers are omitted to avoid duplicate descriptions. Note that the contents of the event number are as shown in the remarks column shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, when an event occurs, first, an "event number (1 byte)" that can identify gaming information is acquired, and this is stored in a ring buffer (each 1 byte area). Then, at the timing when it is necessary to transmit the game information (2 bytes), the game information (type information, count information) corresponding to the event number is acquired from the ring buffer and transmitted to the frame control unit 22 side. In the case of a processing configuration that uses various event numbers, there are the following advantages.

When an event occurs, if you create and acquire 2-byte gaming information (type information, count information) and store it in the ring buffer, you can acquire the type information and count information respectively and store them in the ring buffer. Requires processing to store. However, in this case, the process of acquiring and transmitting the type information and count information becomes complicated, and each storage area provided in the ring buffer requires 2 bytes, which increases the program capacity and puts pressure on the RAM area. This increases the control burden. However, by using event numbers as in this embodiment, it is possible to obtain and send game information using a simple method, and it is also possible to reduce the buffer capacity, which prevents the RAM area from being overwhelmed. It can be prevented. Furthermore, when designing a new model, it is possible to do simple work such as rewriting the game information table, and it is possible to provide versatility between the old model and the new model.

(Type information transmission: Steps S182 to S183)
Next, processing for outputting command data of type information (1 byte) is executed (steps S156 to S157). Here, first, the type information (command data of the upper 1 byte) obtained from the game information table is set in the A register (step S182). Then, the serial output process (step S183) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the type information of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

(Count information transmission: Steps S184 to S185)
Next, processing for outputting command data of count information (1 byte) is executed (steps S184 to S185). Here, first, count information (command data of the lower 1 byte) obtained from the game information table is set in the A register (step S184). Then, the serial output process (step S185) shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the count information of the current gaming machine information notification message is transmitted to the frame control unit 22.

When the above-mentioned type information and count information transmission process is completed, the information stock number is then decremented (step S186), and the number of loops is decremented (step S187).

Next, it is determined whether the number of loops (number of transmissions) is zero (step S188), and the processes of steps S172 to S188 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero (step S188: NO processing route). If the loop count becomes zero (step S208: YES), the ring buffer transmission process is exited. In this embodiment, the maximum number of transmissions (5 times) is set as the number of loops regardless of the processing in step S171 and the number of information stocks, and even if the number of loops does not become zero, the buffer obtained in step S172 is If the value of is zero, that is, nothing is stored, the result of the determination process in step S174 is "NO", and the ring buffer transmission process is exited. In this way, instead of checking the number of information stocks and setting the number of loops according to the number of information stocks, it is sufficient to set the maximum number of transmissions (5 times) as the number of loops, so the design In addition, the control burden on the main control section 20 can be reduced.

(Modified example δ)
In addition, in case a checksum abnormality (reception error) occurs, the contents of the gaming machine information notification message to be sent this time are stored in a predetermined area (telegram information save area) of the RAM 203 as data for retransmission. If there is a reception error, data for retransmission may be read from the message information save area and transmitted to the frame control unit 22 side. In this case, since the same communication serial number is transmitted again, the frame control unit 22 side can understand that the message is a gaming machine information message related to retransmission. The frame control unit 22 side may be configured to perform processing based on retransmission when receiving a gaming machine information message related to retransmission (configured so as not to perform processing assuming new information has been received). .

Furthermore, as data for retransmission, at least "gaming information (type information + count information)" may be stored in the message information save area. This is because game information is important information that affects the number of balls held and performance information. For example, if the contents of the ring buffer acquired in step S173 are not zero (if transmission message information is stored), the content to be transmitted this time is set to gaming information in a step before the process of clearing the corresponding area of the ring buffer in step S175. Store it in the evacuation area. If there is a reception error, the data for retransmission is read from the game information save area, and a gaming machine information notification message containing the gaming information (type information + count information) corresponding to the data for retransmission is sent. Send. In this way, there is no need to store all data related to the gaming machine information telegram as data for retransmission, leading to a reduction in control burden. However, in this case, in order to avoid the frame control unit 22 side from processing it as if it had received a new gaming machine information notification message, information that can identify the retransmission is transmitted, and the frame control unit 22 side Make it possible to understand that the data is being sent. Examples of information that can identify retransmission include a fixed command code as a specific value for retransmission, but any information that allows the frame control unit 22 to understand that it is retransmission may be used. Bye. It goes without saying that this modification (modification δ) can also be applied to the third embodiment described later.

[Third embodiment]
<Processing on the main control unit side: Figures 47 to 50>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, gaming operation processing on the main control unit 20 side according to the third embodiment will be described. Like the second embodiment, this third embodiment also mainly consists of an infinite loop main process (main control side main process) and two timer interrupt processes activated by regular interrupts from the CTC. However, the major difference between the third embodiment and the second embodiment is that the timer interrupt processing is "4ms interrupt processing (same as the second embodiment) shown in FIG. The difference is that the ``108ms interrupt process (FIG. 43)'' has half the interrupt time as the ``54ms interrupt process (FIG. 48)''.

To be more specific, in the case of the third embodiment, the process corresponding to the "108 ms interrupt process (FIG. 43)" of the second embodiment is divided into a plurality of processes and executed. Specifically, one interrupt process is assigned to "telegram transmission process", two interrupt processes are assigned to "telegram reception process", and the message transmission and reception processes are performed alternately, and every 108ms, It is configured to transmit a gaming machine information notification message to the frame control unit 22 and receive a gaming machine information response message. In this respect, it is the same as the second embodiment described above, in which message transmission and reception processing is performed every 108 ms.

Note that in this second embodiment, the 4ms interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the 54ms interrupt processing. This point is synonymous with the relationship between the 4ms interrupt processing and the 108ms interrupt processing described in the second embodiment. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which multiple interrupts in which a 4 ms interrupt process with a high priority level is executed while a 54 ms interrupt process with a low priority level is being executed are permitted. Further, when executing the 54 ms interrupt processing, the interrupt disable state may be set, and after the processing is completed, the interrupt enable state may be set. In this case, if an interrupt request for 4ms interrupt processing is received during 54ms interrupt processing, the configuration may be such that the 4ms interrupt processing can be executed immediately after the 54ms interrupt processing is completed.

The third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. However, descriptions of processing contents that are substantially the same as those in the second embodiment will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

<12B. Main control side main processing: Figure 47>
The main control side main processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing details of the latter half of the main processing on the main control side. Note that the first half of the main control side main processing is the same as the first half of the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 36A of the second embodiment, so illustration thereof is omitted. Further, in FIG. 47, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in the main control side main process shown in FIG. 36B of the second embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 47, the difference from the second embodiment (FIG. 36B) is that in step S060A, the communication serial number RAM, reception error counter, transmission/reception selection counter described later, etc. are cleared as transmission/reception related RAM areas. (The ring buffer for transmission, the final address RAM area indicating the final address of the ring buffer, the load pointer, the save pointer, etc. are not cleared), and in the process of step S061A, it is periodically cleared every 4 ms and every 54 ms. The two points are that the CTC setting process is executed to generate a timer interrupt, and that steps S042 to S043 are not performed during the infinite loop process of the game process related to the normal game progress. Other processing shown in FIG. 47 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 36B described in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted to avoid duplicate description. Note that the processing related to the processing of steps S042 to S043 (processing of acquiring checksum data of the gaming machine information response message) is performed in the message reception process (step S702) during the 54ms interrupt process shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later. .

<54ms interrupt processing: Figure 48>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the 54ms interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of 54ms interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, an interrupt process is executed every 54 ms, and a message sending process for transmitting a gaming machine information notification message and a message receiving process for receiving a gaming machine information response message are alternately repeated. That is, a gaming machine information notification message is transmitted and a gaming machine information response message is received every 108 ms. This point differs from the second embodiment described above, in which the process of transmitting the gaming machine information notification message and the process of receiving the gaming machine information response message are carried out at once every 108 ms.

In FIG. 48, the CPU 201 first increments a transmission/reception selection counter (step S701). This transmission/reception selection counter is a counter for specifying whether to execute a message transmission process or a message transmission process every 54 ms interrupt process. In the case of this embodiment, if the least significant bit (LSB) of the transmission/reception selection counter is "1" (step S702: YES), the message transmission process (step S703) is executed, and if it is "0" (step S702), the message transmission process (step S703) is executed. :NO), the message reception process (step S704) is executed. Therefore, the message transmission process (step S703) is executed for the first time.

(Message transmission process (step S703): Figures 49A to 49B)
The message transmission process (step S703) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49A and 49B. 49A and 49B are flowcharts showing details of the message sending process, with FIG. 49A being a flowchart showing the first half of the message sending process, and FIG. 49B being a flowchart showing the second half of the message sending process.

As shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the message transmission process according to this embodiment is different from the process of steps S132 to S133 in the message transmission process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B of the second embodiment. , have substantially the same processing content. Therefore, the same processing contents as those explained in FIG. 44A and FIG. 44B will be omitted here as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

In the case of this embodiment, as mentioned earlier, the 108ms interrupt processing shown in FIG. Specifically, the process corresponding to the above-mentioned check process (see steps S113 to S122 in FIG. 43) during the 108 ms interrupt process shown in FIG. ), and the process corresponding to the message sending process in step S123 during the 108 ms interrupt process is executed in the message sending process in step S703. Due to the nature of such processing, there is no need to provide the reception check start flag in the second embodiment (there is no need to provide step S133), and there is no need for the reception checksum RXSUM related to checksum determination ( There is no need to provide the process of step S132), and the processes of steps S132 to S133 shown in FIG. 44A are not provided.

(Message reception process (step S703): Figure 50)
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the message reception process (step S704) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing details of the message reception process.

In FIG. 50, the CPU 201 first determines whether the game permission flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S731). If the game permission flag is not in the ON state (step S731:≠5AH), the timer interrupt process is ended without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the game permission flag is in the ON state (step S111:=5AH), then it is determined whether there is received data of "gaming machine information response message" as received data (step S0732). The presence or absence of received data of the gaming machine information response message is determined by checking the value of the reception buffer status, as described above. If the value of the receive buffer status is zero (00H), it indicates that there is no received data, and if it is 01H to 16H, it indicates that there is 1 byte of received data to 16 bytes of received data.

Here, the gaming machine information notification message is sent during the previous 54ms interrupt process (step S703), and for 54ms until the current 54ms interrupt process is executed, the gaming machine information notification message is sent. There is a sufficient time interval until the game machine information response message is received. Therefore, the gaming machine information response message to the gaming machine information notification message should have already been received. Therefore, if there is no received data (step S732), the process proceeds to step S741 (determination of the number of reception errors), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if there is received data (step S732), the value of the receive buffer status (number of received data) is set as the loop count (step S733).

Next, the communication serial number is acquired in a register (for example, W register) (step S735), and "017H", which is the checksum value of the gaming machine information response message excluding the communication serial number, is added to the acquired communication serial number (step S735). ). The processing in steps S735 to S736 is similar to the processing in steps S114 to S115 shown in FIG. 43 of the second embodiment.

Next, the received data in the receive serial port buffer continues to be loaded into a register (eg, A register) until the number of loops becomes zero (step S736). Here, by using the fact that "the last data (5th byte) of the gaming machine information response message is a checksum" (see Figure 54), we will use the "message length (1 byte)" , command code (1 byte), communication serial number (1 byte), game information reception result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte)'' are successively loaded into the A register. As a result, the data finally held in the A register becomes the checksum data of the gaming machine information response message received this time. Therefore, if some kind of problem occurs, for example, if the received data is less than 5 bytes (the number of loops is less than 5) or if a problem occurs during data transmission and reception, the checksum value related to the gaming machine information response message will be changed. If the information is not acquired correctly, the determination result in step S739, which will be described next, becomes "NO" and is treated as a reception error.

Next, the "addition value (communication serial number + communication serial number excluded normal checksum value (017H): here, the value of the W register)" obtained in step S735 and " checksum value (here, the value of the A register)", and if these values match (step S739: YES), the operation is normal (the game information notification response message was correctly received). (the message is being sent and received correctly), exits the message reception process and ends the 54ms interrupt process.

However, if the added value and the checksum value do not match (step S739: NO), it is determined that the operation is not normal and the reception miss counter is incremented by 1 (step S740).

Next, it is determined whether the reception miss counter value is less than a predetermined value (here, 10 times) (step S741). In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when the cumulative number of reception errors reaches 10, it is assumed that an abnormality (telegram communication error) has occurred in the transmission and reception of the game information notification and the game information response (step S741). :n≧10), predetermined error processing in steps S119 to S122 is executed. This error processing has the same processing contents as in FIG. 43.

On the other hand, if the cumulative number of reception errors has not reached 10 (step S741: n<10), the message reception process is exited and the 54ms interrupt process is ended.

(Modified example ε)
Note that the second embodiment executes 108ms interrupt processing by periodic interrupts, and the third embodiment similarly executes 54ms interrupt processing, and in both cases, messages are sent and received in a 108ms cycle. However, it can also be configured as follows. For example, the number of times the 4ms interrupt process is started (the number of occurrences) is counted, and when a predetermined number of times (for example, the 26th time) is reached, the message transmission process or reception process is executed. The configuration may be such that the message transmission and reception processing can be executed based on the number of activations (the number of executions). When executing a message transmission process or a reception process, it is preferable to execute the 4ms interrupt process with priority and execute it immediately after that, rather than executing the process by interrupting the 4ms interrupt process.

<Free game>
Here, the unique game characteristics of the managed gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained.

The management game machine is a game machine that circulates the game balls sealed inside and manages the number of balls used in the game using an electromagnetic method. A game in which the number of balls held is not subtracted (a free game) can be configured to be executable.

During this free game, you are placed in a game situation where the number of balls you have does not decrease, in other words, there is at least one prize ball for every one shot, and the base during the free game is "1 or more". becomes. Therefore, during the free game, the profit state is at least more advantageous than the normal state.

(77. Free game start conditions (start trigger) and end conditions (end trigger))
Examples of the start conditions and end conditions of the free game are shown below. Note that any combination of the start conditions and end conditions described below is possible.

(77-1. About starting conditions)
First, the starting condition (starting opportunity) of the free game will be explained. Regarding the starting conditions, the following conditions (A) to (N) can be determined.
(Α) First game start or end after power-up. A benefit can be given to the first player to play on the gaming machine.
(B) Initial game start or end upon configuration change. It is possible to make the player aware that there has been a setting change (including changing the same setting value).
(Γ) Winning a specific prize in the jackpot lottery. In this case, the starting condition may be the start or end of the winning game. Further, one or more types of "specific hits" can be provided (the same applies to (Δ) described later). Further, the "specific hit" may be a specific small hit or a specific jackpot (the same applies to (Δ) described below). Moreover, it is not limited to a specific hit, and may be a total jackpot or a total small win (the same applies to (Δ) described below).
(Δ) Start or end of a winning game related to a specific winning: One or more types of winning games related to a specific winning can be provided (the same applies hereinafter).
(E) Start or end of a round game related to a specific round: One or more types of specific rounds can be provided. In addition, it may be possible only during a jackpot game related to all jackpots or a specific jackpot. Moreover, one or more types of "specific jackpots" can be provided.
(Ζ) Start or end of a specific internal gaming state: One or more types of specific internal gaming states can be provided (the same applies to (Θ) described below).
(Η) Start or end of a specific game mode (specific Tcode): One or more types of specific game mode (specific Tcode) can be provided (the same applies to (Θ) described below).
(Θ) When the number of special symbol variations is executed a predetermined number of times during a specific internal gaming state and/or a specific gaming mode (specific Tcode). The number of variations of the special figure may be the total number of variations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be the number of variations of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.
(Ι) A case where the number of fluctuations of the normal pattern is executed a predetermined number of times during a specific internal gaming state and/or a specific gaming mode (specific Tcode).
(K) When the number of activations of special electric accessories reaches a predetermined number of times during a specific internal game state.
(Λ) Ceiling activation trigger: 1st embodiment (including all of the modifications such as modification 1 and modification 2 (FIGS. 33 and 34, granting formats (α) to (ξ)) of the benefit granting format) The trigger for granting the "ceiling privilege" described in 2 may be used as a condition for starting a free game. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which "ceiling privilege" is replaced with "free game".
(N) When a specific time has arrived. Using RTC, it is possible to monitor the arrival of a specific time and to start a free game when the specific time arrives.

(77-2. Termination conditions)
Next, the termination condition (termination trigger) of the free game will be explained. Regarding the termination conditions, the following conditions (α) to (γ) can be determined.
(α) When the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number. For example, when the number of out balls reaches 100, the free game is ended.
(β) When the number of safe balls reaches a predetermined number. For example, when the number of safe pitches reaches 150, the free game is ended.
(γ) When the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number. For example, when the number of fired balls reaches 110, the free game is ended.
(δ) The above-mentioned starting conditions (Γ) to (N) can be replaced with ending conditions. For example, in the case of (Γ), the ending condition can be "when a specific winning is won in a jackpot lottery". Of course, in this case, other starting conditions are set so that there is no contradiction in the progress of the free game, such as adopting a starting condition different from "the case where a specific winning is won in a jackpot lottery".

(77-3. Free game control example)
Next, an example of free game control will be explained. When running a free game, check whether the start and end conditions are met.
(I) A case where monitoring is possible on the main control unit 20 side,
(II) There are cases where the main control section 20 and the frame control section 22 cooperate to enable monitoring.
A typical example of the former case (I) is a case where the number of game balls is not related to both the start condition and the end condition; for example, the start condition is the start of a jackpot game, the end condition is the end of the jackpot game, etc., and the main control This is a case where the start condition and end condition can be grasped by the unit 20 alone. On the other hand, the latter case (II) is, for example, a case where the end conditions are related to the number of game balls, as in (α) to (γ) above. This is because the frame control section 22 has a functional section that counts the number of fired pitches (actual shot number), the number of out pitches, and the number of foul pitches.

In both cases (I) and (II) above, the main control unit 20 side sends a "gaming machine information notification message" to the start timing and end timing of the free game (indicating that the start conditions are met and that the end conditions are met). ) can be notified to the frame control unit 22. To be more specific, when transmitting the fact that a free game is in progress to the frame control unit 22 using a "gaming machine information notification message", for example, information on the start and end of the free game is transmitted to the performance information state related to the game information. It can be sent by notification (see FIG. 53F (e) and (Example 13)). For example, using Bit 3 (unused bit) of the count information of the performance information status notification, if "Bit 3 = 1", it specifies that a free game is being played, and if "Bit 3 = 0", it specifies that a non-free game is being played. can do. Note that by monitoring changes in the value of Bit 3 on the frame control unit 22 side, it is possible to grasp the start and end of the free game. For example, if the value of Bit 3 changes from 0 to 1, it can be understood that the free game has started, and if the value of Bit 3 changes from 1 to 0, it can be understood that the free game has ended. . As a result, the frame control unit 22 side is notified of the timing of interrupting (cancelling) and resuming the process of subtracting the number of balls held, and when the frame control unit 22 side receives the gaming machine information notification message, the frame control unit 22 side Understand the start and end timings of the game, interrupt the subtraction process for the number of balls held (control to stop subtraction process) and restart it (cancel the stop state of subtraction process (control to allow subtraction process)), and play the free game. It can be realized.

(Specific example of free game control)
Next, a specific example of free game control will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, the free game start condition is an event controlled by the main control unit 20, and the free game end condition is an event related to the number of fired balls monitored by the frame control unit 22 (not only the number of fired balls). , which may include information such as the number of foul pitches and the number of out pitches) will be explained as an example.

In the following, the starting condition for the free game is that the "jackpot game" controlled by the main control unit 20 has started (triggered by the start of the start INT (the trigger may be the start of the 1st round)), and the free game is started. We will explain the end condition of the game using as a typical example the case where the total number of fired balls (hereinafter referred to as the "cumulative number of fired balls") has reached the specified end number (for example, the game ends when the number of fired balls is 100). do.

<Control example 1: Figure 58 (a) “Main control side termination monitoring configuration”>
In control example 1 shown in FIG. 58(a), the main control unit 20 manages the start and end conditions of the free game, and the frame control unit 22, and the frame control unit 22 controls the number of balls held during the free game based on the notified information (main control side end monitoring configuration). Control example 1 shown in FIG. 58(a) will be described below.

Referring to FIG. 58(a), the main control unit 20 according to the present example includes free game start monitoring means, free game starting means, free game continuation management means, free game ending means, etc. as control means related to free games. It consists of a central structure.

(Free game start monitoring process)
The free game start monitoring means monitors (determines) whether or not free game start conditions are satisfied. In this example, since the free game start condition is the start of a jackpot game, the free game start monitoring means monitors whether the jackpot game has started (monitors whether the fluctuating display related to the jackpot has ended or not). ).

The free game start monitoring means sets the free game in progress flag to an ON state when the free game start condition is satisfied. The free game flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the free game is in progress. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the free game is in progress, and the flag is in the OFF state (00H). ), it indicates that the game is not in a free game (in a non-free game). In this example, since the free game is started upon the start of the jackpot, the free game flag is set to the ON state in the jackpot start process shown in FIG. 17. In addition, when the variable display related to the jackpot is finished, the free game flag may be set to the ON state. In this case, the free game flag is set to ON in the various setting processes when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step 475) shown in FIG. 16A. The medium flag can be set to the ON state.

(Free game start processing)
The free game starting means performs setting processing necessary for starting a free game (setting processing at the time of starting). In this example, when the free game flag is ON, as a setting process at the start, a predetermined area of the RAM used during the free game (a management area that manages information on the number of balls remaining to be fired, etc.) is cleared, It executes processing such as transmitting a free game start command to the production control section 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the free game start command, it recognizes that the free game has started, and sends a "free game start effect" to notify that the free game has started, and to notify that the free game is in progress. Performs performance processing related to free games such as "free game notification performance" (free game performance control means).

(Free game start notification)
The fact that the free game has started is notified to the frame control unit 22 by a gaming machine information notification message. The frame control unit 22 is configured to be able to grasp the start timing of the free game upon receiving the notification. In this example, the following two notification methods are available as methods for notifying the "main control unit 20→frame control unit 22" of the start of the free game.

(A1) First, it is configured to be able to notify the frame control unit 22 by using the game information of "occurrence of special symbol hit" shown in (Example 9) of FIG. 53E (c). For example, using the upper 4 bits (unused part) of "count information", if "Bit 4 = 1", you can specify that you are in a free game, and if "Bit 4 = 0", you can specify that you are in a non-free game. can. By monitoring the change in the value of Bit 4 on the frame control unit 22 side, it is possible to grasp the start and end of the free game. For example, if the value of Bit 4 changes from "0 to 1", it can be understood that "free game has started", and if the value of Bit 4 changes from "1 to 0", it can be understood that "free game has ended". . Note that the game information (Bit 4 = 1) specifying the start of the free game in this case is "0xA111" (type information = "10100001B", "count information = "00010001B").

(A2) As already explained, the second method is to use the performance information status notification shown in FIG. 53F (e) (Bit 3 of the count information is used as data related to the free game). Note that the game information specifying the start of the free game in this case is "0xF106" (type information = "11110001B", "count information = "0000110B").

(Free game continuation management processing)
The free game continuation management means monitors (determines) whether or not the free game end condition is satisfied. The free game continuation management means of this example includes a cumulative number of fired balls counting means that counts the cumulative number of fired balls during the free game, and a cumulative number of fired balls that determines whether the cumulative number of fired balls has reached the end prescribed number (100). The free game end determining means monitors whether the cumulative number of balls fired has reached 100 as a free game end condition.

In the case of this example, since it is necessary to count the cumulative number of balls fired during the free game, the frame control section 22 is configured to be able to send a gaming machine information response message containing information on the number of balls fired to the main control section 20. (response message transmitting means), the main control unit 20 counts the cumulative number of fired balls during the free game based on the fired ball number information, and stores the cumulative number of fired balls in a predetermined area of the RAM.

In addition, the main control unit 20 is configured to be able to send a command (remaining number of fired balls command) that can specify the “remaining number of fired balls” up to the specified end number to the production control unit 24 based on the current cumulative number of fired balls. Upon receiving the command, the performance control unit 24 displays a ``remaining number of fired balls notification effect'' that informs the remaining number of fired balls until the end of the free game. In addition, the main control unit 20 is configured to be able to transmit a prize ball number command that can specify winning information (prize ball number information) to each winning hole during the free game to the performance control unit 24, and receives the command. The performance control unit 24 is configured to display a "number of acquired pitches notification performance" that notifies information related to the number of pitches acquired during the free game. Note that the "information related to the number of acquired balls" may be any of the "net increase number", "number of prize balls", or "cumulative information on the number of prize balls (cumulative number of prize balls)". Further, these pieces of information may be displayed simultaneously (displayed overlappingly). In addition, when informing the number of prize balls, information related to the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize opening may be displayed, such as "+10 won!" or "+3 won!" every time there is a prize.

Note that the frame control unit 22 may be configured to transmit the gaming machine information response message containing the above-mentioned "number of balls fired" information, for example, as shown in (Contact 1) or (Contact 2) below.

(Communication 1) Only the ball count information is transmitted using the lower 4 bits of the 1 byte of the "reception result" of the gaming machine information response message. In this case, it is sufficient to simply count the number of balls fired cumulatively and calculate the cumulative number of balls fired during the free game. Note that the leftmost bit (most significant bit) of the upper 4 bits or the leftmost bit of the lower 4 bits may be used as a bit for determining the reception result (reception OK) (the same applies to (2) below).

(Communication 2) Of the 1 byte of "reception result" in the gaming machine information response message, the upper 4 bits are used as "foul ball count information", and the lower 4 bits are used as "launched ball count information (taking into account foul balls)". It may be used for "information that does not exist)". In this case, it is necessary to perform a "correction process" that counts the number of fired balls in consideration of foul balls. Specifically, it is calculated as "number of fired balls to be counted = number of fired balls - number of foul balls", and this is counted cumulatively to calculate the cumulative number of fired balls during the free game. The main control unit 20 is provided with a storage area (RAM area) for managing the number of foul balls and the number of fired balls, and can store information regarding the cumulative number of foul balls and the cumulative number of fired balls in the storage area. ing.

In both cases of (1) and (2) above, when counting the cumulative number of fired balls, the "addition method" of adding up the fired balls, or the number of fired balls starting from the specified end number (100) is used. Any counting method including a "subtraction method" in which numbers are subtracted may be used. In any case, the free game may be ended when the cumulative number of balls fired reaches the specified end number.

Note that the process of counting the cumulative number of fired balls (including the above correction process) may be executed within the 108ms interrupt process or may be executed within the 4ms interrupt process. Furthermore, even if the cumulative number of fired balls is counted within the 108ms interrupt processing, and the determination processing between the cumulative number of fired balls and the specified end number is performed within the 4ms interrupt processing (determination processing of the end of the free game). good. In addition, if the number of fired balls information in the game machine information response message is zero (in the case of (2) above, the number of fired balls and the number of foul balls are zero), it is assumed that no target for counting has occurred, and the cumulative number of fired balls is zero. It is not necessary to perform the counting process and/or the process of determining whether the free game is over.

(Modified example FG1)
In the above (Comments 1 and 2), a configuration was described in which the main control unit 20 is notified of the ball count information using one byte of the "reception result" of the gaming machine information response message. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a 6-byte structure obtained by adding 1 byte of data regarding the number of balls fired to the 5-byte gaming machine information response message shown in FIG. 54 may be sent as the gaming machine information response message.

(Modified example FG2)
Here, ideally, the number of fired balls information is such that the game balls fired from the firing device 32 reach the game area 3a (effectively hit balls) and no foul balls occur (effective number of balls hit = Number of balls actually shot = number of balls fired). However, in reality, it is quite possible that some kind of malfunction will occur during the firing, and it is almost impossible to prevent foul balls from occurring at all.

Therefore, when counting the prescribed end number (cumulative number of fired balls of 100) in consideration of foul balls, the main control unit 20 side (free game continuation management means) counts the cumulative number of fired balls of 100. In some cases, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the conditions for ending the free game are satisfied. However, a problem arises if the 100th shot is a foul ball. To be more specific, if the 100th game ball (launched ball) counted by the subtraction mechanism count sensor 68 is a foul ball, the game ball (foul ball) is counted by the non-entering path count sensor 67 after being fired. A certain amount of time lag (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) may occur before detection.

Therefore, if the 100th shot is a foul ball, the free game will end before the foul ball is counted. In other words, the free game ends even though the player has fired only 99 effective balls, resulting in a disadvantage to the player. In reality, a few foul balls may occur just before the 100th shot, and the free game may end with only 97 to 99 effective shots. In such a case, the pachinko hall will not be disadvantaged, but the player may be disadvantaged, and there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied or distrustful. .

On the other hand, if you continue firing until you have checked whether or not the 100th ball is a foul ball, there is a risk that one to several shots will be fired until the end of the free game. The problem arises that the process is extended indefinitely. In such a case, contrary to the above-mentioned case, the player will not be disadvantaged, but the pachinko hall may be disadvantaged, leading to dissatisfaction and distrust towards the pachinko hall. There is a risk of giving a feeling.

However, from the perspective of reducing the control burden and simplifying the design, even if the 100th shot (98th to 99th shot in some cases) is a foul ball, it is treated as a rare case (the foul ball is It is considered preferable to have a configuration in which the free game ends when the 100th shot is counted as the cumulative number of balls fired). In this case, although the cumulative number of balls fired may end at 98 to 99, the free game period can be prevented from being extended indefinitely. Such a configuration focuses on the fact that foul balls occur in rare cases, and can be said to be preferable in that it is a compromise configuration that takes into account the interests of the player and the pachinko hall.

However, in the case of the above-mentioned compromise structure, the pachinko hall side will not suffer any disadvantage, but the player side cannot eliminate the possibility of disadvantage, even though the possibility is low, and in reality This puts players at risk. Therefore, as a control method (processing content) based on the assumption that a foul ball will occur, it is preferable to adopt the following configuration (δ1) or (δ2).

(Fire operation delay control: δ1)
(δ1) When the cumulative number of fired balls approaches the end specified number (100th ball) at the end of the free game, for example, the cumulative number of fired balls is 97th (a certain number of balls M less than the end specified number: number of balls M = (preferably 95 to 99 shots), the firing performance of the firing device 32 is reduced. "Reducing the firing performance" is, for example, a configuration in which the firing speed can be controlled to be slower than normal. In this case, it can be said that this is a preferable configuration in that it is possible to monitor (determine) the prescribed number of balls to end while checking whether or not they are foul balls. However, in this case, the frame control section 22 side that controls the launcher 32 needs to be equipped with a functional section for performing the control. Specifically, the frame control unit 22
Cumulative number of fired balls counting means for counting the cumulative number of fired balls;
A specific number reaching determination means for determining whether the cumulative number of fired balls has reached a specific number M based on the result of the cumulative number of fired balls counting means;
This configuration includes firing speed reducing means for reducing the firing performance (firing speed) of the firing means based on the determination result by the specific number reaching determination means (when the specific number M has been reached). Note that after the free game ends (after the 101st cumulative number of balls fired), the firing device 32 is returned to its original (normal) firing performance (a firing performance restoring means for returning to normal firing performance).

(Fire operation forced stop control: δ2)
(δ2) When it is confirmed that the cumulative number of fired balls has reached the specified end number (100th ball), the firing operation can be temporarily stopped. For example, a configuration that can control the firing standby state (launch standby (a configuration having state control means). In this case as well, the frame control section 22 side that controls the launcher 32 needs to be equipped with a functional section for performing the control. Specifically, the frame control unit 22
The cumulative number of fired balls counting means;
The above-mentioned specific number reaching determination means,
Firing that controls (forcibly stops) the firing operation of the firing means to a firing stop state for a predetermined period (predetermined time) based on the determination result by the specific number reaching determination means (when the specific number M = the prescribed end number is reached) This configuration includes an operation stop control means. In this case, the firing stop state is canceled after the predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition, in the above (δ1) or (δ2), when the specific number M is reached, the main control unit 20 can be configured to be notified of this through a gaming machine information response message. When the main control unit 20 recognizes that the specific number M has been reached, it transmits a production control command to the production control unit 24, and upon receiving the production control unit 24, the production control unit 24 indicates that the free game is about to end ( It is possible to perform an effect that indicates that the firing device 32 is controlled to perform a firing operation different from normal.

(Free game end processing)
The free game ending means performs setting processing necessary for ending the free game (setting processing at the time of ending). In this example, when the cumulative number of fired balls reaches the end prescribed number (100) (when it is determined that the above free game end determination means has reached the end prescribed number), the free game is set as the end setting process. It sets the medium flag to the OFF state, clears a predetermined area of the RAM used during the free game, and executes processes such as transmitting a free game end command to the performance control section 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the free game end command, it performs effect processing related to the free game, such as a "free game end effect" to notify that the free game has ended (free game effect control means).

(Free game end notification)
The fact that the free game has ended is notified to the frame control unit 22 by a gaming machine information notification message. As already explained, the gaming machine information notification message can be transmitted using the performance information status notification shown in FIG. 53F (E) (Bit 3 of the count information is used as data related to the free game).

In this example, since the end condition of the free game depends on the cumulative number of balls fired, the end timing of the free game does not necessarily come during the jackpot game, but there are cases where the end timing comes after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when using performance information status notification, set Bits 0 to 2 of the lower 4 bits of "count information" to values corresponding to the gaming status at the end of the free game, and set Bit 3 to "0 ( (during non-free games). When the frame control unit 22 receives this gaming machine information notification message, it recognizes the end of the free game, ends the currently running free game (subtraction processing stopped state), and subtracts the number of balls held as usual. Resume processing.

Note that when the frame control unit 22 receives the free game start notification from the main control unit 20, it interrupts the process of subtracting the number of balls it owns (controls the subtraction process to a halt state) and executes the free game. If there is "unupdated addition/subtraction information" regarding the number of balls, for example, the current number of balls displayed on the game ball number display device 77 is 2000 balls, but internally the number of prize balls to be added (addition information) is There are cases where there are 10 balls and it has been decided to increase it to 2010 balls, or cases where there is one firing number (subtraction information) that should be subtracted internally and it has been decided to subtract it to 1999 balls. may store the unupdated addition/subtraction information, play the free game with the number of balls held unupdated, and update the unupdated addition/subtraction information after the free game ends.

Further, with respect to the addition information among the addition/subtraction information of the unupdated portion, it is preferable to perform addition processing for balls held during the free game (at the start of the free game). If the number of balls held by the game ball number display device 77 is displayed as a subtraction at the start of a free game, there is a risk that the player may feel distrustful or dissatisfied, but if the number of balls held is displayed as an addition, the player will feel at ease. This is because it can give a sense of satisfaction and satisfaction.

In addition, when the frame control unit 22 receives the above-mentioned free game start notification from the main control unit 20, if there is unupdated addition/subtraction information at that time, the frame control unit 22 processes the update of the number of balls held based on the unupdated addition/subtraction information. After performing this, the process of subtracting the number of balls held may be interrupted and a free game may be started.

Furthermore, the frame control unit 22 may update the number of balls held during the free game in real time, and update and display the new number of balls held on the game ball number display device 77 one after another. However, instead of updating and displaying the number of balls held, the addition information of the number of balls held is temporarily stored internally as the "cumulative increased number of balls (cumulative addition information)", and after the free game ends, the cumulative increased number of balls is displayed. The numbers may be added and the number of balls displayed on the game ball number display device 77 may be updated and displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the game ball number display device 77 display in a display mode that allows the user to recognize that the cumulative increased number of balls has been added. For example, after displaying the cumulative increased number on the game ball number display device 77, it may be added to the current number of balls to be displayed, or may be added to the current number of balls to be displayed in a count-up manner.

Furthermore, during the free game, the display of balls held in the game ball count display device 77 may be updated, or may not be updated at all. Further, only an increase/decrease display (addition display) of the number of balls held may be performed (for example, 0 → 10 → 9 → 12, etc.), or only an increase display (addition display) may be performed.

(Display mode of game ball count display device 77 during free game)
Regarding the display mode of the game ball count display device 77 during the free game, the following display mode may be used.

During the free game, the display may be changed to a special display mode (display mode exclusively used during the free game) that is not normally displayed. For example, "FFFFFF" is displayed in a display mode that can definitively notify the player that a free game is in progress. Note that when updating and displaying the number of balls held on the game ball count display device 77 during a free game, the display of the current number of balls held and a special display ("FFFFFF") may be displayed alternately. Further, during the free game, the number of balls held may be displayed blinking, or may be displayed in a different color from the normal time (for example, red display during the normal time, rainbow color display during the free game, etc.).

(About performance display during free games)
The performance display 99 may display the following display mode during the free game.

(1) During the free game, the base value calculation process is performed internally, but the display on the performance display 99 does not need to be updated. In this case, after the free game ends, display content that reflects the content of the free game can be displayed.
(2) During the free game, it is not necessary to perform base value calculation processing and update display on the performance display 99. In other words, the base value during the free game may not be reflected in the performance information.
(3) During the free game, at least a display indicating that the free game is in progress may be performed, such as displaying a special display mode (display mode exclusively used during the free game) that is not displayed during normal times.
(4) Base value calculation processing and performance display 99 update display may be performed even during a free game. That is, the base value may be calculated not only during the normal period (the above-mentioned normal time base value) but also during the free game, and the base value during the period during the normal period and the free game may be displayed as performance information.

(About INT time at the start/end of free games)
A predetermined interval time (INT time) may be provided when starting and/or ending a free game. If a predetermined INT time is provided at the start and end of a free game, the INT time at the start of the free game (free game start INT) and the INT time at the end of the free game (free game start INT) are the same. It may be a time width or a different time width. The free game start INT can be used for the performance time width of the above-mentioned "free game start performance", and the free game end INT can be used for the performance time width of the above-mentioned "free game end performance".

In addition, as in this example, when using the jackpot game period as a free game period, the free game start INT and free game end INT may also be used as the start INT and end INT related to the jackpot game. good. However, if the free game ends during the jackpot game, it is preferable not to set the free game end INT. The reason is as follows. If the free game end INT is executed during a jackpot game, a waiting time will occur during the jackpot game, and this waiting time does not occur at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game every time, and the game progresses. Problems may arise, such as the game being hindered, or the jackpot game period being extended unnecessarily. Therefore, if the free game ends during the jackpot game, it is preferable not to set the free game end INT. Note that at the end of the free game, only the free game end effect may be executed.

(About error management processing during free games)
Next, the details of processing when an error occurs during a free game will be explained.

If the frame control unit 22 determines that there is an abnormality in counting (detecting) the number of fired balls or the number of foul balls, the frame control unit 22 may be configured not to transmit such information to the main control unit 20. For example, the gaming machine information response message may include information indicating the number of balls fired or the number of foul balls as 0 (zero). In this case, it is preferable to notify the main control unit 20 that an abnormality (count abnormality, etc.) has occurred. The fact that an abnormality has occurred may be sent as part of the gaming machine information response message (sent in one command), or it may be sent in a separate message (dedicated error command) from the gaming machine information response message. It's okay.

When the main control unit 20 confirms a communication abnormality with the frame control unit 22, the main control unit 20 counts the cumulative number of fired balls without discarding (obtaining) the fired ball number information (launched ball information and/or foul ball information). Processing related to this may also be performed. However, if a communication abnormality is confirmed, it is preferable to treat the received information as invalid and not to count the cumulative number of balls fired. Note that the communication abnormality is a case where the gaming machine information response message cannot be received normally (for example, when the above-mentioned determination bit of the reception result (reception OK) is an abnormal value). The main control unit 20 may be configured to determine whether the gaming machine information response message is normal or not, and then, if it is normal, to acquire the launched ball information based on the reception result.

Furthermore, if a communication abnormality is confirmed, a predetermined error process may be performed. Note that if the frame control unit 22 is configured to retransmit data even if a communication error is confirmed, if the transmission is normal, it will continue as usual without executing error processing. Game processing may also be performed. In addition, even if a communication abnormality is confirmed, error handling is not executed immediately. (for example, 10 times), it may be determined that an error has occurred, and predetermined error processing may be executed.

As an error process, for example, after or before performing the process related to the end of the free game (for example, the setting process at the time of the end), or before performing the process, error notification or stopping the firing operation (instruction of the frame control unit 22 It may also be configured to be able to execute game stop processing such as transmitting a firing stop signal. Furthermore, if there is main control side information regarding the free game managed by the main control unit 20 and frame control side information of the free game managed by the frame control unit 22, and the information does not match, Predetermined error processing may be performed assuming that a communication abnormality has occurred. In this case, both information is collected at the start of the free game, at one or more predetermined timings during the execution of the free game (for example, when 108ms interrupt processing is executed), and at least one timing at the end of the free game. You may also check that they match.

Further, the main control unit 20 may be configured to terminate the free game in progress in addition to error notification or error notification and game stop processing when a highly serious error occurs (free game forced termination control). . In this case, the main control unit 20 preferably notifies the frame control unit 22 that the error has occurred. Errors with a high degree of severity are, for example, errors that the game machine should be most wary of (errors that cause high damage to the game machine), such as errors targeting fraudulent activities, and errors with a low degree of severity are, for example, errors that simply cause damage to the game machine. , errors that cause little damage to the gaming machine (errors that are relatively easy to resolve), such as cases where balls are stuck in the circulation path. If a less serious error occurs, only the error notification may be performed.

<Control example 2: Figure 58 (b) "Frame control side end monitoring configuration">
In the above, at least the main control unit 20 side monitors the end of the free game, and when the end timing arrives, notifies the frame control unit 20 side to that effect, and from the notification, the frame control unit 20 side understands the end of the free game. The "main control side termination monitoring configuration" is described in which the free game being executed (subtraction processing stopped state) is terminated.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least the frame control unit 22 side monitors the end timing of the free game and notifies the main control unit 20 side when the end timing arrives, and the frame control unit 22 independently monitors the end timing of the free game. (Subtraction processing stopped state) can be configured as a "frame control side completion monitoring configuration".

In the case of this "frame control side end monitoring configuration", as shown in FIG.
a free game ball management means for managing the number of balls held during the free game;
Cumulative number of fired balls counting means for counting the cumulative number of fired balls during a free game based on at least the number of fired balls;
Free game end determination means for determining whether the cumulative number of balls fired has reached the end prescribed number (100);
a free game-related information notification means (response message transmission means) that transmits free game end designation information (information indicating that the free game has ended) to the main control unit 20 when the cumulative number of balls fired reaches the specified end number; , can be configured to include.

The above-mentioned free game balls management means includes a free game ending means that suspends at least the process of subtracting the number of balls held during the free game, and restarting the process of subtracting the number of balls held when the cumulative number of fired balls reaches the end prescribed number. and a free game ending means.

In addition, in the case of the "frame control side end monitoring configuration" according to this example, the main control unit 20 (free game starting means) controls the start of the free game from the gaming machine as in control example 1 shown in FIG. The frame control unit 22 can be configured to notify the frame control unit 22 by an information notification message, receive the notification, grasp the start timing of the free game, and interrupt the process of subtracting the number of balls held (as described above). (See descriptions in (A1) and (A2) of "Free Game Start Notification").

The main control unit 20 also determines whether or not the free game has ended based on the free game end designation information (free game continuation management means), and if the free game has ended, the It can be configured to perform setting processing (setting processing at the time of ending) (free game ending means). In this example, as a setting process at the time of ending, the free game flag is set to the OFF state (00H), a predetermined area of the RAM used during the free game is cleared, and a free game end command is sent to the production control section 24. Performs processing such as sending.

In addition, when the frame control unit 22 (free game related information notification means) notifies the main control unit 20 side by including "cumulative ball count information" in the gaming machine information response message, the following (communication 3) to (communication 5).

(Communication 3) Information on the cumulative number of balls fired can be transmitted using one byte of the "reception result" of the gaming machine information response message shown in FIG. In this case, the main control unit 20 can grasp the current cumulative number of shot balls and the "remaining number of shot balls" up to the specified end number. As a result, similarly to control example 1 in FIG. 58(a), a command that can specify the "remaining number of fired balls" up to the end specified number is sent to the performance control unit 24, and the above-mentioned "remaining number of fired balls notification performance" is executed. can be configured to appear.
(Communication 4) Also, out of 1 byte of the received result, a specific bit (for example, the most significant bit (MSB)) is assigned to "free game end designation information", and the remaining bits are assigned to "cumulative ball count information". May be assigned. Note that if it is possible to notify the end of the free game, the contents of the bit can be determined as appropriate.
(Comment 5) If the cumulative number of balls fired cannot be expressed in one byte, the cumulative number of balls fired and the free game end designation information may be notified in two bytes. Further, dedicated data (1 to 2 bytes) for notification of the cumulative number of fired balls and dedicated data (1 byte) for notification of free game end designation information may be provided.

The advantage of the above-mentioned "frame control side end monitoring configuration (control example 2)" is that the frame control unit 22 has a part of the function of counting the number of balls (subtraction mechanism count sensor 68, detection of non-winning ball path count sensor 67). information), it is possible to independently count the cumulative number of balls fired and monitor the end of the free game.

Note that it is preferable that the frame control unit 22 be configured to be able to transmit information to the effect that a free game is being played to an external device. From the perspective of preventing cheating, etc., it is highly necessary to notify the hall computer HC that a free game is in progress. This is because it is preferable to notify the player by using the data counter DT or by the data counter DT to notify that the free game is in progress.

In addition, the fact that a free game is being played is displayed on a predetermined display connected to the main control unit 20 or the frame control unit 22 (for example, the composite display device 38c, the number of games display device 77, etc.), or on a dedicated display. It is possible to configure the system so that notification can be made.

During the free game, processing (operation) regarding ball lending and/or return of game balls by the ball lending device (external unit SC) may be disabled. For example, during a free game, even if the ball lending request switch 87 or the return switch (not shown) is operated, the ball lending device is controlled not to output a ball lending request signal or a return signal. Of course, even during a free game, the processes (operations) related to lending and returning game balls may be enabled, or only one of them may be enabled.

In addition, during a free game, if the configuration is such that you can fire game balls even if the number of balls you have is "zero" (because the number of balls you have is not subtracted, the firing action will be treated as valid). ), processes (operations) related to lending and returning game balls may be enabled. However, in the case of a configuration that stops the firing operation of game balls when the number of balls held is "zero", if the return operation of balls held is enabled, the number of balls held becomes zero and the firing operation stops. Therefore, it is preferable to disable at least the operation of returning the ball during the free game.

The embodiment described above can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Note that although the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
Configuration (1) Winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means;
A main control means (FIG. 35 (main control unit 20)) that is configured to be able to manage prize ball number information based on the detection information detected by the entered prize detection means and controls game progress operations;
A sub-control means (FIG. 35 (frame control unit 22)) configured to be able to execute an increase/decrease management process for the number of game balls used for playing the game based on the prize ball number information from the main control means. ,
A managed gaming machine (FIG. 35) that plays games by cyclically using game balls sealed inside,
The main control means is
The main process (FIG. 36A, FIG. 36B (FIG. 37)) that starts after the power is turned on;
a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated at a first predetermined time interval, includes a management process for managing information detected by the entered prize detection means, and executes a process related to game progress;
configured to be able to execute a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 43) that is activated at every second predetermined time and executes a transmission process for transmitting prize ball number information based on the detection information to the sub-control means;
The priority of the first timer interrupt processing is set higher than the priority of the second timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 39 and 43);
A managed gaming machine characterized by:

Configuration (2) winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means;
A main control means (FIG. 35 (main control unit 20)) that is configured to be able to manage prize ball number information based on the detection information detected by the entered prize detection means and controls game progress operations;
A sub-control means (FIG. 35 (frame control unit 22)) configured to be able to execute an increase/decrease management process for the number of game balls used for playing the game based on the prize ball number information from the main control means. ,
A managed gaming machine (FIG. 35) that plays games by cyclically using game balls sealed inside,
The main control means is
The main process (FIG. 36A, FIG. 36B (FIG. 37)) that starts after the power is turned on;
a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated at a first predetermined time interval, includes a management process for managing information detected by the entered prize detection means, and executes a process related to game progress;
configured to be able to execute a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 43) that is activated at every second predetermined time and executes a transmission process for transmitting prize ball number information based on the detection information to the sub-control means;
The priority of the first timer interrupt processing is set higher than the priority of the second timer interrupt processing, and the first predetermined time is shorter than the second predetermined time (FIG. 39, 43),
A managed gaming machine characterized by:

Configuration (3) winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means;
A main control means (FIG. 35 (main control unit 20)) that is configured to be able to manage prize ball number information based on the detection information detected by the entered prize detection means and controls game progress operations;
A sub-control means (FIG. 35 (frame control unit 22)) configured to be able to execute an increase/decrease management process for the number of game balls used for playing the game based on the prize ball number information from the main control means. ,
A managed gaming machine (FIG. 35) that plays games by cyclically using game balls sealed inside,
The sub-control means
When receiving prize ball number information from the main control means, it is configured to transmit the reception result information to the main control means,
The main control means is
The main process (FIG. 36A, FIG. 36B (FIG. 37)) that starts after the power is turned on;
a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated at a first predetermined time interval, includes a management process for managing information detected by the entered prize detection means, and executes a process related to game progress;
configured to be able to execute a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 48) that is activated at every second predetermined time;
The second timer interrupt processing includes:
a transmission process of transmitting prize ball number information based on the detection information to the sub-control means (S703 in FIG. 48);
a reception process (S704 in FIG. 48) for receiving the reception result from the sub-control means;
The transmitting process and the receiving process are configured to be executed alternately at every second predetermined time (S702 in FIG. 48);
A managed gaming machine characterized by:

The configuration may be a combination of one or more of all the embodiments described above (including all the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment), and the contents described in each embodiment apply only to the individual embodiments. It is not limited.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a pinball game machine that uses game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be an arranged ball machine, a mahjong ball game machine, or a game machine that uses game medals as other game media (a spinning drum type game machine).

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a Game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
22 frame control unit (frame control board),
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Normal symbol display device,
50, 52a Big winning hole, big winning hole sensor 41, 41c Normal variable winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 Out mouth,
94 Setting key switch,
95 Setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 Performance indicator 201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 Performance control CPU, performance control ROM, performance control RAM.

Claims (1)

A managed gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the execution of various gaming processes related to gaming operations, and that plays games by cyclically using gaming balls sealed inside,
A main control means that controls game progress processing related to game progress;
A ball-pulling means that can be controlled into a ball-pulling state in which game balls can be ejected to the outside of the gaming machine and a non-ball-pulling state in which the ball cannot be ejected; a ball-pulling state monitoring means for monitoring the ball-pulling state , and a ball-pulling state that indicates to the main control means that the ball-pulling state is present when the ball-pulling state monitoring means determines that the ball-pulling state is in the ball-pulling state; a sub-control means comprising a transmission means for transmitting information;
It is composed of
The main control means is configured to limit the execution of the game progress process when receiving the ball drawing state information from the sub control means ;
A managed gaming machine characterized by:

Images